proposed active pharmaceutical - Environmental Clearance

PROPOSED ACTIVE PHARMACEUTICAL

INGREDIENTS (APIS) AND API INTERMEDIATES

MANUFACTURING UNIT

AT

D-10, MIDC PAITHAN, DISTRICT.AURANGABAD,

MAHARASHTRA

BY

M/S. SHALINI ORGANICS PRIVATTE. LIMITED,

PROPOSAL FOR

ENVIRONMENT CLEARANCE

Industry falls under 5(f) under Category ‘A’ as per the EIA

Notification, 2006 and amendments thereof

Report Prepared By:

DR. SUBBARAO’S ENVIRONMENT CENTER

‘Arundhati’, Opp. Sahyognagar, MSEB Road,

Vishrambag, Sangli-416415

Phone: 0233-2301857, (M) 9372109522,9890992118

QCI-NABET Accredited EIA Consultant Organization

Certificate No. NABET/EIA/1922/ RA 0159

NABL Quality Assurance Laboratory Accreditation

Certificate No.TC-6121

M/s. Shalini Organics Pvt. Ltd., MIDC Paitha, Dist- Aurangabad. EIA/EMP

Page ii

DECLARATION

Declaration by Experts contributing to the EIA “Proposed Active Pharmaceutical Ingredients

(APIs) and API Intermediates Manufacturing Unit at Plot No. D-10, MIDC Paithan-431107,

Taluka- Paithan, Dist.- Aurangabad, Maharashtra, by Shalini Organics Private Limited”. I,

herby, certify that I was a part of the team in the following capacity that developed the above EIA.

EIA coordinator:

Name: Dr. B. Subbarao

Signature Date: 31st May 2021

Period of involvement: December 2020 Onwards

Contact information: ‘Arundhati’, opposite- Sahayognagar, M.S.E.B. Road, Sangli 416415.

Sr.

No.

Name of

Expert/s

EC/FAE

Sector Involvement (Period and Task) Date Signature

1. Dr. B.

Subbarao

EIA

Coordinator

WP, SHW,

AP,AQ

December 2020 Onwards

Overall Project Coordination including

Planning Schedule Discussions with

project proponent/local community,

interpretation of data, Overall

assessment of impacts and its mitigation

measures and preparation of EIA report.

1st December

2020 to till

completion

of project.

2. Mrs. B.

Nagjyoti WP


Project Planning in Coordination with

EIA Coordinator. Preparation of Waste

Water Management Plan, Selection of

sampling stations, interpretation of the

data, identification of impacts and its

mitigation measures.

1stDecember

2020 to till

completion of

project

3. Dr. S. P.

Chavan NV


Assessment and Prediction of Impact

Noise Quality on the project site and

entire study area due to the proposed

expansion and Preparation of Report.

1stJanuary

2020 to 1st

February

2020.

4. Dr. V. B.

Jugale SE


Baseline study related with Socio-

economic Status of the project site and

entire study area. Identification of

impacts (Positive & negative) by

proposed project in study area.

Suggestion for improvement of social

status of the study area.

1stJanuary

2020 to

1stFebruary

2020.

5. Mr. S. V.

Chikurde LU


Assessment of Land use and Land Cover

of the project site and entire study area.

Categorization of land use pattern based

on the Satellite imagery and supporting

software.

1st February

2020 to

1stMarch

2020.


Page iii

Sr.

No.

Name of

Expert/s

EC/FAE

Sector Involvement (Period and Task) Date Signature

6. Mr. G. G.

Watwe RH


Identification of Risk associated with

the project, Preparation of Disaster

Management Plan, Occupational Health

and Safety etc. Preparation of Risk

Assessment Report.

1st February

2020 to 1st

March 2020.

7.

Prof. M.

B.

Kulkarni

HG & GEO


Assessment of Hydro-geological

condition of the project and study area,

Prediction of impacts due to the

proposed project and preparation of

Management Plan for the same.

1stJanuary

2020 to 1st

February

2020.

8. Mr. D. D.

Shenai EB


Assessment of Impact due to proposed

project on Ecology & biodiversity of the

project site and preparation of

Management Plan for the same

1stFebruary

2020 to

1stMarch

2020.

9. Mr. S. A.

Khatode AQ



EIA Coordinator. Baseline study related

to Air Qualityand, identification of

impacts and its mitigation measures.

1stDecember

2020 to till

completion of

project

10. Mr. A.S.

Tompe WP



EIA Coordinator. Preparation of Waste

Water Management Plan, Selection of

sampling stations, interpretation of the

data, identification of impacts and its

mitigation measures.

1stDecember

2020 to till

completion of

project

Declaration by the Head of the accredited consultant organization/authorized person

I, Dr. B. Subbarao hereby, confirm that the above mentioned experts prepared the EIA for “Proposed Active

Pharmaceutical Ingredients (APIs) and API Intermediates Manufacturing Unit at Plot No. D-10, MIDC

Paithan-431107, Taluka- Paithan, Dist.- Aurangabad, Maharashtra, by Shalini Organics Private Limited”.

I also confirm that the consultant organization shall be fully accountable for any mis-leading information

mentioned in this statement.

Signature: Date: 31st May 2021

Designation: Head of the Organization

Name of the EIA consultant organization: DR. SUBBARAO’S ENVIRONMENT CENTER

NABET Certificate No.& Issue Date: NABET/ EIA/1922/RA 0159, Issue date- 29.05.2020


Page iv

CONSULTANANT UNDERTAKING


Page v

TABLE OF CONTENTS

DECLARATION .......................................................................................................................................... ii

CONSULTANANT UNDERTAKING ....................................................................................................... iv

TABLE OF CONTENTS .............................................................................................................................. v

LIST OF TABLES ...................................................................................................................................... xii

LIST OF FIGURES .................................................................................................................................... xv

LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS ................................................................................................................... xvii

EXECUTIVE SUMMERY ........................................................................................................................... 1

1. INTRODUCTION .............................................................................................................................. 15

1.1. Preface......................................................................................................................................... 15

1.2. Purpose of the Project ................................................................................................................. 15

1.3. Identification of Project and Project Proponent .......................................................................... 16

1.4. Importance of the Project ............................................................................................................ 16

1.5. Brief Description of the Project .................................................................................................. 17

1.6. Applicable Environmental Regulatory frame work – ................................................................. 22

1.7. Scope of EIA Study- ................................................................................................................... 22

1.8. Compliance of Terms of Reference ............................................................................................ 23

1.9. Objective of EIA ......................................................................................................................... 42

1.10. Methodology for EIA .............................................................................................................. 42

1.11. List of Industries Surrounding Project Site ............................................................................. 44

1.12. Structure of EIA Report .......................................................................................................... 44

2. PROJECT DESCRIPTION ................................................................................................................. 32

2.1. Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 32

2.2. Need of the Project ...................................................................................................................... 32

2.3. Location of the Project ................................................................................................................ 33

2.4. Size or magnitude of Operation .................................................................................................. 36

2.4.1. Land Breakup & Project Site Layout .................................................................................. 36

2.5. Project Magnitude ....................................................................................................................... 75

2.6. Infrastructure Facilities (Proposed Plant Machineries and Equipment’s) ................................... 77

2.7. Description of Manufacturing Process- ...................................................................................... 80

2.7.1. API Product Manufacturing Process-.................................................................................. 80

2.8. Input Requirements ..................................................................................................................... 84

2.8.1. Raw Material Requirement ................................................................................................. 84


Page vi

2.8.2. Water Requirement ............................................................................................................. 90

2.8.3. Power: ................................................................................................................................. 92

2.8.4. Fuel requirement details: ..................................................................................................... 92

2.8.5. Man Power .......................................................................................................................... 92

2.9. Generation of Pollutants.............................................................................................................. 92

2.10. Gaseous Emission ................................................................................................................... 92

2.10.1. Hazardous & Solid waste generation .................................................................................. 94

2.11. Pollution Control Strategy ...................................................................................................... 95

2.11.1. Effluent Management .......................................................................................................... 95

2.9.2 Air Pollution Control (APC) Measures ............................................................................. 104

2.11.2. Hazardous/Solid Waste Management ............................................................................... 105

2.11.3. Noise Pollution Control Measures .................................................................................... 106

2.12. Rain Water Harvesting .......................................................................................................... 106

2.13. Green Belt Development ....................................................................................................... 106

2.14. Occupational Health and Safety ............................................................................................ 107

3. DESCRIPTION OF ENVIRONMENT ............................................................................................ 108

3.1. General ...................................................................................................................................... 108

3.2. Study Area ................................................................................................................................ 108

3.3. Study Period .............................................................................................................................. 109

3.4. Source of Environmental Data Generation ............................................................................... 110

3.5. Methodology ............................................................................................................................. 110

3.5.1. Land Use of Study Area .................................................................................................... 110

3.5.2. Land Environment............................................................................................................. 111

3.5.3. Methodology ..................................................................................................................... 111

3.5.4. Pre-Field Interpretation Of Satellite Data ......................................................................... 112

3.6. Topography ............................................................................................................................... 112

3.6.1. Land Use/Land Cover Classification ................................................................................ 113

3.6.2. Core Land Use .................................................................................................................. 114

3.7. Meteorology .............................................................................................................................. 118

3.7.1. Site specific micro-meteorological data ............................................................................ 118

3.7.2. Windrose – ........................................................................................................................ 119

3.8. Ambient Air Quality ................................................................................................................. 120

3.8.1. Introduction ....................................................................................................................... 120


Page vii

3.8.2. Selection of Sampling Locations ...................................................................................... 121

3.8.3. Reconnaissance ................................................................................................................. 121

3.8.4. Parameters, Frequency and monitoring Methodology ...................................................... 121

3.8.5. Interpretation of result ....................................................................................................... 125

3.8.6. Noise Environment ........................................................................................................... 125

3.9. Hydrogeology ........................................................................................................................... 126

3.10. Hydrogeology of District ...................................................................................................... 129

3.10.1. Geology ............................................................................................................................. 130

3.11. Ground Water Sampling ....................................................................................................... 131

3.12. Surface Water Sampling ....................................................................................................... 137

3.13. Soil Environment .................................................................................................................. 143

3.14. Ecology & Biodiversity ........................................................................................................ 145

3.15. Socioeconomic Study ............................................................................................................ 160

4. ANTICIPATED ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS AND MITIGATION MEASURES.................. 166

4.1. Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 166

4.2. Construction Phase .................................................................................................................... 166

4.2.1. Land Environment Impacts ............................................................................................... 166

4.2.2. Air Environment ............................................................................................................... 167

4.2.3. Water Environment ........................................................................................................... 168


4.2.5. Waste Generation .............................................................................................................. 169

4.2.6. Ecology ............................................................................................................................. 169

4.2.7. Social Environment ........................................................................................................... 169

4.3. Operation phase ........................................................................................................................ 170

4.3.1. Land Environment and Location ....................................................................................... 170

4.3.2. Discharges on Land-Impact .............................................................................................. 170

4.3.3. Impacts- Soil Contamination- ........................................................................................... 170

4.3.4. Air Environment ............................................................................................................... 170


4.3.6. Vibration ........................................................................................................................... 183


4.3.8. Land Use/Land Cover ....................................................................................................... 184

4.3.9. Geology ............................................................................................................................. 184


Page viii

4.3.10. Solid/Hazardous Wastes ................................................................................................... 184

4.3.11. Risk and Occupational Hazards ........................................................................................ 184

4.3.12. Ecological Biodiversity ..................................................................................................... 186

4.3.13. Traffic Study ..................................................................................................................... 187

4.3.14. Odor Management............................................................................................................. 188

4.3.15. Socio- Economic ............................................................................................................... 188

5. ANALYSIS OF ALTERNATIVES (TECHNOLOGY & SITE) ..................................................... 190

5.1. Analysis to alternative- ............................................................................................................. 190

5.2. Site Alternative ......................................................................................................................... 190

5.3. Process Alternative ................................................................................................................... 191

6. ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING REPORT ............................................................................. 192

6.1. Prelude ...................................................................................................................................... 192

6.2. Environmental Monitoring Programme .................................................................................... 192

6.3. Action Scheduled ...................................................................................................................... 193

6.4. Success Indicator ...................................................................................................................... 194

6.5. Environmental Monitoring Hierarchy ....................................................................................... 194

6.6. Conclusion ................................................................................................................................ 194

7. ADDITIONAL STUDIES ................................................................................................................ 195

7.1. Introduction - ............................................................................................................................ 195

7.2. Objectives and Scope of work .................................................................................................. 195

7.2.1. Details of source of water, fire water tanks and fire Fighting equipments (f/e’s, fier

hydrants, nozzles & monitors) .......................................................................................................... 197

7.2.2. Availability of fire extinguishers at strategic locations and accessories and medical

facilities 197

7.3. Hazard identification and visualization of mca scenarios ......................................................... 197

7.4. Hazard potential: Deciding factor ............................................................................................. 197

7.5. Identification of hazards............................................................................................................ 197

7.5.1. M/s Shalini organics as per MSIHC rules, 2000 ............................................................... 198

7.5.2. Fire Explosion & Toxicity Index (FEI & TI) Analysis for Shalini organics .................... 200

7.6. Visualization of MCA Scenarios .............................................................................................. 204

7.6.1. Introduction ....................................................................................................................... 204

7.6.2. Chemical InventoryAnalysis ............................................................................................. 204

7.6.3. Identification of Chemical Release & Accident Scenarios ............................................... 204

7.6.4. Even tree analysis to define outcome of release ............................................................... 204


Page ix

7.6.5. Short listing of mca scenarios ........................................................................................... 204

7.7. Consequence analysis ............................................................................................................... 208

7.7.1. Factors which influence the use of physicAL EFFECT MODEL .................................... 209

7.8. Models for Determining the Source Strength for The Release of Hazardous Substances ........ 209

7.8.1. Instantaneous Release ....................................................................................................... 209

7.8.2. Semi-Continuous Outflow ................................................................................................ 209

7.9. Model for Evaporation .............................................................................................................. 210

7.10. Model for Dispersion ............................................................................................................ 211

7.11. Modelfor HeatLoad sndShock Waves .................................................................................. 211

7.11.1. Model for Flare ................................................................................................................. 211

7.11.2. Model for Pool Fire ........................................................................................................... 211

7.12. Vulnerability Model .............................................................................................................. 211

7.12.1. Injuries resulting from flammable liquids and gases ........................................................ 212

7.12.2. Damage models for heat radiation .................................................................................... 212

7.12.3. Summary of damage criteria ............................................................................................. 212

7.13. Result of maximum credible accident analysis (Mca) .......................................................... 214

7.14. Catagorization risk based on above identifies mca’s ............................................................ 216

7.15. Analysis for propensity towards predicted consequences ..................................................... 217

7.15.1. Possibility of fire & it’S propagation ................................................................................ 217

7.15.2. Spilled Product fire ........................................................................................................... 217

7.15.3. Jet fire in Pipeline/product pump house/tank farm/tt decanting area/tank truck ............... 217

7.15.4. Propensity of the Installation towards occurance of such initiating event ........................ 217

7.15.5. Propensity of failure of the designed counter measures .................................................... 217

7.15.6. Propoensity of a certain consequence of an accident ........................................................ 217

7.15.7. Probability estimation for occurance of mca scenario ...................................................... 218

7.16. Uncertainty surrounding consequence analysis .................................................................... 218

7.17. Alarp principle ...................................................................................................................... 218

7.17.1. Mitigation/preventive measures for mca scenarios ........................................................... 221

7.17.2. Recommendations ............................................................................................................. 241

8. PROJECT BENEFITS ...................................................................................................................... 243

8.1. Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 243

8.2. Improvement in Physical Infrastructure .................................................................................... 243

8.3. Direct Revenue Earning to the National & State Exchequer .................................................... 243


Page x

8.4. Employment Potential ............................................................................................................... 243

8.5. Other Tangible Benefits ............................................................................................................ 243

9. ENVIRONMENTAL COST BENEFIT ANALYSIS ....................................................................... 245

10. ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN ........................................................................... 246

10.1. Introduction ........................................................................................................................... 246

10.2. Environmental management plan during Construction Phase .............................................. 246

10.2.1. 10.2.1 Air and Noise Environment ................................................................................... 246

10.2.2. Water supply & sanitation ................................................................................................. 247

10.2.3. Socio-Economic Environment .......................................................................................... 247

10.2.4. Health and Safety .............................................................................................................. 248

10.3. Environmental Management during the Operational Phase .................................................. 248

10.3.1. Air Pollution Management ................................................................................................ 248


10.3.3. Hazardous/Solid Waste Management ............................................................................... 252

10.3.4. Green belt development .................................................................................................... 252

10.3.5. Occupational Health & Safety Plan .................................................................................. 253

10.3.6. Rain Water HarvestingScheme ......................................................................................... 254

10.3.7. Storm water management .................................................................................................. 254

10.4. Post-Project Environmental Monitoring ............................................................................... 254

10.5. Environment Management Budget Allocation ...................................................................... 255

10.6. Environmental Management Cell ......................................................................................... 256

10.6.1. Hierarchical Structure of Environmental Management Cell ............................................. 257

10.6.2. Environment Policy........................................................................................................... 257

10.7. Corporate Environment Responsibility (CER) Activities ..................................................... 257

11. SUMMARY & CONCLUSION ................................................................................................... 259

11.1. Overall Justification for Implementation of Project .............................................................. 259

11.2. Explanation of How, Adverse Effects Have Been Mitigated ................................................ 259

11.3. Conclusion ............................................................................................................................ 259

12. DISCLOSURE OF THE CONSULTANT ................................................................................... 261

LIST OF ANNEXURES ........................................................................................................................... 268

ANNEXURE-I: GRANTED ToR ............................................................................................................. 269

ANNEXURE-II: DISTANCE CERTIFACTE FROM DFO .................................................................... 277

ANNEXURE-III: MIDC ORDER ............................................................................................................ 279


Page xi

ANNEXURE-IV: MONITORING REPORTS ......................................................................................... 282

ANNEXURE-V: RAINWATER HARVESTING REPORT .................................................................... 299

ANNEXURE-VI: STORMWATER DRAINAGE REPORT ................................................................... 303


Page xii

LIST OF TABLES

Table 1-1 Silent feature of the project ........................................................................................................ 18

Table 1-2 List of proposed products ........................................................................................................... 19

Table 1-3 Details of API Intermediates ...................................................................................................... 19

Table 1-4 Details of total capacity .............................................................................................................. 22

Table 1-5 ToR Compliance ......................................................................................................................... 23

Table 1-6 List of industries in the study area are shown below .................................................................. 44

Table 2-1 Silent feature of the project ........................................................................................................ 33

Table 2-2 Co-ordinated of the site .............................................................................................................. 33

Table 2-3 Land use breakup ........................................................................................................................ 36

Table 2-4 List of API Products ................................................................................................................... 75

Table 2-5 List of API Intermediates ........................................................................................................... 75

Table 2-6 Total capacity of the project ....................................................................................................... 77

Table 2-7 Plant machineries and equipments details. ................................................................................. 77

Table 2-8 Details of utility .......................................................................................................................... 77

Table 2-9 Details of utility .......................................................................................................................... 77

Table 2-10 Details of Solvent and Mother Liquor tank .............................................................................. 78

Table 2-11 Details of Tanks ........................................................................................................................ 78

Table 2-12 Details of Heat exchanger ......................................................................................................... 79

Table 2-13 ETP plant details ....................................................................................................................... 79

Table 2-14 Details of laboratory ................................................................................................................. 79

Table 2-15 Details of proposed QC Instruments......................................................................................... 79

Table 2-16 List of Raw material ................................................................................................................. 84

Table 2-17 Details of Water Consumption ................................................................................................. 90

Table 2-18 Effluent generation ................................................................................................................... 90

Table 2-19 Summary of water budget ......................................................................................................... 90

Table 2-20 Fuel requirement ....................................................................................................................... 92

Table 2-21 Details of effluent generation ................................................................................................... 92

Table 2-22 Details of emission from process and flue gas ......................................................................... 93

Table 2-23 Details of proposed process and air emission ........................................................................... 93

Table 2-24 Details of stack ......................................................................................................................... 94

Table 2-25 Details of Non-hazardous waste ............................................................................................... 94

Table 2-26 Details of hazardous waste ....................................................................................................... 94

Table 2-27 Characteristic of Untreated HCOD Effluent ............................................................................. 98

Table 2-28 Characteristic of LCOD Effluent- 57.1 M3/day ....................................................................... 98

Table 2-29Characteristic of treated Effluent ............................................................................................... 99

Table 2-30 Technical specification of various unit ................................................................................... 100

Table 2-31 Details of mechanical equipments .......................................................................................... 100

Table 2-32 Details of electrical units ........................................................................................................ 101

Table 2-33 Details of STP ......................................................................................................................... 102

Table 2-34 details of electro-mechanical works ....................................................................................... 103

Table 2-35 Details of air pollution control measure ................................................................................. 104

Table 2-36 Hazardous waste Details ......................................................................................................... 105

Table 2-37 Details of Non-hazardous waste ............................................................................................. 106


Page xiii

Table 3-1 Environmental settling of study area ........................................................................................ 109

Table 3-2 details of the used satellite details ............................................................................................ 111

Table 3-3 LU/LC within 1 km radius ........................................................................................................ 114

Table 3-4LU/LC and its Coverage Within 10 KM Radius ....................................................................... 116

Table 3-5Frequency of Environmental Monitoring .................................................................................. 119

Table 3-6Monitoring Methodology of Meteorological Data .................................................................... 122

Table 3-7Monitored Parameters and Frequency of Sampling .................................................................. 122

Table 3-8Monitoring locations.................................................................................................................. 123

Table 3-9Monitoring Results and observations ........................................................................................ 124

Table 3-10The Noise Level in study area ................................................................................................. 126

Table 3-11 Seismic Zoning of India ......................................................................................................... 131

Table 3-12Monitoring locations for Ground water sampling ................................................................... 132

Table 3-13Ground water analysis report ................................................................................................... 133

Table 3-14 Surface water locations ........................................................................................................... 137

Table 3-15Surface water analysis report ................................................................................................... 138

Table 3-16Soil Sampling Locations .......................................................................................................... 143

Table 3-17 Soil analysis report ................................................................................................................. 144

Table 3-18The list of plant species ........................................................................................................... 146

Table 3-19 List of fauna ............................................................................................................................ 153

Table 3-20 Deatails of beetels ................................................................................................................... 153

Table 3-21Dertails of Bugs ....................................................................................................................... 154

Table 3-22 Details of Butterflies ............................................................................................................... 154

Table 3-23Details of Mammals................................................................................................................. 156

Table 3-24 Details of Avifauna ................................................................................................................. 156

Table 3-25Villages Identified for Socioeconomic Survey of Study Area ................................................ 161

Table 3-26Socio economic Profile of District, Taluka& Project site at a Glance .................................... 162

Table 3-27 Details of Socio-economic Indicator ...................................................................................... 162

Table 3-28Details on Population of District Aurangabad ......................................................................... 163

Table 3-29Comparison between Rural and Urabn Area ........................................................................... 164

Table 4-1Modeling Input data for Steam boiler of 2 TPH capacity .......................................................... 174

Table 4-2Modeling Input data for Steam boiler of 2 TPH capacity .......................................................... 175

Table 4-3Incremental emission load due to current activity, contributing in existing baseline values..... 180

Table 4-4 Impacts and Mitigation measure ............................................................................................... 183

Table 4-5 Impact and mitigation measures .......................................................................................... 187

Table 4-6Impact and Mitigation Measure for Transportation ................................................................... 188

Table 6-1Environmental Monitoring Program ......................................................................................... 193

Table 7-1 Details of Flamibility ................................................................................................................ 198

Table 7-2 Applicability of MSIHC Rule ................................................................................................... 199

Table 7-3List of hazardous chemicals and its respective DOW F& E Index ........................................... 202

Table 7-4Degree of Hazards ..................................................................................................................... 203

Table 7-5Toxicity Index and degree of Hazard for Hazardous chemicals ................................................ 203

Table 7-6Short Listing of MCA Scenarios for Plant ................................................................................ 205

Table 7-7Mathematical and Analytical Model for Hazard Analysis ........................................................ 208

Table 7-8Fatal Radiation Exposure Levels ............................................................................................... 213


Page xiv

Table 7-9 Detils of damage due to radiation ............................................................................................. 213

Table 7-10Overpressure Damage.............................................................................................................. 214

Table 7-11 Damage Distances Due to Spilled/Pool Product Fire Scenario, Jet Fire, BLEAVE Fireball

of tank Rupture/failure, Leak from hole in tank ....................................................................................... 215

Table 7-12Risk Matrix .............................................................................................................................. 216

Table 7-13Risk Criteria and Action Requirements ................................................................................... 216

Table 7-14Categorization of Risk as per Identified MCA Scenarios ....................................................... 216

Table 7-15Probability of Occurrences of Identified MCA Scenarios ....................................................... 218

Table 7-16The probabilities for various accident scenarios have been estimated .................................... 218

Table 10-1List of Plants Suggested For Green Belt.................................................................................. 253

Table 10-2Environment Monitoring Plan ................................................................................................. 255

Table 10-3Budget Allocation for Environment Management .................................................................. 255

Table 11-1Summary on Impacts and Mitigation Measures ...................................................................... 259


Page xv

LIST OF FIGURES

Figure 1-1 Site Photographs ........................................................................................................................ 16

Figure 2-1 Project Location ........................................................................................................................ 34

Figure 2-2 Specific location ........................................................................................................................ 34

Figure 2-3 Layout map ................................................................................................................................ 32

Figure 2-4 10 km radius toposheet .............................................................................................................. 36

Figure 2-5 Water balance diagram .............................................................................................................. 91

Figure 2-6 Details of treatment facilities .................................................................................................... 98

Figure 2-7 Details of RO ............................................................................................................................. 99

Figure 3-1 FCC of the 10 km radius with project location ....................................................................... 112

Figure 3-2 Elevation Profile of NW-SE Direction with in 10 km Radius ................................................ 113

Figure 3-3 Elevation Profile of NE-SW Direction with in 10 km Radius ................................................ 113

Figure 3-4Digital Elevation Model with in 10 km Radius ........................................................................ 113

Figure 3-5LU/LC Details of 1 KM Radius ............................................................................................... 115

Figure 3-6 Pie Chart of The Lu/Lc Classification Within 1 Km Radius .................................................. 115

Figure 3-7LU/LC Details of 10 KM Radius ............................................................................................. 117

Figure 3-8Pie Chart of the Lu/Lc Classification Within 10 KM Radius .................................................. 117

Figure 3-9Drainage Pattern Present in the Study Area Within 10 Km Radius ......................................... 118

Figure 3-10Meteorological Data for the Monitoring Period ..................................................................... 120

Figure 3-11Monitoring Locations for AAQM and Noise ......................................................................... 123

Figure 3-12Seismic zone map of India ..................................................................................................... 131

Figure 3-13Monitoring Locations for Ground water and Surface water sampling locations within 10 Km

.................................................................................................................................................................. 132

Figure 3-14Soil sampling locations within 10 Km radius ........................................................................ 143

Figure 3-15 Photographs of floral species ................................................................................................ 151

Figure 3-16 Photographs of Butterflies ..................................................................................................... 155

Figure 3-17 Photographs of Avifauna ....................................................................................................... 160

Figure 4-1 Wind rose diagram .................................................................................................................. 173

Figure 4-2Air Dispersion Modeling Image for PM10 criteria pollutant ................................................... 176

Figure 4-3Air Dispersion Modeling Image for SO2 criteria pollutant...................................................... 177

Figure 4-4Air Dispersion Modeling Image for NOx criteria pollutant ..................................................... 178

Figure 4-5Air Dispersion Modeling Image for CO criteria pollutant ....................................................... 179

Figure 7-1Event Tree Analysis of failure of Atmospheric Storage tank of Flammable Liquids .............. 206

Figure 7-2FN Curve .................................................................................................................................. 221

Figure 7-3Pool Fire Scenario for Methanol Tanks Enclosed in Tank farm area showing Damage Distances

for considered Heat Intensities .................................................................................................................. 223

Figure 7-4Jet Fire Scenario for Methanol Tanks Enclosed in Tank farm area showing Damage Distances


Figure 7-5Tank on fire Scenario for Methanol Tanks Enclosed in Tank Farm Area showing Damage

Distances for considered Heat Intensities ................................................................................................. 225

Figure 7-6Pool Fire Scenario for Toluene Tanks Enclosed in Tank farm area showing Damage Distances


Figure 7-7Jet Fire Scenario for Toluene Tanks Enclosed in Tank farm area showing Damage Distances for

considered Heat Intensities ....................................................................................................................... 227


Page xvi

Figure 7-8Tank on fire Scenario for Toluene Tanks Enclosed in Tank Farm Area showing Damage


Figure 7-9Pool Fire Scenario for Acetone Tanks Enclosed in Tank farm Area showing Damage Distances


Figure 7-10Jet Fire Scenario for Acetone Tanks Enclosed in Tank farm area showing Damage Distances


Figure 7-11Tank on fire Scenario for Acetone Tanks Enclosed in Tank Farm Area showing Damage


Figure 7-12: Pool Fire Scenario for Ethyl Acetate Tanks Enclosed in Tank farm Area showing Damage


Figure 7-13Jet Fire Scenario for Ethyl Acetate Tanks Enclosed in Tank farm area showing Damage


Figure 7-14Tank on fire Scenario for Ethyl Acetate Tanks Enclosed in Tank Farm Area showing Damage


Figure 7-15Pool Fire Scenario for Denatured Sprit Tanks Enclosed in Tank farm Area showing Damage


Figure 7-16Jet Fire Scenario for Denatured Sprit Tanks Enclosed in Tank farm Area showing Damage


Figure 7-17Tank on fire Scenario for Denatured Sprit Tanks Enclosed in Tank Farm Area showing Damage


Figure 7-18Pool Fire Scenario for Triethyl amine drum Enclosed in Tank farm Area showing Damage


Figure 7-19Damage Distances Due to BLEVE Fire ball in Triethyl Amine ............................................ 239

Figure 7-20Pool Fire Scenario for HSD drum Enclosed in Tank farm Area showing Damage Distances for

considered Heat Intensities ....................................................................................................................... 240

Figure 10-1Environment Management Cell ............................................................................................. 257


Page xvii

LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS

AERMOD : American Meteorological Society/Environmental Protection Agency Regulatory

Model

APC : Air Pollution Control

APHA : The American Public Health Association

BCS : Black Cotton Soil

BLEVE : Boiling Liquid Expanding Vapour Explosion

BOD : Biological Oxygen Demand

CER Corporate Environment Responsibilities

COD : Chemical Oxygen Demand

CPCB : Central Pollution Control Board

CSR : Corporate Social Responsibilities

CTO : Consent to Operate

dB : Decibel

DG Set : Disel Generator Set

DMC : Disaster Management Cell

DO : Dissolved Oxygen

EAC : Expert Appraisal Committee

ECC : Emergency Control Centre

EIA : Environmental Impact Assessment

EMP : Environmental Management Plan

ERPGs : Emergency Response Planning Guidelines

ETP : Effluent Treatment Plant

GCV : Gross Calorific Value

GIS : Geographic information system

GLCs : Ground Level Concentrations

HAZOP : Hazard and Operability Study

HIRA : Hazard Identification & Risk Assessment

IMD : The India Meteorological Department

IMFL : Indian made Foreign Liquor

KLPD : Kilo Liter Per Day

KVA : Kilo-Volt-Ampere

MCA : Maximum Credible Accident Analysis

MCLS : Maximum Credible Loss Scenario

MCR : Maximum Continuous Rating

MEE : Multiple Effect Evaporator

MoEF&CC : Ministry of Environmental Forest and Climate Change

MSIHC : manufacture, storage and import of Hazardous Chemical Rules

MT : Metric Tonn

NAAQS : National Ambient Air Quality Standards

NE : North-East

NH-4 : National Highway Number - 4

NW : North-West

PPEs : Pesonal Protective Equipments

QCI-NABET : Quality Council of India – National Accreditation Board for Education and

Training

R & R : Rehabilitation and Resettlement

SEC : Subbarao’s Environment Center

SIA : Social Impact Assessment

SPCB : State Pollution Control Board


Page xviii

SOPL Shalini Organics Private Limited.

ZLD : Zero liquid Discharge


Page 1

EXECUTIVE SUMMERY

1. Introduction

M/s. Shalini Organics Pvt. Ltd. is a Greenfield project, proposes to set up Manufacturing unit for API and

API Intermediate unit at Plot No. D-10, MIDC Paithan, Taluka Paithan, Dist. Aurangabad, Maharashtra, Pin

code: 431107. Totalproduction capacity of the plant will be API= 6 Nos., Capacity = 112 MT/Month and

API Intermediate = 43 Nos., Capacity =1171 MT/MonthTotal Capacity= 1283 MT/Month. Detailed

productlist is given in Table 1.

2. Project Location

The proposed production shall be at Plot No. D-10, MIDC Paithan Aurangabad. The Geographic location of

this industry is at 19o32’55.80” N Latitude & 75o23’9.20” E Longitude with an elevation440 m above mean

sea level. The proposed project is located in MIDC Industrial Area which is meantfor various types of

industries. MIDC has provided all infrastructures like electrical power, continuouswater supply, internal

road network, external approach road etc. Figure No. 2.1 shows the location Mapof project site & Figure

No. 2.2 Google map respectively.

The project site is approachable by Road via State highway Aurangabad to Paithan- 0.5 km. Nearest railway

station is Aurangabad at about 35.46 km and Aurangabad Airport at about 36 km. Project falls within 5 km

radius ofProtected area of Jaikwadi Bird Sanctuary, which is notified under the Wild Life(Protection) Act,

1972 (53 of 1972). Subsequently this area has been declared asEco-Sensitive Zone by MoEFCC {As

perGazette Notification 2202 E, Dated 12thJuly 2017}. The distance of project from boundaryof Jaikwadi

Bird Sanctuary is 4.46 Km in South West Direction

3. Project Description

Complete list of proposed products is given in below Table.


Page 2

Table 1. List of products with its capacity

1] API [Active Pharmaceutical Ingredient]

Sr. No. Product Name UOM Qty.

/Month CAS NO Activity

1 Albendazole MT 60 54965-21-8 Anthelmetis

2 Frusemide MT 10 54-31-9 Anti Diuretic

3 Tizanidine MT 2 51322-75-9 Muscle Relaxer

4 Fenbendazole MT 15 43210-67-9 Antihelmintis

5 Triclabendazole MT 15 68786-66-3 Anti Liver flukes.

6 Hydroxy Quinoline MT 10 148-24-3 Anti-Malarial/Anti Corona

= Total MT 112 = =

2] API Intermediate

Table 2. List of API Intermediates

Sr.

No. Product Name UOM

Qty

/Month CAS NO Remark

1 2-Nitro-4-propyl thioaniline MT 80 54393-89-4 Albendazole Inter.

2 2-Amino -4-Propyl thioaniline/ 4-

Propyl Thiodiamine MT 80 229326-17-4 Albendazole inter

3 2-Nitro Thiocyano aniline/ 2-

Nitro-4-propyl sulfanyl aniline MT 80 54029-45-7 Albendazole inter

4 2-Nitro -5-Phenyl mercapto Aniline MT 10 43156-47-4 Albendazole/Fabental/Fenb.

5 ThiophenoL MT 30 108-98-5 Starting raw material

6 5-Chloro -4-Amino-2,1,3-

Benzothiadiazole MT 1 30536-19-7 Tizanidine Intermediate

7 Sodium Bromide MT 50 7647-15-6 Reagent

8 Sodium Sulphide Flakes/ NAHS

soln MT 50 1313-82-2 Reagent

9 4-Bromo-2-fluoro Aniline MT 15 367-24-8 Flurbiprofen Intermediate

10 2-Fluoro Aniline MT 20 106-94-5 Flurbiprofen Intermediate

11 4-nItro Benzamide MT 30 619-80-7 Dimizimine HCl int

12 3,4 Dimethoxy Aniline MT 15 6315-89-5 Common inter

13 3-Hydroxy -Acetonephenone MT 10 121-71-1 Phenyl epherine interm.

14 Chloro Acetaldehyde Dimethyl

Acetal MT 20 97-97-2 Intermediate

15 Lasamide MT 20 2736-23-4 Frusemide Inter

16 3-Nitro Acetophenone MT 15 121-89-1 PHEP Intermediate

17 4-Chloro-(2,3-dichloro phenoxy)-2-

Nitroaniline MT 20 139369-42-9 Triclabendazole Int

= 6-Chloro-5-(2,3-dichlorophenoxy-

1H-Benzimidazole MT = 100648-13-3 Triclabendazole int.

= 2-Nitro 4,5-dichloroacetanilide MT = 5462-30-6 Triclabendazole int


Page 3

18 2-Chloro 1-(2,4-

difluorophenyl)ethanone MT 5 51336-94-8 Fluconazole int.

19

2-(4-Amino 4,5-dihydro-[1,2,4-

]triazole-1yl}-1-(2,4-difluoro

ethanone

MT 5 86404-63-9 Fluconazole intermediate

20 5-Amino Salicylic acid MT 20 89-57-6 Intermediate

21 1[4-chlorophenyl] phenyl methyl

piperzine MT 10 300543-56-0 Cetrizine diHCl int.

22 Tetra Butyl ammonium Bromide MT 30 1642-19-2 Catalyst.

23 2-(4-methoxyphenyl) acetic acid MT 30 104-01-8 Dextromethorpan HBr.int.

24 Hydrogenation of Aldehydes and

Amines[ Aldehyde to Alcohol] MT 15 NA

General hydrogenation of

aldehydes and Amines.

25 1(2,4-dichloro phenyl)-2-(1-H-

imidazole -1-yl) Etanone/Ethanol MT 20 24155-42-8 Miconazole Inter.

26 1-(carbamethyl-cyclohexyl)Acetic

acid MT 20 1157262-35-5 Gabapentin Intermediate

27 5-(4-(Ethylphenylethoxy) benzyl

thiozolidine-2,4- dione MT 10 112529-15-4 Pioglutazone intermediate

28 4-(4-Ethylphenyl-ethoxy)

benzaldehyde MT 15 114393-97-4 Pioglutazone intermediate.

29 2-(5-ethyl pyridine-ethanol) MT = 5223-06-3 Pioglutazone Intermediate

30 Ammonium thiocyanate MT 100 1762-95-4 Intermediate

31 Hydrogen Cynamide MT 50 420-04-2 Intermediate

32 N-Propyl Bromide MT 25 106-94-5 Intermediate

33 Cyanuric acid MT 25 108-80-5 Starting raw material

34 5-Methoxy-2-mercapto benzimidazole MT 20 37052-78-1 Omeprazole Intermediate

35 2-Chloro-5-Iodo Benzoic acid MT 5 19094-56-5 API Intermediate

36 4-Hydroxy coumarin MT 5 1076-38-6 Warfarin inter.

37 Cyanoacetic acid MT 25 372-09-8 Intermediate

38 5-Chloro-2- Ntroaniline MT 50 1635-61-6 Tricalbendazole

Intermediate

39 2-Nitro Aniline MT 100 88-74-4 Intermediate

40 2-Bromo Isopropyl Isobutyrate MT 10 51368-55-9 Finofibrate Intermediate

41 m-Nitro Benzaldehyde MT 05 99-61-8 Intermediate

42 2,2,4-Trichloro Acetophenone MT 15 4252-78-2 Miconazole Nitrate Interm.

43 4-Amino Benzonitrile MT 10 873-74-5 Intermediate

= Total Intermediate MT 1171 == == == == == ==


Page 4

Total Capacity –

Table 3.List of total capacity

Sr. No. Product details Nos. Tonnage (MT)

1. API 6 112

2. API Intermediate 43 1171

Total 49 1283

Per Month capacity 42.76 MT/ M

At any given time, minimum 2 API and anyone option from intermediate as listed or as provided.

As per the EIA Notification, 2006, proposed activity is listed at S. No.5(f) - Synthetic Organic Chemicals

industry. The proposed project islocated within the notified industrial area by MIDC {Maharashtra Industrial

Development Corporation}. The project also falls within 5 km radius of Protected area of Jaikwadi Bird

Sanctuary, which is notifiedunder the Wild Life (Protection) Act, 1972 (53 of 1972). Subsequently this area

has been declared asEco-Sensitive Zone by MoEFCC {as per Gazette Notification 2202 E, dated 12th July

2017}, under Category “A”. Salient features of the project are presented in Table 4.

Table 4.Silent feature of the project

Sr.No. Particulars Details

A. Nature & Size of

the Project List of the products is mentioned in Table 1 and Table 2

B. Category of the

Project

As per EIA Notification dated 14th Sep., 2006 as amended from time to

time; the project falls in Category ‘A’, Project or Activity -5(f).

C.

Location Details

Village Paithan

Tehsil Paithan

District Aurangabad

State Maharashtra

Latitude 19°32'55.80"N

Longitude 75°23'9.20"E

Mean sea level 440 m

D.

Area Details

Total Project Area

and Green belt

development area

Total Plot Area = 20,000.00 Sq. M.

Green Belt 33% Of Plot Area = 6600.42 Sq. M.

Parking Area 10.08 % Of Plot Area = 2000 Sq. M.

E. Environmental Setting Details (with approximate aerial distance & direction from plant site)

1. Nearest Village Mudhalwadi- 1.42 km

2. Nearest town and

City Aurangabad- 36.97 km

3.

Nearest National

Highway / State

Highway

State highway Aurangabad to Paithan- 0.5 km

4. Nearest Railway

station Aurangabad – 35.46 km


Page 5


5. Nearest Airport Aurangabad Airport – 36 km

6.

National Parks,

Wildlife

Sanctuaries,

Biosphere

Reserves, Tiger/

Elephant

Reserves, Wildlife

Corridors

etc. within 10 km

radius

Project falls within 5 km radius of Protected area of Jaikwadi Bird

Sanctuary, which is notified under the Wild Life (Protection) Act, 1972

(53 of 1972). Subsequently this area has been declared as Eco-Sensitive

Zone by MoEFCC {As per Gazette Notification 2202 E, Dated 12th July

2017}. The distance of project from boundaryof Jaikwadi Bird

Sanctuary is 4.46 Km in South West Direction

7.

Reserved Forests

(RF)/Protected

Forests (PF)

No

8.

Water Body (within

10 km

radius)

No.

9. Seismic Zone Seismic Zone - III as per IS: 1893 (Part-I): 2002

F. Other Details

1. Product Type API and API Intermediate

2. Project Type New (Greenfield)

3. Schedule 5 (f)

4. Category A

5. Project Cost Rs. 8.62 Crores

6. EMP Cost Rs. 116 Lakhs

7. Power Requirement The power requirement for proposed project is

300 HP. (Source: - MSEDCL)

8. Water Requirement Total water consumption: 246.0 CMD

Source -MIDC

9. Fuel Requirement

For Boiler -

Briquettes 500 kg/Hr.

For Thermic Fluid -

Briquettes 250 Kg/Hr.

Diesel (HSD) 30 lit/Hr.

10. Boiler details Steam Boiler 2 TPH capacity

11. Thermic Fluid Heater 2.0 lakhs kcal/hr.

12. D.G. Set details (2 x 250 kVA)

13. Stack details

Boiler 30 m

Thermic Fluid 30 m

D.G Set 6.0 m (Above the roof)

Scrubber 11 m

(Alkali Scrubber)

14. ETP Capacity

1. HCDO/HTDS Effluent treated in STRIPPER/

MEEE/ATFD. 50 CMD 2 Nos.

2. Condensate from MEE/ATFD treated In RO

I. Permeate 92 CMD Recycled

3. Reject 23 CMD recycled to MEE/ATFD

15. Effluent Generation 145.10 m3/day


Page 6


Note: It will be ZLD unit

16. Man Power 60 nos. (Including Skilled and non-skilled)

17. Hazardous waste details

Table 5.Details of waste

Sr.No Description Schedule

No UOM Frequency Quantity Disposal

1 Solvent Distillation Residue 28.10 Kg Day 3958 CHWTSDF

2 ETP Sludge 34.20 kg Day 250 CHWTSDF

3 Evaporation Salts / MEE 34.20 kg Day 6747 CHWTSDF

4 Spent Carbon/ Hyflow 28.30 kg Day 107 CHWTSDF

5 Off Specification Products 28.40 kg Day 100 CHWTSDF

6 Spent Mother Liquor kg Day 8775 Sale to Recycler

7 Spent Acid kg Day 23755 Sale to authorized

user

8 Spent Oil/ Process Residue/

Waste 5.10/5.20 kg Month 200 CHWTSDF

9

Discarded containers and

Drums

Barrels

33.10 No Month 100

Sale to authorized

Recycler/Reprocess

or

10 Chemical sludge, Oil and

grease skimming residues. 35.40 kg Month 100 CHWTSDF

4. Description of the Environment

Primary baseline environmental monitoring studies in 10-km radius study area were conducted through

MoEF&CC, NABL approved laboratory during December 2020 – February 2021.

4.1 Topography, Land use & its Classification

Due to the proposed project is located in notified Industrial area in MIDC; there will be no change in

topography/ Landuse classification of 10 Km study area.


Page 7

4.2 Soil Environment

The soil monitoring was done for 8 different locations present within the study area of the project. The

results obtained of same, reveals that,

The texture of the soil is Clay type

the pH value for soil samples are varying in range of 7.10 to 8.20; which indicate the neutral to

slightly alkaline in nature

The Bulk density of the soil is in the range of 1.01gm/cc to 1.48 g/cc

The Water Holding capacity of the soil in the range of 42.15 % to 52.46 %

The porosity of the soil in the range of 46.35 % to 56.94 %

The Nitrogen (N) level of the soil 256.48 mg/kg to 326.98 mg/kg

Available phosphorus of the soil in the range of 81.46 mg/kg to 136.98 mg/Kg

Available potassium of the soil in the range of 148.70 mg/Kg to 226.80 mg/Kg

Analysis results of soil samples collected from the study area shows that soil has neither been

affected by liquid effluent nor by disposal of solid/ Hazardous waste

Porosity shows that soil has good percolation capacity

Soil is also observed with good fertility for crop production

4.3 Air Environment

The Ambient Air quality was monitored for PM10, PM2.5, NOx, SO2, CO, NH3, C6H6, BaP, O3, Pb and

Ni, at ten locations in the study area.

Particulate Matter (PM2.5)

The average PM2.5concentration at all locations ranged between 25.4-12.1 μg/m3. The PM2.5

concentrations for all locations were observed within stipulated standards for NAAQS (24 hourly PM2.5 =

60 μg/m3)

Particulate Matter (PM10)

The average PM10 concentrations at all locations varied in the range of 58.6μg/m3 – 40.3 μg/m3. The highest

concentration i.e. 58.6 μg/m3is noticed at project site which is attributed to windblown dust, vehicular

movements etc. The PM10 concentrations for all locations were observed to be below stipulated standards

for NAAQS (24 hourly PM10 = 100 μg/m3)

Sulphur Dioxide (SO2) & Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx)

The average SO2 concentrations at all locations were found 18.5 μg/m3-13.0 μg/m3 and the average

concentration of NOx ranged between 28.3 μg/m3 -13.8 μg/m3. The levels of gaseous pollutants were below

the stipulated CPCB standards (24 hourly SO2 is 80μg/m3 and for NOx is 80μg/m3).


Page 8

Carbon Monoxide (CO)

The average CO concentrations at all locations were found 0.45 – 0.1 mg/m3.

In general, the ambient air quality is satisfactory with respect to all major pollutants. The 98th percentile

values of all pollutants were found to be below NAAQS. The other parameters such as Ammonia (NH3),

Benzene, Benzo-α-Pyrene (BAP), Ozone (O3), Lead (Pb) and Nickel (Ni) were found be to below respective

detection limits.

4.4 Noise Environment

The noise quality was monitored at eight (8) locations in the study area during the study period.

The day time noise level at the project premises was observed to be 58.95 dB (A) Leq while during night

time the noise level was recorded to be 51.70 dB (A) Leq. It should be noted that the noise levels during the

day time as well as night time were observed to be within the prescribed standards by Central Pollution

Control Board.

4.5 Ground Water Environment

The results indicate that the pH of all the ground water samples was within the prescribed standards. The

concentration of heavy metals like zinc was below detection limit. Iron was not detected in any of the ground

water samples. The hardness of all the ground water samples was found to be ranging between 112.0 mg/lit

to 321.21 mg/lit. The value of hardness was within the acceptable limit at all the locations. It can be observed

that the values for total dissolved solids in all the sampling locations were estimated to be under the

acceptable standards for drinking water. The concentration of total dissolved solids ranged between 166.0

mg/lit to 654.01 mg/lit. The maximum concentration was observed at location Wahegaon. It should be noted

that the microbiological analysis of all the samples indicate that Total coliform and e-coli was absent in all

the ground water samples. Thus based on the above results it can be stated that the water from the said

samples can be considered fit for consumption and potable purpose with basic primary treatment. The water

can be used for domestic utilization and gardening without any treatment.

4.6 Surface Water Environment

The values obtained are compared with the standards prescribed for the respective designated use of the

water body as categorized in the earlier part of the study. The analysis helps to concluded that the pH of all

the samples was found to vary between: 7.20 – 8.20. It should be noted that the values obtained were within

the desirable limit for pH as prescribed by CPCB. The total hardness was observed to be ranging between

98.95 mg/lit to 1104.02 mg/l . The maximum value of hardness was recorded at Wadawali and the minimum

value was recorded at Paithan Road village. The concentration of Total Dissolved Solids was estimated in

the range of 212 mg/l to 364 mg/l. The maximum concentration of Total Dissolved Solids (TDS) was

observed at Shivbhadra River whereas the minimum TDS concentration was observed at Paithan Road


Page 9

Village. The Chemical Oxygen Demand (COD) & Biochemical Oxygen Demand (BOD) values were

calculated to be in the range of 16 mg/lit. to 7 mg/lit. & 3 mg/lit.to 5.0 mg/lit. respectively.

The presence of heavy metals like, Zinc were found out be below the detection limit for all the water samples.

It should be noted that the iron content in all the samples of surface water bodies were below the detection

limit. Surface runoff from agricultural fields using the fertilizers can be the major source of nitrate.

Conclusion: The comparison of surface water results with IS 2296:1992 ,shows that the designated best use

of water falls under category A & B.

4.7 Biological Environment

None of the identified species within the study area are Schedule I species of the Indian Wildlife Protection

Act, 1972 or listed in IUCN Red List of Threatened Species. There are no legally protected areas such as

National Parks or Wildlife Sanctuaries within 10 km of the Project Site.

4.8 Socio-Economic Environment

Social surveys were conducted in the study area during December 2020 to February 2021 in 24 villages to

collect factual information by involving community. For secondary data primary censusabstract of 2011,

Government of India has been used.

Table 6. Summary of Socio-Economic Aspects

Demographic Parameters Details

No. of States 1

No. of District 1

No. of Tehsil 1

No. of Villages 24

Total No. of House hold population 14557 nos.

Total Population 70,091

Sex Ratio (Study area)

No. of Males

No. of Females

36,459

33,632

Source: Primary Census Abstract 2011Sensus, Pune District, State Maharashtra

5. Anticipated Environmental Impacts and Mitigation Measures

Table 7: Summary of Impacts & Mitigations

Sr.

No

Environmental

Parameters Aspect Attributes Impacts

Proposed Mitigation

Measures

Construction Phase

1. Air Quality

Minor dust emissions

from handling &

transportation of

Workers getting exposed

to the dust pollution

generated due to the

Traffic management for

loading and unloading

of the materials.


Page 10

Sr.

No

Environmental


Proposed Mitigation

Measures

cement/concrete/stone

aggregates.

construction activity can

suffer from respiratory

problems and prolonged

exposure can lead to

malfunctioning of lungs.

Regular sprinkling of

water on the working

site, Avoiding Cement

dust emission,

Managing stockpiles.

Creating wind barrier

for controlling the dust

emissions.

2. Noise Quality

Noise generated from

construction

equipment’s/machinery

like spade, shovel,

dabber, drill, hammer,

concrete mixer etc.

Transportation of

construction materials.

The impacts of high

noise level would be

Temporary/Permanent

hearing loss, Mental

disturbance, Increase in

heart rate, Affecting

worker's performance.

Appropriate PPEs will

be provided to the

workers.

Implementation of

Traffic management.

Development of Green

belt.

3. Water Quality

Water used for

construction activity

mainly for concrete

mixing, sprinkling etc.

Contamination of the

soil and nearby water

bodies due to the surface

runoff.

Proper surface water

runoff management

would be implemented.

Storm water drain

would be provided.

4. Solid Waste

Management

No demolition work is

envisaged however

minor quantities of solid

waste generation is

anticipated in the form

of concrete/construction

materials left over.

Unhealthy Work

Conditions at project

site.

The solid waste

generated in the

construction phase

would be disposed off

through local Municipal

Corporation.

Operational Phase

1. Air Quality

Operation of

BoilerGaseous

emission from

manufacturing process,

Non-

spontaneousemissions

fromTransportation of

raw materials & finished

goods.VOC emission

generated due to the

handling and storage of

the solvents & other raw

materials.

The Health effects

related to particulate

matter are majorly

respiratory, pulmonary

injury & lung cancer etc.

Exposure to SO2 and

NOx majorly leads to

respiratory problems.

Carbon monoxide

decreases the oxygen

carrying capacity of the

blood by reducing the

hemoglobin. The health

effects related to VOC

emission are eye, nose

and throat irritation

headaches, loss of

coordination and nausea,

damage to liver, kidney

1. Combined Stack of

30 m will be provided

to the Boiler.

2. Alkali Scrubber will

be installed to catered

emissions from process

activity.

3. The roads within the

premises are paved to

avoid the dust

generation from

vehicular activity.

4. It will be ensured that

all the transportation

vehicles have a valid

PUC (Pollution under

Control) Certificate.


Page 11

Sr.

No

Environmental


Proposed Mitigation

Measures

and central nervous

system etc. The air

emissions in long course

of time may affect the

immediate surrounding

vegetation stature

physically (leaf

senescence, hampered

growth etc.) &

biologically thus may

affect the overall

surrounding ecology.

5. Proper servicing &

maintenance of vehicles

will be carried out.

6. Regular sweeping of

all the roads & floors

will be done.

7. The proposed thick

green belt along the

plant boundary will help

to capture the fugitive

emission.

8. Industry to ensure

that at no point of time

the air emission

concentrations exceed

the prescribed

standards.

2. Noise Quality

Operation of Boiler,

Reactors, ancillary

utilities & transportation

activity.

The impacts of high

noise level would be

Temporary/Permanent

hearing loss, Mental

disturbanceIncrease in

heart rateDecreasing in

workers performance

due to psychiatric

disorderWorkers

developing Tinnitus due

to high level of noise

exposure on regular

basis.The increased

noise level may induce

locale level disturbances/

temporary migration of

fauna in the immediate

vicinity of the project

area.

1. Acoustic enclosure

will be provided to the

high noise generating

equipment’s for

attenuation of noise

level during operation.

2. Boilers will be placed

in a confined space viz.

boiler house where the

surrounding walls acts

as a barrier for noise

propagation.

3. Isolation of high

intensity noise

generating equipment’s.

4. Using engineering

controls for reducing

the noise level.

5. Appropriate traffic

management to be

implemented.

6. Green belt developed

around the company

premises will acts a

noise barrier.

7. Appropriate PPE

should be provided to

workers.

3. Water Quality 1. Washing Effluent

from process activity.

Indiscriminate

release/discharge of

effluents may

1.It will be ZLD unit

2. The sewage effluent

load from the company


Page 12

Sr.

No

Environmental


Proposed Mitigation

Measures

2. Blow down water

from Boiler and Cooling

Tower.

3.Domestic wastewater

contaminate the

surrounding surface

and groundwater & there

by affecting the overall

ecology & agricultural

productivity.

will be treated in STP of

suitable capacity

3. The condensate from

MEE unit will be

utilized as feed water in

cooling tower, boiler,

and process. while the

residue from will be

disposed through

CHWTSDF.

4.

Solid Waste

Management -

Hazardous

Waste

1. Hazardous waste

generated from the

Storage of Raw material.

2. Sludge generated from

the ETP operation.

3. Residue generated

from the MEE operation.

Unscientific handling &

disposal may lead to

contamination of

surrounding soil, water

sources & there by

affecting the ecology &

health of the workers

coming in direct contact

with the hazardous waste

like skin

allergies/rashes/burns

etc.

1. Hazardous waste

generated from the

overall activity of the

project will disposed to

CHWTSDF.

2. Sludge generated

from the ETP

operations are disposed

to – CHWTSDF.

3. Residue generated

from MEE unit will be

disposed through

CHWTSDF.

Solid Waste

Management -

Non Hazardous

waste

1. Scrap Metal

2. Scrap Plastic

3. Office Waste

4.Food Waste

5. Carboys & wooden

pellets

Hap-Hazard handling &

storage may lead to

inadequate open space in

plant premises & it may

lead to rodent breeding.

Designated area for

Scrap materials will be

provided in the plant.

Scrap materials will be

recycled through

registered scrap

vendors.

Daily housekeeping

waste and food waste

will be disposed

through local waste

management facility.

6. Risk and Mitigation Measures

Pressure safety valves for storage tanks

Pressure alarm high and pressure alarm low for storage tanks

Level indicators with monitoring from control for storage tanks

Level transmitter, Level gauge and Temperature indicators for the storage tanks

Fire protection arrangements in the form of Fire Hydrants and Monitors for the storage tanks.

Emergency Handling checklist and procedure. Detailed information is given in Chapter 7.

7. Disaster Management Plan


Page 13

Disaster Management Plan will be implemented in consultation with the District Administration to take care

of health and safety during any untoward incident.

In view of handling of processes in industry, On-site Emergency Plans are important and hence has been

prepared for the industry. Additionally, recommendations for and Off-site shall be provided to the District

Administration. During operational phase, surrounding population shall be made aware of safety precautions

to be taken in case of any emergency situation due to the overall project activity.

8. Occupational Safety & Health Management

Company is and shall continue to strictly adhere to the rules of Factories Act 1948 & the Maharashtra

Factories Rules, 1963 regarding the occupational health facilities to be provided to the workers of the

company.

The industry has provided decontamination facilities for the workers. The health records of the

workers are being maintained.

For the continuous and continual development, company will continue to train & educate the

operators and workers with the environment, health & safety rules & regulation, procedure and

measures.

Periodic medical checkup is and shall continue to be carried out to ensure the health status of the all

workers.

Job rotation will be done.

9. Post Project Environmental Monitoring Plan

The sampling, analysis and frequency of environmental attributes including monitoring locations will be as

per the guidelines provided by MoEF/CPCB/MPCB. The monitoring shall be carried out by J.V. Analytical

Services, Pune recognized by MoEFCC, GOI, New Delhi, and ISO 9001:2008, OHSAS 18001: 2007 NABL

Certified Company.

NABL Certificate No.TC-7323, dtd. 24/11/2020 and MoEF&CC Laboratory certificate No. F.No.Q-

150-15018/7/2014-CPW. Details are enclosed as Annexure

10. Environmental Management Plan

An environmental monitoring program in place, periodic review & audits are carried out for effective

environmental management and the same shall be strengthen and extended for the proposed project activity

as well. The Plant has an EHS department which ensures overall effective implementation of the

management plan.


Page 14

In general, systems are in place to ensure compliance with respect to environmental statutory requirements

and Environment Policy of Shalini Organics Pvt. Ltd. are strongly adhered to all time. The same shall be

extended to the proposed project as well.

All recommendations given in the EIA report including that of occupational health, risk mitigation and safety

will be complied. Shalini Organics Pvt. Ltd. have allocated INR 116 Lacs as environmental pollution control

measures.

11. Project Benefits

The following benefits are expected from the proposed project:

This project of Shalini Organics Pvt. Ltd. will have positive social and economic benefits.

Some of these would be direct benefits of long term nature.

The project will overcome the demand and supply gap of steel product in the country and the

additional steel availability will boost the infrastructure of the area and the overall economic

scenario of the country.

The project will also generate additional revenue for the State Government.

The project will create additional direct/indirect employment for people.

Local people will be preferred for employment during the construction and operation stage.

12. Corporate Environment Responsibility (CER) Action Plan

CER plan has been made from this perspective, to ensure the quality of life and quality of study area people

will be improved. CER, in fact, is about business giving back to the society.

M/s. Shalini Organics Pvt. Ltd. proposes to allocate 2 % of their total expansion cost for CER activities as

suggested in MoEFCC O.M. regarding Corporate Environment Responsibility vide. F.No. 22-65/2017-IA

III. The total cost of the project is around Rs. 8.62 Crore and 2 % (i.e. Rs. 17.24 Lakh) has been allocated

for CER Action Plan. The same shall be implemented over a period of 2 years.

The activities under CER shall cover education, health, infrastructure, culture and sports, skill development

& training and women empowerment.


Page 15

1. INTRODUCTION

1.1. Preface

An Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) is an assessment of the possible impacts that a proposed project

may have on the environment - consisting of the environmental, social and economic aspects. It is an

assessment and management tool that evaluates the possible impacts, positive or negative, that a proposed

project may have on the environment. EIA systematically examines both beneficial and adverse

consequences of the project and ensures that these effects are taken into account during project design. The

purpose of the assessment is to ensure that decision makers consider the ensuing environmental impacts

when deciding to proceed with a project. In India, Ministry of Environment and Forests has defined

elaborated “Environmental Clearance (EC)” framework along with requirements for preparing

Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) under the Environmental (Protection) Act, 1986 (Environmental

Impact Assessment Notification, 2006) for establishing/expanding and industry/development projects.

1.2. Purpose of the Project

The purpose of the EIA Report is to obtained an Environmental Clearance for the Proposed Active

Pharmaceutical Ingredients (APIs) and API Intermediates Manufacturing Unit” of M/s. Shalini Organics

Pvt. Ltd., by carrying out Environmental Impact Assessment Studies (EIA).

The aim of carrying out Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) study is to assess the impacts, due to the

proposed manufacturing production as well as due to related industrial activity on the environment and

suggesting suitable mitigation measures. This EIA report also highlights some beneficial impacts of due to

proposed project. The structure of EIA Report is as per the requirement and guidelines as per the Terms of

Reference (ToR) given by MoEF&CC vide File no. IA-J-11011/281/2020-IA-II (I) dated 27.11.2020 and

the guidelines of the Technical Manual on the Synthetic Organic Chemicals. The proposed manufacturing

unit is for the Products of “Active Pharmaceutical Ingredients (APIs) and API Intermediates”. The

project also falls within 5 km radius of Protected area of Jaikwadi Bird Sanctuary, which is notified under

the Wild Life (Protection) Act, 1972 (53 of 1972).


Page 16

Figure 1-1 Site Photographs

EIA Consultant:

M/s. Shalini Organics Pvt. Ltd., has retained Dr. Subbarao’s Environment Center’, Sangli as EIA

Consultant for this project for assessing the impact of the industry on various environmental parameters in

the study area and to prepare EIA Reports and Environmental Management Plan for negating the adverse

impact of the project. Dr. Subbarao’s Environment Center’, Sangliis accredited as Category-A

organization under the QCI-NABET Scheme for accreditation of EIA consultant Organizations: Version 3

for preparing EIA-EMP reports. Environment Impact Assessment (EIA) and Environmental Management

Plan (EMP) have been prepared after obtaining Terms of References (ToRs) from MoEF&CC.

1.3. Identification of Project and Project Proponent

The Company, M/s. Shalini Organics Pvt. Ltd, was promoted by Mr. Shirish Kulkarni, who is having huge

experience in API and API intermediate Manufacturing business. The aim of the M/s. Shalini Organics Pvt.

Ltd. is to set up manufacturing activity of API & API Intermediate based on market study and according to

the changing marketing environment.

1.4. Importance of the Project

India's chemical industry is the third largest in the world in terms of volume and ranks 14th in terms of value.

However, India lags far behind US and China mainly due to smaller scale of operations and various

regulatory restrictions in catching opportunities when thrown before entrepreneurs. It is objective of our

Government to improve ease of doing business and increase India’s contribution in World’s GDP which in

turn improve standard of living of our population.

Recently 40% of chemicals units in China were abruptly closed by Chinese Govt. due to their poor

infrastructure and polluting operations. That has been a great interruption for downstream consumers not

only in US, Europe and Japan but also in India and China itself. World is now looking to India to fulfil the

vacuum and be a permanent second source / alternative to Chinese manufacturers keeping in mind uncertain

Government Policies in China.

This has now created a very interesting opportunity for Indian economy and it is our sincere effort to cash-

in the said once-in-blue-moon opportunity.


Page 17

The proposed products will serve to cut the supply of imports from foreign countries thus saving currency

and at the same time will earn valuable foreign currency by export of the products. The company is

manufacturing Fine Chemicals. We see a strong demand from a buoyant Pharma Industry. The market for

API and Fine Chemicals is growing and there is also a good demand from export markets. Some of our

products will be import substitute and hence will save foreign exchange for the country. This project will

help the MAKE IN INDIA concept in our own small way.

In addition, the Indian pharmaceutical industry currently tops the chart amongst India's science- based

industries with wide ranging capabilities in the complex field of drug manufacture and technology. A highly

organized sector, the Indian pharmaceutical industry is estimated to be worth $ 4.5 billion, growing at about

8 to 9 percent annually. It ranks very high amongst all the third world countries, in terms of technology,

quality and the vast range of medicines that are manufactured. It ranges from simple headache pills to

sophisticated antibiotics and complex cardiac compounds; almost every type of medicine is now made in

the Indian pharmaceutical industry.

The Indian pharmaceutical sector is highly fragmented with more than 20,000 registered units. It has

expanded drastically in the last two decades. The Pharmaceutical and Chemical industry in India is an

extremely fragmented market with severe price competition and government price control. The

Pharmaceutical industry in India meets around 70% of the country's demand for bulk drugs, drug

intermediates, pharmaceutical formulations, chemicals, tablets, capsules, orals and injectable. There are

approximately 250 large units and about 8000 Small Scale Units, which form the core of the pharmaceutical

industry in India (including 5 Central Public Sector Units).

The Indian pharma industry, which is expected to grow over 16 per cent per annum between 2017 and 2020,

will outperform the global pharma industry, which is set to grow at an annual rate of 5 percent between the

same periods. The market is expected to grow to US$ 55 billion by 2020, thereby emerging as the sixth

largest pharmaceutical market globally by absolute size, as stated Indian Ambassador to the US. Branded

generics dominate the pharmaceuticals market, constituting nearly 80 per cent of the market share (in terms

of revenues).

India has also maintained its lead over China in pharmaceutical exports with a year- on-year growth of 11.44

per cent to US$ 12.91 billion in FY 2017-18, according to data from the Ministry of Commerce and Industry.

Imports of pharmaceutical products rose marginally by 0.80 per cent year-on-year to US$ 1,641.15 million.

Overall drug approvals given by the US Food and Drug Administration (USFDA) to Indian companies have

nearly doubled to 201 in FY 2017-18 from 109 in FY 2016-17. The country accounts for around 30 per cent

(by volume) and about 10 per cent (value) in the US$ 70-80 billion US generics market.

1.5. Brief Description of the Project

Salient features of the project and list of products are given in Table 1.1 and Table 1.2, respectively;


Page 18

Table 1-1 Silent feature of the project

Sr. No. Particulars Details

A. Nature & Size of the

Project List of the products are mentioned in Table .1.2.

B. Category of the Project

As per EIA Notification dated 14th Sep., 2006 as amended from

time to time; the project falls in Category ‘A’, Project or Activity

-5(f).

C.

Location Details

Village Paithan

Tehsil Paithan

District Aurangabad

State Maharashtra




D.

Area Details

Total Project Area and

Green belt development

area

Total Plot Area = 20000.00 Sq. M.

Green Belt 33 % Of Plot Area = 6600.42 Sq. M.

Parking Area 10.0 % Of Plot Area = 2000.00 Sq. M.



2. Nearest town and City Aurangabad- 36.97 km

3. Nearest National

Highway / State Highway State highway Aurangabad to Paithan- 0.5 km

4. Nearest Railway station Aurangabad – 35.46 km


6.

National Parks, Wildlife

Sanctuaries, Biosphere

Reserves, Tiger/ Elephant

Reserves, Wildlife

Corridors

etc. within 10 km radius

Project falls within 5 km radius of Protected area of Jaikwadi

Bird Sanctuary, which is notified under the Wild Life

(Protection) Act, 1972 (53 of 1972). Subsequently this area has

been declared as Eco-Sensitive Zone by MoEFCC {As per

Gazette Notification 2202 E, Dated 12th July 2017}. The

distance of project from boundary of Jaikwadi Bird Sanctuary is

4.46 Km in South West Direction

7.

Reserved Forests

(RF)/Protected Forests

(PF)

No

8.

Water Body (within 10

km

radius)

No.



Page 19

1.] API [Active Pharmaceutical Ingredient]

Table 1-2 List of proposed products

Sr. No. Product Name UOM Qty /Month CAS NO Remark



3 Tizanidine MT 2 51322-75-9 Muscle Relaxar



6 8-Hydroxy Quinoline MT 10 148-24-3 Antimalarial/ Anti corona

= Total API MT 112 == ==

2.] API Intermediate

Table 1-3 Details of API Intermediates

Sr.


Qty.





3 2-Nitro Thiocyano aniline/ 2-

Nitro-4-propyl sulfanyl aniline MT 80 54029-45-7 Albendazole inter



6 5-Chloro -4-Amino-2,1,3-



8 Sodium Sulphide Flakes/ NAHS

soln MT 50 1313-82-2 Reagent




12 3,4 Dimethoxy Aniline MT 15 6315-89-5 Common inter


14 Chloro Acetaldehyde Dimethyl

Acetal MT 20 97-97-2 Intermediate






Page 20

= 6-Chloro-5-(2,3-dichlorophenoxy-

1H-Benzimidazole MT = 100648-13-3 Triclabendazole int.


18 2-Chloro 1-(2,4-

difluorophenyl)ethanone MT 5 51336-94-8 Fluconazole int.

19

2-(4-Amino 4,5-dihydro-[1,2,4-

]triazole-1yl}-1-(2,4-difluoro

ethanone

MT 5 86404-63-9 Fluconazole intermediate




22 Tetra Butyl ammonium Bromide MT 30 1642-19-2 Catalyst.



Amines[ Aldehyde to Alcohol] MT 15 NA





26 1-(carbamethyl-cyclohexyl)Acetic

acid MT 20 1157262-35-5 Gabapentin Intermediate










34 5-Methoxy-2-mercapto

benzimidazole MT 20 37052-78-1 Omeprazole Intermediate





Intermediate






= Total Intermediate MT 1171 == == == == == ==


Page 21


Page 22

Total Capacity:–

Table 1-4 Details of total capacity


1. API 6 112


Total 49 1283


At any given time, minimum 2 API and anyone option from intermediate will be manufactured at one time.

1.6. Applicable Environmental Regulatory frame work –

The proposed project will abide and function under the purview of the following Rules, Acts & Regulations

which are formulated by the Govt. of India to protect the environment and development in a sustainable

way.

The Water (Prevention & Control of Pollution) Act, 1974

The Air (Prevention & Control of Pollution) Act, 1981

The Environmental (Protection) Act, 1986

Environmental Impact Assessment Notification dated 14th September 2006 and subsequent amendments

The Hazardous & Other Waste (Management and Transboundary Movement) Rules, 2016

Noise Pollution (Regulation and Control) Rules, 2000 and its amendments

The Public Liability Insurance Act, 1991

1.7. Scope of EIA Study-

The scope of the EIA study is based on the guideline provided by MoEF&CC. The scope of the study broadly

includes:

Field sampling of environmental attributes at various representative locations in the study area to

establish the baseline status;

Collect & compile secondary data including socio-economic data;

Identification, assessment and evaluation of the beneficial & adverse impacts on surrounding

environment due to proposed project activities considering the existing baseline status.

Analysis of project proposal and data analysis.

Assessment of pollution potential due to proposed project.

Predict the incremental levels of pollutants in the study area due to the proposed project;

Evaluate the predicted impacts on the various environmental attributes by using scientifically

developed & widely accepted models.

Identification and assessment of risks associated with the proposed project and their appropriate

management through proper Risk Assessment (RA) and Disaster Management Plan (DMP).


Page 23

Prepare an Environmental Management Plan (EMP) to mitigate the predicted impacts; and

Identify critical environmental attributes required to be monitored during the project execution and to

suggest post project monitoring.

The scope also includes all the conditions outlined in the ToR issued by SEAC-I and the compliance to the

ToR is given below.

1.8. Compliance of Terms of Reference

SEAC-I has prescribed Terms of reference from MoEF&CC vide File No.IA-J-11011/281/2020-IA-II(I)

on dated 27th November 2020, for undertaking detailed EIA study for the purpose of obtaining EC.

Compliance of Standard TOR for “Synthetic Organic Chemicals Industry (dyes and dye intermediates; bulk

drugs and intermediates excluding drug formation; synthetic rubber; basic organic chemicals, other synthetic

organic chemicals and chemical intermediates” Issued by MoEF&CC for EIA/EMP report for

Projects/Activates requiring Environmental Clearance under EIA Notification, 2006 is given below:

Table 1-5 ToR Compliance

Sr.

No. ToR Points Compliance of ToR

Reference in EIA

Report

A. Standard Terms of Reference

1. Executive Summary

The summary contains site details,

environmental status, air quality prediction

impacts due to all units in the industrial

complex and mitigation measures, water

balance, waste management, greenbelt,

rainwater harvesting, project description

including material balance, project cost,

CER activities, socioeconomic, ecology and

biodiversity, land use pattern, geology and

geohydrology, additional studies such as

risk assessment, and EMP etc.

Separate Chapter

as Executive

Summery

2. Introduction

i.

Details of the EIA

Consultant including

NABET accreditation

“Dr. Subbarao’s Environment Center” is the

consultant organization and the NABET

accreditation certificate no.

NABET/EIA/1922/ RA 0159

Chapter

12(Disclosure of

Consultant)

ii. Information about the

project proponent.

Mr. Shirish Kulkarni is the Owner of the

Company M/s. Shalini Organics Pvt. Ltd.

Project is a green field project. The

proponent is seeking Environment

Clearance for the proposed API and API

Intermediate Manufacturing unit. The

detailed background information of the

project proponent is provided in Chapter.

Chapter-1,

Section 1.3


Page 24

iii. Importance and benefits of

the project.

The proposed project will play a vital role

in enhancing the Global API and

Intermediate thereby increase infrastructure

facilities & social benefits. Details are given

in of EIA/EMP report.

Chapter 1,

Section 1.4

3. Project Description

i. Cost of project and time of

completion.

Total Cost of the Project – 8.62 Crores.

Time of project completion will be about

1.0 - 1.5 years after accordance of the EC.

Chapter 2,

Section 2.1

ii. Products with capacities

for the proposed project.

Sr.

No.

Product

details Nos.

Tonnage

(MT)

1. API 6 112

2. API

Intermediate 43 1171

Total 49 1283

Per Month

capacity 42.76 MT/ M

Chapter 2,

Section 2.4.2 &

Table 2.2

iii.

If expansion project,

details of existing products

with capacities and

whether adequate land is

available for expansion,

reference of earlier EC if

any.

Not Applicable, as project is green field

project. --

iv.

List of raw materials

required and their source

along with mode of

transportation.

List of raw materials is mentioned in

Chapter 2, storage with mode of

transportation will be through Road.

Chapter 2, section

2.7

v.

Other chemicals and

materials required with

quantities and storage

capacities

Storage details of other materials are given

in EIA Report. Chapter 7

vi.

Details of emission,

effluents, hazardous waste

generation and their

management.

Emission:

Flue gas emission:

Steam boiler (1 nos.), Thermic Fluid Heater

(1 no.) and two stack of stand by D.G. Set

(2 x 250 kVA).

APCM: Cyclone separator followed by bag

filter.

Process gas emission:

Two stage alkali scrubber followed by

water and NaOH solution.

Emission &

APCM: Chapter

2, section 2.8.2.


Page 25

Effluent:

The effluent generated from process and

from other sources shall be segregated into

LCOD and HCOD streams. LCOD stream

is allowed to pass through collection pit and

oil and grease trap through screen Chamber.

The effluent as LCOD will enter into

equalization, primary clarifier and aeration

tank. The sludge form the primary clarifier

Shall be centrifuged and then spread on

sand bed for drying. The over flow from the

aeration tank is allowed to enter into

secondary clarifier. Overflow from

secondary clarifier shall be allowed to flow

into holding tank. The treated effluent will

be tested for COD/ BOD. The treated

effluent will be passed through sand and

carbon bed through pump and connected to

Reverse Osmosis facility. The effluent from

the RO will be reused for the various

operations. The Reject from RO will be

connected to Evaporator, which is equally

part

of HCOD effluent. The thick slurry from

Evaporator shall be filtered on nutsh filter.

The Filtrate from NF is send to primary

clarifier. The solid from NF shall be packed

and send to CHWTSDF for disposal.

Conclusively the ETP shall be designed for

ZLD, the treated effluent shall be send to

CETP with quality as per with

MPCB/CPCB norms or parameters.

Hazardous waste:

Entire quantity of hazardous waste will be

handled & disposed as per Hazardous &

Other waste (Management &

Transboundary Movement) Rules, 2016

Effluent: Chapter

2, section 2.9.1.

Hazardous waste:

Chapter 2, section

2.9.3.

vii.

Requirement of water,

power, with source of

supply, status of approval,

water balance diagram,

Water –

Total water requirement will be = 246.0

CMD

Water: Detailed

breakup of water

requirement and

source are


Page 26

man-power requirement

(regular and contract).

Fresh water requirement will be = 73.0

CMD

Source- [MIDC] Maharashtra Industrial

Development Corporation, Paithan.

Power -

Power required for the project will be 300

HP.

Source of electricity supply is Maharashtra

State Electricity Distribution Company

Limited

(MSEDCL)

DG set of capacity 2 x 250 KVA.

Boiler 2 T/Hr.; Fuel Briquette -500 kg/Hr.

Proposed Thermopack 1 no 2.0 lac Kcal/hr.

Man power

Manpower requirement will be 60 nos. of

skilled and unskilled category.

Water balance diagram is mentioned in

Chapter 2.

provided in

Chapter 2, section

2.7 .b

viii.

Process description along

with major equipment’s

and machineries, process

flow sheet (quantities)

from raw material to

products to be provided.

Process description along with flow sheet

from raw materials to product is given in

EIA Report. The detailed list of proposed

equipment’s & machinery is given in the

EIA Report.

Chapter 2, section

2.7. a

ix.

Hazard identification and

details of proposed safety

systems.

Hazard identification is described in EIA

Report. Details of proposed safety system

are covered in Risk Assessment Report.

Details are

covered in

Chapter 7

x. Expansion/modernization proposals:

a.

Copy of all the

Environmental

Clearance(s) including

Amendments thereto

obtained for the project

from MOEF/ SEIAA shall

be attached as an

Annexure. A certified

copy of the latest

Monitoring Report of the

Regional Office of the

Ministry of Environment

and Forests as per circular


project. --


Page 27

dated 30th May, 2012 on

the status of compliance of

conditions stipulated in all

the existing environmental

clearances including

Amendments shall be

provided. In addition,

status of compliance of

Consent to Operate for the

ongoing/ existing

operation of the project

from SPCB shall be

attached with the EIAEMP

report.

b.

In case the existing project

has not obtained

environmental clearance,

reasons for not taking EC

under the provisions of the

EIA Notification 1994

and/or EIA Notification

2006 shall be provided.

Copies of Consent to

Establish/No Objection

Certificate and (Consent to

Operate (in case of units

operating prior to EIA

Notification, 2006, CTE

and CTO of FY 2005-

2006) obtained from the

SPCB shall be submitted.

Further, compliance report

to the conditions of

consents from the SPCB

shall be submitted.


project. --.

4. Site Details

i.

Location of the project site

covering village,

Taluka/Tehsil, District and

State, Justification for

selecting the site, whether

other sites were considered

Project is located at Plot No. D-10, MIDC

Paithan-431107, Taluka- Paithan, Dist.-

Aurangabad, Maharashtra.

As, site is in Notified Industrial area

Paithan MIDC, where all facilities are

available.

Chapter 1, Table

1.1; also shown in

Chapter 2 and

Chapter 5.


Page 28

ii.

A Toposheet of the study

area of radius of 10km and

site location on 1:50,000/

1:25, 000 scale on an

A3/A2 sheet. (Including

all Eco sensitive areas and

environmentally sensitive

places).

Jaikwadi Bird Centaury is situated within 5

Km of the proposed project site. Distance

certificate is received from concerned

Authority.

Toposheet of the

study area is

included in

Chapter 3, Fig.

3.1.

iii.

Details w.r.t. option

analysis for selection of

site

As unit is in notified industrial area, MIDC

Paithan, Dist. Aurangabad, Maharashtra,

therefore no alternative site was considered.

--

iv. Co-ordinates (lat-long) of

all four corners of the site.

Latitude -19°32'57.43"N Longitude-

75°23'6.75"E

Latitude -19°32'56.66"N Longitude -

75°23'13.44"E


75°23'13.02"E


75°23'13.02"E

Chapter 2,

v.

Google map-Earth

downloaded of the project

site.

Google Earth image showing project site is

given in EIA/EMP report. Chapter 2

vi.

Layout maps indicating

existing unit as well as

proposed unit indicating

storage area, plant area,

greenbelt area, utilities etc.

If located within an

Industrial area/ Estate/

Complex, layout of

Industrial Area indicating

location of unit within the

Industrial area/ Estate

Project is a green field project having Plot

area 20,000 sq.mt. Master layout showing

storage area, plant area, green belt area etc.

is given in chapter no. 2.

Chapter 2

vii.

Photographs of the

proposed and existing (if

applicable) plant site. If

existing, show

photographs of plantation/

greenbelt, in particular.

Project is a green field project. Photographs

of the proposed project are shown in

Chapter 2.

Chapter 2

viii.

Land use break-up of total

land of the project site

(identified and acquired),

It is MIDC land with a plot area of 20,000

Sq.mt. Details are given in Chapter 2,

Section 2.3, Table 2.2

Details are

mentioned in


Page 29

government/ private-

agricultural, forest,

wasteland, water bodies,

settlements, etc. shall be

included. (Not required for

industrial area).

Chapter 2 and

Chapter 3

ix.

A list of major industries

with name and type within

study area (10km radius)

shall be Incorporated.

Land use details of the

study area.

Name of the Unit Activities

M/s. Apex

Medichem

Pharmaceutical

Industry

M/s. Quantinental

Pharma Chem Pvt.

Ltd.

Pharmaceutical

Industry

M/s. Tooba

Pharmaceuticals Pvt

Ltd.

Paithan MIDC,

Mudhalwadi,

Maharashtra

Pharmaceutical

Industry

M/s. Ajanta Pharma

(Pharmaceutical)

Paithan MIDC,

Mudhalwadi,

Maharashtra

Pharmaceutical

Industry

Chapter 2

x.

Geological features and

Geo-hydrological status of

the study area shall be

included.

Geological features, Groundwater table

conditions and quality of water with respect

to geological conditions are covered in

Chapter 3, under Section 3.5.5

Chapter 3

xi.

Details of Drainage of the

project up to 5 km radius

of study area. If the site is

within 1 km radius of any

major river, peak and lean

season river discharge as

well as flood. Occurrence

frequency based on peak

rainfall data of the past 30

years. Details of Flood

Level of the project site

and maximum Flood Level

of the river shall also be

provided. (mega green

field projects)

There is no river & flood hazard zone

within 1 km radius from the project site. Chapter 3


Page 30

xii.

Status of acquisition of

land. If acquisition is not

complete, stage of the

acquisition process and

expected time of complete

possession of the land.

Not applicable. --

xiii.

R&R details in respect of

land in line with state

Government policy

No R&R is involved. --

5. Forest and wildlife related issues (if applicable):

i.

Permission and approval

for the use of forest land

(forestry clearance), if any,

and recommendations of

the State Forest

Department. (if applicable)

No forest land is involved in proposed

project hence no such permission/ approval

are required.

--

ii.

Land use map based on

High resolution satellite

imagery (GPS) of the

proposed site delineating

the forestland (in case of

projects involving forest

land more than 40 ha).

Proposed Project does not involve forest

land. --

iii.

Status of Application

submitted for obtaining the

Stage I forestry clearance

along with latest status

shall be submitted

Not Applicable --

iv.

The projects to be located

within 10 km of the

National Parks,


Reserves, Migratory

Corridors of Wild

Animals, the project

proponent shall submit the

map duly authenticated by

Chief Wildlife Warden

showing these features vis-

à-vis the project location

and the recommendations

or comments of the Chief

Wildlife Warden-thereon

No National Parks, Sanctuaries, Biosphere

reserves, Migratory Corridors of Wild

Animals exists within 10 km radius of the

project site.

--


Page 31

v.

Wildlife Conservation

Plan duly authenticated by

the Chief Wildlife Warden

of the State Government

for conservation of

Schedule I fauna, if any

exists in the study area.

Not Applicable. --

vi.

Copy of application

submitted for clearance

under the Wildlife

(Protection) Act, 1972, to

the Standing Committee of

the National Board for

Wildlife

Not Applicable --

6. Environmental Status

i.

Determination of

atmospheric inversion

level at the project site and

site-specific

micrometeorological data

using temperature, relative

humidity, hourly wind

speed and direction and

rainfall.

Site-specific micro-meteorological data

(temperature, relative humidity, hourly

wind speed and direction and rainfall) were

collected for the period of December, 2020

to February, 2021. Details are provided in

EIA Report.

Chapter 3

ii.

AAQ data (except

monsoon) at 8 locations

for PM10, PM2.5, SO2,

NOX, CO and other

parameters relevant to the

project shall be collected.

The monitoring stations

shall be based CPCB

guidelines and take into

account the pre-dominant

wind direction, population

zone and sensitive

receptors including

reserved forests

AAQ monitoring for PM10, PM2.5, SO2,

NOX, CO, VOCs, HC at 8 locations were

done for Post Monsoon Season (December,

2020 to February, 2021). Results of the

same are tabulated in Air monitoring

stations are shown in EIA Report. The

monitoring stations were selected taking

into account the pre-dominant wind

direction and sensitive receptors and up and

down wind direction.

Chapter 3

iii.

Raw data of all AAQ

measurement for 12 weeks

of all stations as per

frequency given in the

NAAQM Notification of

All AAQ stations along with min., max.,

average and 98% values for each of the

AAQ parameters are given in EIA Report.

Raw data of all AAQ stations are given in

Annexure of EIA/EMP Report.

Annexure


Page 32

Nov. 2009 along with -

min., max., average and

98% values for each of the

AAQ parameters from

data of all AAQ stations

should be provided as an

annexure to the EIA

Report.

iv.

Surface water quality of

nearby River (100 m

upstream and downstream

of discharge point) and

other surface drains at

eight locations as per

CPCB/ MoEF&CC

guidelines.

Unit will not discharge in surface water

body. Surface water samples were collected

from 4 locations. Result of same is given in

EIA Report Surface water sampling

locations are shown in EIA Report

Chapter 3

v.

Whether the site falls near

to polluted stretch of river

identified by the CPCB/

MoEF&CC, if yes give

details.

Project site doesn’t fall near to polluted

stretch of the river identified by the

CPCB/MoEF&CC.

--

vi.

Ground water monitoring

at minimum at 8 locations

shall be included.

Ground water monitoring was carried out at

8 locations within study area. Result of

same is given in EIA Report.

Chapter 3 and

Annexure

vii.

Noise levels monitoring at

8 locations within the

study area

Noise level monitoring was carried out at 8

locations within study area. Result is given

in EIA Report.

Chapter 3 and

Annexure

viii. Soil Characteristic as per

CPCB guidelines.

Soil sampling was carried out at 8 locations

within study area. Result is given in EIA

Report with interpretation.

Chapter 3 and

Annexure

Ix

Traffic study of the area,

type of vehicles, frequency

of vehicles for

transportation of materials,

additional traffic due to

proposed project, parking

arrangement etc.

Traffic study of the area in respect of

existing traffic, type of vehicles, their

frequency, and additional traffic due to

proposed project was conducted and

covered in EIA Report. There will be

negligible impact on existing traffic due to

proposed project as existing road network

has adequate capacity to take increase load.

Chapter 4

x.

Detailed description of

flora and fauna (terrestrial

and aquatic) existing in the

study area shall be given

with special reference to

Flora & Fauna found within the study area

is given in EIA Report. Chapter 3


Page 33

rare, endemic and

endangered species. If

Schedule-I fauna are found

within the study area, a

Wildlife Conservation

Plan shall be prepared and

furnished.

xi. Socio-economic status of

the study area

Socio-economic status of the study area is

given in EIA Report.

Chapter 3

7 Impact and Environment Management Plan

i.

Assessment of ground

level concentration of

pollutants from the stack

emission based on site

specific meteorological

features. In case the

project is located on a hilly

terrain, the AQIP

Modeling shall be done

using inputs of the specific

terrain characteristics for

determining the potential

impacts of the project on

the AAQ. Cumulative

impact of all sources of

emissions (including

transportation) on the

AAQ of the area shall be

assessed. Details of the

model used and the input

data used for modeling

shall also be provided. The

air quality contours shall

be plotted on a location

map showing the location

of project site, habitation

nearby, sensitive receptors,

if any

Assessment of incremental ground level

concentration of pollutant from the stack

emission based on site specific

meteorological features has been predicted

via computation done through mathematical

modeling and incorporated in EIA/EMP

Report.

Cumulative impact of all sources of

emissions on AAQ of the area is given in

EIA/EMP report.

Input parameters used for modeling and

additional inputs - maximum 50 (24-hr)

average concentration values for SPM,

SO2, NOx are provided in EIA/EMP

Report.

Isopleths showing air quality contours

plotted on location map is provided in

EIA/EMP report.

Chapter 4

ii.

Water Quality modeling -

in case of discharge in

water body

Not applicable, as no wastewater will be

discharged from proposed unit. --


Page 34

iii.

Impact of the transport of

the raw materials and end

products on the

surrounding environment

shall be assessed and

provided. In this regard,

options for transport of

raw materials and finished

products and wastes (large

quantities) by rail or rail-

cum road transport or

conveyorcum-rail

transport shall be

examined.

There will be no major impact of the

transport of the raw materials and end

products on the surrounding environment

due to proposed project as proper mitigation

measures will be adopted.

Traffic study is provided in EIA Report.

Details regarding impact of the transport of

the raw materials and end products on the

surrounding environment are given in EIA

Report.

Chapter 4

iv.

A note on treatment of

wastewater from different

plant operations, extent

recycled and reused for

different purposes shall be

included. Complete

scheme of effluent

treatment. Characteristics

of untreated and treated

effluent to meet the

prescribed standards of

discharge under E(P)

Rules.

Effluent:

The effluent generated from process and

from other sources shall be segregated into

LCOD and HCOD streams. LCOD stream

is allowed to pass through collection pit and

oil and grease trap through screen Chamber.

The effluent as LCOD will enter into

equalization, primary clarifier and aeration

tank. The sludge form the primary clarifier

Shall be centrifuged and then spread on

sand bed for drying. The over flow from the

aeration tank is allowed to enter into

secondary clarifier. Overflow from

secondary clarifier shall be allowed to flow

into holding tank. The treated effluent will

be tested for COD/ BOD. The treated

effluent will be passed through sand and

carbon bed through pump and connected to

Reverse Osmosis facility. The effluent from

the RO will be reused for the various

operations. The Reject from RO will be

connected to Evaporator, which is equally

part

of HCOD effluent. The thick slurry from

Evaporator shall be filtered on nutsh filter.

The Filtrate from NF is send to primary

clarifier. The solid from NF shall be packed

and send to CHWTSDF for disposal.

Conclusively the ETP shall be designed for

Chapter 2


Page 35

ZLD, the treated effluent shall be send to

CETP with quality as per with

MPCB/CPCB norms or

parameters.Characteristic of untreated and

treated effluent is given in EIA/EMP report.

v.

Details of stack emission

and action plan for control

of emissions to meet

standards.

Emission:

Steam boiler (1 nos.), Thermic Fluid Heater

(1 no.) and two stack of stand by D.G. Set

(2 x 250 kVA).

APCM: Cyclone separator followed by bag

filter.


Two stage alkali scrubber followed by

water and NaOH solution.

Chapter 2

vi. Measures for fugitive

emission control.

Fugitive emission, dust is expected during

storage, loading/unloading of raw materials,

material transfer point, generation of acid

mist from material handling area, storage

area. Fugitive emission control measures

are provided in EIA report

Chapter 2

vii.

Details of hazardous waste

generation and their

storage, utilization and

management. Copies of

MOU regarding utilization

of solid and hazardous

waste in cement plant shall

also be included. EMP

shall include the concept

of waste-minimization,

recycle/ reuse/ recover

techniques, Energy

conservation, and natural

resource conservation.

Hazardous waste will be handled &

disposed as per Hazardous & Other waste

(Management & Transboundary

Movement) Rules, 2016.

Unit will adopt waste-minimization,

Resource & energy conservation and

cleaner production.

Chapter 2

viii.

Proper utilization of fly

ash shall be ensured as per

Fly Ash Notification,

2009. A detailed plan of

action shall be provided.

Fly Ash will be sent to brick manufacturers

periodically. Chapter 10

ix.

Action plan for the green

belt development plan in

33% area i.e. land with not

less than 1,500 trees per

Unit will develop 6600.42 Sq.mt. (33% of

total plot area) of greenbelt. Layout plan

earmarking space for development of green

belt peripheral of project site. Existing 65

Chapter 2


Page 36

ha. Giving details of

species, width of

plantation; planning

schedule etc. shall be

included. The green belt

shall be around the project

boundary and a scheme for

greening of the roads used

for the project shall also be

incorporated.

nos. of trees on site which will be retained.

Details of Green Belt Development are

provided in EIA report.

x.

Action plan for rainwater

harvesting measures at

plant site shall be

submitted to harvest

rainwater from the roof

tops and storm water

drains to recharge the

ground water and also to

use for the various

activities at the project site

to conserve fresh water

and reduce the water

requirement from other

sources.

The rain water from the building roofs will

be collected through rain water harvesting

tank.

Chapter 2

xi.

Total capital cost and

recurring cost/annum for

environmental pollution

control measures shall be

included.

The Capital cost of the project is Rs. 8.62

Crores, about 13% of the total project cost

is reserved for environment and pollution

control measures, 3.65 % for operation and

maintenance. 2 % of the total project cost

shall be reserved for corporate social

responsibility.

116.00 Lakhs and Recurring Cost will be

Rs. 31.5 Lakhs.

Cost breakup of Environment Management

is given in EIA report.

Chapter 10

xii.

Action plan for post

project environmental

monitoring shall be

submitted.

Action plan for post-project environmental

monitoring is adopted and included in EIA

report.

Chapter 10

xiii.

Onsite and Offsite Disaster

(natural and Man-made)

Preparedness and

Onsite and Offsite Disaster (natural and

man-made) Preparedness and Emergency Chapter 7


Page 37

Emergency Management

Plan including Risk

Assessment and damage

control. Disaster

management plan should

be linked with District

Disaster Management

Plan.

Management Plan are included in EIA

Report.

8 Occupational health:

i.

Plan and fund allocation to

ensure the occupational

health & safety of all

contract and casual

workers.

Occupational health & safety plan will be

adopted by unit. Rs. 2.0 Lakhs per annum

has been allocated to ensure the

occupational health and safety of workers.

Chapter 10

ii.

Details of exposure

specific health status

evaluation of worker. If

the workers‟ health is

being evaluated by pre

designed format, chest x

rays, Audiometry,

Spirometry, Vision testing

(Far & Near vision, color

vision and any other ocular

defect) ECG, during pre-

placement and periodical

examinations give the

details of the same. Details

regarding last month

analyzed data of above

mentioned parameters as

per age, sex, duration of

exposure and department

wise.

This is a green field project. Unit will adopt

all Occupational Health & Safety

programme need based as per the statutory

requirements of Factory Act.

Chapter 7

iii.

Details of existing

Occupational & Safety

Hazards. What are the

exposure levels of hazards

and whether they are

within Permissible

Exposure Level (PEL)? If

these are not within PEL,

what measures the

As project is green field project, so there is

no existing Occupational & Safety Hazards.

Hazard analysis of materials is provided in

EIA Report including acute Exposure

Guideline Levels (AEGLS), Emergency

Response Planning Guidelines (ERPGs),

Immediately dangerous to life or health air

concentration values (IDLH values)

Chapter 7


Page 38

company has adopted to

keep them within PEL so

that health of the workers

can be preserved

etc.

iv.

Annual report of health

status of workers with

special reference to

Occupational Health and

Safety.

Not applicable (New project proposal).

9. Corporate Environment Policy

i.

Does the company have a

well laid down

Environment Policy

approved by its Board of

Directors? If so, it may be

detailed in the EIA report.

Company has laid down

EnvironmentPolicy. Annexure

ii.

Does the Environment

Policy prescribe for

standard operating

process/ procedures to

bring into focus any

infringement/deviation /

violation of the

environmental or forest

norms/conditions? If so, it

may be detailed in the EIA

Environment Policy prescribes for standard

operating process to implement the

environmental standards. Additionally,

company has already set up a dedicated

Environment Management Cell (EMC) to

bring into focus any infringement/deviation

/ violation of the environment.

--

iii.

What is the hierarchical

system or Administrative

order of the company to

deal with the

environmental issues and

for ensuring compliance

with the environmental

clearance conditions?

Details of this system may

be given.

Hierarchical system of the company is

discussed in EIA Report. Chapter 10

iv.

Does the company have

system of reporting of

non-compliances /

violations of

environmental norms to

the Board of Directors of

the company and/or

Reporting mechanism will be adopted by

unit at the time of operational phase. Chapter 10


Page 39

shareholders or

stakeholders at large? This

reporting mechanism shall

be detailed in the EIA

report.

10.

Details regarding

infrastructure facilities

such as sanitation, fuel,

restroom etc. to be

provided to the labor force

during construction as well

as to the casual workers

including truck drivers

during operation phase.

During construction & operation phase,

adequate infrastructure facilities like

restroom, sanitation, drinking water, etc.

will be provided to the labor force including

truck drivers. Also food facilities available

during the operation phase.

--

11. Enterprise Social Commitment (ESC)

i.

Adequate funds (at least

2.5% of the project cost)

shall be earmarked

towards the Enterprise

Social Commitment based

on Public Hearing issues

and item-wise details

along with time bound

action plan shall be

included. Socio-economic

development activities

need to be elaborated upon

The proposed project of Shalini Organics

Pvt. Ltd. is a green field project. As per

criteria given in the OM, the fund to be kept

aside by us is Rs. 17.24 Lakhs (2% of

Proposed cost i.e. Rs. 8.62 Cr.)

CER budget will be spent on creation of

infrastructural facilities, health, education,

environment, water, Sanitation & hygiene,

road & skill development etc. activities to

be carried out in discussion with District

Authority as suitable in nearby vicinity.

Budgetary

provision for CER

activities is given

in chapter 7

12

Any litigation pending

against the project and/or

any direction/order passed

by any Court of Law

against the project, if so,

details thereof shall also be

included. Has the unit

received any notice under

the Section 5 of

Environment (Protection)

Act, 1986 or relevant

Sections of Air and Water

Acts? If so, details thereof

and compliance/ ATR to

No litigation is pending against the project

and/or any direction/order passed by any

Court of Law against the project.

--


Page 40

the notice(s) and present

status of the case.

13.

A tabular chart with index

for point wise compliance

of above TORs

Point-wise ToR compliance in the tabular

form is given in EIA Report. Chapter 1

B. Specific Terms of Reference

i.

Details on solvent to be

used, measures for solvent

recovery and for emission

control.

Solvent recovery details are mentioned in

Manufacturing details.

Chapter 2 and

Annexure of

Manufacturing

process details

ii.

Details of process

emission from the unit and

its arrangement to control.


Wet scrubbing works via the contact of

target compounds or particulate matter with

the scrubbing solution. Solutions may

simply be water (for dust) or solutions of

reagents that specifically target certain

compounds.

Chapter 2

iii.

Ambient air quality data

should include VOC,

other-process-specific

pollutants* like NH3*,

chlorine*, HCl*, HBr*,

H2S*, HF*, etc. (*-as

applicable).

Ambient air quality data includes VOCs,

HC, CO are monitored and incorporate in

EIA Report. All the results are found within

the norms fixed by CPCB

Chapter 3

iv.

Work zone monitoring

arrangements for

hazardous chemical

Unit will carry out work zone monitoring

after start of project. Chapter 10

5.

Detailed effluent treatment

scheme including

segregation of effluent

streams for units adopting

„Zero‟ Liquid Discharge

Effluent: Effluent from the process will be

segregated in two streams-

High COD- Highly Acidic-Dilute Sulphuric

Acid & Acetic Acid and Low COD with

Rest of process, scrubber, washing and

utilities stream.

Highly Acidic stream – MEE salts will be

sold to actual users under Rule-9 of HAZ

Rule. Whereas rest of process effluent along

with wastewater from scrubber, washing

and utility will be taken to ETP followed by

RO. RO reject will be sent to in-house spray

dryer for evaporation; RO permeate will be

reused. Thus, achieving Zero Liquid

Discharge (ZLD).

Chapter 2


Page 41

6. Action plan for odour

control to be submitted.

Action plan for odour control is described

in EIA Report. Chapter 10

7.

A copy of the

Memorandum of

Understanding signed with

cement manufactures

indicating clearly that they

coprocess organic solid/

Hazardous waste in TSDF

if any

Unit has already obtained membership of

common hazardous waste disposal facility --

8.

Authorization/Membership

for the disposal of liquid

effluent in CETP and

solid/hazardous waste in

TSDF, if any.

Unit is performing ZLD with in-house ETP,

RO, MEE and spray dryer setup; hence

membership of CETP is not required. Unit

is obtained membership of common

hazardous waste disposal facility.

--

9. Action plan for utilization

of MEE/ dryers salt MEE/ dryer will be send to CHWSTDF --

10.

Material Safety Data Sheet

for all the Chemicals are

being used/will be used.

MSDS of Hazardous chemicals is attached

with EIA Report. Unit will sickly follow the

storage and handling instruction or handling

and storage of Hazardous chemicals.

Annexure

11.

Authorization/Membership

for the disposal of

solid/hazardous waste in

TSDF

Unit has obtained membership of

CHWSTDF. Annexure

12 Details of incinerator if to

be installed. -- --

13

Risk assessment for

storage and handling of

hazardous chemicals/

solvents. Action plan for

handling & safety system

to be incorporated

Risk assessment for storage and handling of

hazardous chemicals is covered in Chapter

7, Acute Exposure Guideline Levels

(AEGLS), Emergency Response Planning

Guidelines (ERPGs); Immediately

dangerous to life or health air concentration

values (IDLH values) provided in EIA

Report. Quantitative risk assessment &

consequence analysis is covered in Chapter-

7.

Chapter 7

14.

Arrangements for ensuring

health and safety of

workers engaged in

handling of toxic

materials.

Proper care will be taken at the time of

expansion of the project Chapter 7


Page 42

1.9. Objective of EIA

The objectives of the present EIA study are to identify potential source of pollution, assess the

impacts on various environmental components due to the proposed project activity, and recommend

appropriate environmental management system and environment management plan for the unit to

ensure that the adverse impacts, if any, will be minimized.

Examine the prevailing baseline environmental and socio-economic condition of the study area

through baseline studied ad secondary data collection.

To evaluate the impacts of the project both positive and negative on the on the environment, ecology,

workers and community, due to proposed project.

The proposed methodology, including equipment, procedures and processes based on the

information received from the management and information given in Form-I and Prefeasibility

Report.

Identify mitigation measure for the adverse impacts

Define alternative in terms of project technology

Identification of major risk areas.

Hazard identification / Identification of failure cases.

Consequential analysis of probable risks / failure cases

Suggesting measures to further lower the probability of risk

1.10. Methodology for EIA

Considering the nature and magnitude of the project, surrounding area and various guidelines available, an

area of 10-km radius from the center of proposed plant site was considered for the purpose of environmental

impact assessment study. The methodology is briefly reported below,

Baseline data collection:

The baseline data for the impact zone have been generated for the following environmental parameters.

Ambient Air Quality –

Identifying and setting up Eight, Ambient Air Quality Monitoring (AAQM) stations within the study area

of 10km (as per the ToR) radius for parameter viz. PM10, PM2.5, Sulphur di-oxide (SO2), Oxides of Nitrogen

(NOx), CO and HC.

Monitoring of AAQ which entailed sampling and analysis of AAQ (December 2020 to February 2021)for

the study period, using standard monitoring methods and equipment for selected AAQM stations.

Micrometeorology –


Page 43

Meteorological data was received for the December 2020 to February 2021 (The Study Period). TheStudy

Period using archives / information from the nearest IMD meteorological Station, and identifying the pre-

dominant downwind direction based on this exercise.

Noise Level

This entail;

Identifying a suitable number of monitoring locations

Environmental noise monitoring using SPL meter

Representing noise quality in dB(A) leq(d) and dB(A) leq(n) at the selected locations.

Surface & Ground Water Quality

Identification of surface water sources by including Rivers and other surface water like Lake, Pond etc. in

study area.

Sampling at relevant locations, considering human settlements as well as spatial spread across the study

area, for parameters as required for EIA study, along with additional

Parameters covering portability requirements, followed by testing using standard methods and equipment.

Soil Quality

This includes

Collection of information on soil types within the Region, based on secondary sources of information.

Identifying the different soil types in the Study Area.

Sampling of different soil types available in the study area for parameters and analysing as required.

Ecology & Biodiversity

This includes

Collection of authenticated lists of flora and fauna (terrestrial and aquatic) from Forest Department

(considering ToR),

Site survey of flora and fauna within study area

Socio-Economics

This includes

Collecting socio-economic data regarding population and dwelling units in the study area

Collecting information about the occupational pattern, education and health & medical infrastructure.

Collecting information about the general facilities like drinking water facilities or communication facilities

within the study area.

Cultural Attributes.

The baseline status of the above environmental parameters has been worked out based on the rapid

monitoring/analysis carried out during the study period of December, 2020 to February, 2021 supplemented

by data collected from various Govt. Dept., census publications etc. The data is collected and analyzed as

per the standard methods for establishing the baseline data and so determine the impact of proposed activity

on the same.


Page 44

Evaluation of Impact from Project Activities-

The Environmental Impact resulting from the various project activities, have been identified, predicted and

evaluated based on the study of manufacturing process and other project related activities as well as

correlating the same with existing baseline status.

Preparation of Environmental Management Plan

Environmental Management Plan has been prepared covering pollution prevention measures at source in

terms of air and water pollution control measures, solid waste/hazardous waste management, safety

management, greenbelt development, environmental surveillance and environmental surveillance and

environmental management team. Finally, the detailed assessment of the resultant environmental impacts

has been made based on the impacts identification and evaluated from the activities over the baseline status

of various environmental components to reduce the pollution and to delineate a comprehensive environment

management plan along with recommendations and suggestions to improve environment management

system.

1.11. List of Industries Surrounding Project Site

Table 1-6 List of industries in the study area are shown below

Name of the Unit Activities

M/s. Apex Medichem Pharmaceutical Industry

M/s. Quantinental Pharma Chem Pvt. Ltd. Pharmaceutical Industry

M/s. Tooba Pharmaceuticals Pvt Ltd.

Paithan MIDC, Mudhalwadi, Maharashtra

Pharmaceutical Industry

M/s. Ajanta Pharma (Pharmaceutical)

Paithan MIDC, Mudhalwadi, Maharashtra Pharmaceutical Industry

1.12. Structure of EIA Report

Chapter 1: Introduction

Chapter one provides purpose of the report, background information of the proposed project, brief

description of nature, size and location of project, site photographs, environmental setting of the project,

estimated project cost, and scope of the study. The key environmental legislation and the standard relevant

to the project and the methodology adopted in preparation of the report have also been described in this

chapter.

Chapter 2: Project Description

Chapter two deals with the layout of the plan, location, process, details of the proposed project, other

technical and design information and sources of anticipated pollution.

Chapter 3: Description of the Environment


Page 45

This chapter covers data of existing condition of Valued Environmental Components like air, water, noise,

soil, biological environment and socio-economic aspects, basic amenities land use pattern. It also gives

details of study area, period of study, component of environment & its methodology. Various sections of the

chapter discuss the existing land use and drainage pattern, climate and meteorological parameters.

Chapter 4: Anticipated Environmental Impacts and Mitigation Measures

This chapter describes the overall impacts of the project activities on various environmental components. It

predicts the overall impact of the project activities on different components of the environment viz. Air,

Water, Land, Noise, Biological and Socio-Economic and its mitigation measures.

Chapter 5: Analysis of Alternatives (Technology and Site)

This chapter gives details of analysis of alternatives in terms of technology & site

Chapter 6: Environmental Monitoring Program

This chapter describes technical aspects of monitoring (including measurement methodologies, frequency,

location and data analysis, reporting schedules, emergency procedures, detailed budget and procurement

schedules.

Chapter 7: Additional Studies

Chapter seven describes various additional studies carried out for the project. Various risks associated during

operational stage of the project are assessed in this chapter. Hazard identification and consequences analysis

are worked out to understand the remedial actions required during operation phase. A disaster management

plan to minimize the risks or to combat the associated risks is also presented.

Chapter 8: Project Benefits

This chapter focuses on benefits of project on improvement in physical infrastructure, social infrastructure

& other tangible benefits.

Chapter 9: Environmental Cost Benefit Analysis

This chapter focuses on ‘Environmental Cost Benefit Analysis’

Chapter 10: Environmental Management Plan

This chapter describes Environment Management Plan (EMP) to be adopted for mitigation of anticipated

adverse impacts if any and to ensure acceptable impacts.

Chapter 11: Summary and Conclusion

The summary of the EIA report has been given in this chapter along with conclusions. It is an effort to

present the EIA report in the form of a chapter. It will be easy for a reader to cover the whole report by

studying this chapter.

Chapter 12: Disclosure of the Consultant

This chapter describes the name of the consultant engaged with their brief nature of consultancy activities.


Page 32

2. PROJECT DESCRIPTION

2.1. Introduction

M/s. Shalini Organics Pvt. Ltd. is a Greenfield project, proposes to set up Manufacturing unit for API and API

Intermediate unit at Plot No. D-10, MIDC Paithan, and Taluka: Paithan, Dist. Aurangabad, Maharashtra, Pin

code: 431107. Total production capacity of the plant will be API= 6 Nos., Capacity = 112 MT/Month andAPI

Intermediate = 43 Nos., Capacity =1171 MT/Month, Total Number of Products = 49 Nos. Total Capacity=

1283 MT/Month. Detailed product list is given in Table 1.2 and Table 1.3.

As per the EIA Notification, 2006, proposed activity is listed at S. No. 5(f) - Synthetic Organic Chemicals

industry. The proposed project is located within the notified industrial area by MIDC {Maharashtra Industrial

Development Corporation}. The project also falls within 5 km radius of Protected area of Jaikwadi Bird

Sanctuary, which is notified under the Wild Life (Protection) Act, 1972 (53 of 1972). Subsequently this area

has been declared as Eco-Sensitive Zone by MoEFCC {as per Gazette Notification 2202 E, dated 12th July

2017}, under Category “A”.

The estimated cost of the proposed project will be around Rs. 8.62 Crores. Out of this, around Rs. 116.0 Lakhs

will be capital cost for EMS and Rs. 31.50 Lakhs/Annum, will be recurring cost per annum. Time of project

completion will be about 1.0 - 1.5 years after accordance of the EC. Based on the type of project, following are

the expected aspects:

Air Emissions,

Waste water generation,

Noise generation,

Hazardous waste generation, and

Occupational health, hazards & safety risk

2.2. Need of the Project

Due to change in economic scenario, it is time to change as per market requirements and bring out the products

which gives optimum results for company as well as society.

Now a day’s, rate of human health diseases is increasing rapidly. Medical treatment with the help of

drugs/medicines is a common practice in which medicines/drugs play an important role in recovering the health

& control the diseases. Pharmaceutical industries require raw materials in the form of synthetic chemicals, bulk

drugs and intermediates to prepare final products as medicine. Bulk drug intermediates are the active raw

materials used in drug that are useful as therapeutic agents. Therefore, proposed manufacturing of various API

and Intermediates has a vital importance.


Page 33

2.3. Location of the Project

Table 2-1 Silent feature of the project

Sr. No. Particulars Details

A.

Location Details

Village Paithan

Tehsil Paithan

District Aurangabad

State Maharashtra




B. Environmental Setting Details (with approximate aerial distance & direction from plant

site)


2. Nearest town and City Aurangabad- 36.97 km

3. Nearest National Highway /

State Highway State highway Aurangabad to Paithan- 0.5 km

4. Nearest Railway station Aurangabad – 35.46 km


6.

National Parks, Wildlife


Reserves, Tiger/ Elephant

Reserves, Wildlife Corridors

etc. within 10 km radius

Project falls within 5 km radius of Protected area of

Jaikwadi Bird Sanctuary, which is notified under the

Wild Life (Protection) Act, 1972 (53 of 1972).

Subsequently this area has been declared as Eco-

Sensitive Zone by MoEFCC {As per Gazette

Notification 2202 E, Dated 12th July 2017}. The

distance of project from boundary of Jaikwadi Bird

Sanctuary is 4.46 Km in South West Direction

7. Reserved Forests

(RF)/Protected Forests (PF) No

8. Water Body (within 10 km

radius) No.


Following are the coordinates of the project site:

Table 2-2 Co-ordinated of the site

Point Latitude Longitude

A 19°32'57.43"N 75°23'6.75"E

B 19°32'56.66"N 75°23'13.44"E

C 19°32'53.40"N 75°23'13.02"E

D 19°32'53.40"N 75°23'13.02"E


Page 34

Figure 2-1 Project Location

Figure 2-2 Specific location


Page 32

Figure 2-3 Layout map


Page 36

2.4. Size or magnitude of Operation

2.4.1. Land Breakup & Project Site Layout

Proposed land area is 20,000 m2. Greenbelt will be developed in around 6600.42 m2 which tunes around 33.00 %

of the project area. Detailed break up of land is given below in Table 2.3

Table 2-3 Land use breakup

Sr. No. Description Area In Sq m. % of area

1 Proposed built-up area 4322.88 21.61

2 Green belt 6600.42 33.00

3 Parking 2000.00 10.00

4 Area Under Road 4508.45 22.54

5 Assembly point 50.53 0.25

6 Open space 2517.72 12.59

Total Plot Area 20000.00 100

Figure 2-4 10 km radius toposheet


Page 75

2.5. Project Magnitude

Complete list of proposed products is given in below Table.2.4

1] API [Active Pharmaceutical Ingredient]

Table 2-4 List of API Products

Sr. No. Product Name UOM Qty.

/Month CAS NO Activity



3 Tizanidine MT 2 51322-75-9 Muscle Relaxer



6 Hydroxy Quinoline MT 10 148-24-3 Anti-Malarial/Anti

Corona

Total MT 112

2.] API Intermediate

Table 2-5 List of API Intermediates

Sr.


Qty.





3 2-Nitro Thiocyano aniline/ 2-Nitro-4-

propyl sulfanyl aniline MT 80 54029-45-7 Albendazole inter



6 5-Chloro-4-Amino-2,1,3



8 Sodium Sulphide Flakes/ NAHS soln MT 50 1313-82-2 Reagent




12

3,4 Dimethoxy Aniline MT 15 6315-89-5 Common inter


14 Chloro Acetaldehyde Dimethyl Acetal MT 20 97-97-2 Intermediate






Page 76

= 6-Chloro-5-(2,3-dichlorophenoxy-1H-

Benzimidazole MT = 100648-13-3 Triclabendazole int.


18 2-Chloro 1-(2,4-difluorophenyl)

ethanone MT 5 51336-94-8 Fluconazole int.

19 2-(4-Amino 4,5-dihydro- [1,2,4-]

triazole-1yl}-1-(2,4-difluoro ethanone MT 5 86404-63-9 Fluconazole intermediate




22 Tetra Butyl Ammonium Bromide MT 30 1642-19-2 Catalyst.



Amines [ Aldehyde to Alcohol] MT 15 NA





26 1-(carbamethyl-cyclohexyl) Acetic acid MT 20 1157262-35-5 Gabapentin Intermediate










34 5-Methoxy-2-mercapto benzimidazole MT 20 37052-78-1 Omeprazole Intermediate





Intermediate






Total Intermediate MT 1171


Page 77

Total Capacity –

Table 2-6 Total capacity of the project


1. API 6 112


Total 49 1283


At any given time, minimum 2 API and anyone option from intermediate as listed or as provided.

2.6. Infrastructure Facilities (Proposed Plant Machineries and Equipment’s)

The list of tentative proposed equipment/machineries is given below-

Table 2-7 Plant machineries and equipments details.

Sr. No Eqpt. Name Purpose Capacity Qty.

1 SS 316 Reactor Reaction 7 1




5 SS 316 Reactor Crystallization 7 1

6 SS 316 Reactor workup 7 1

7 SS 316 Reactor Work up and Reaction 7 1

8 Halar Centrifuge Centrifugation 48 2

9 Top discharge centrifuge 4-Suspension Centrifiging 48 2

10 SS Storage Tank ML storage tank 15 KL 3 Nos

11 Fluid Bed Dryer Drying 500 Kg 2 Nos

12 Tray Dryer Drying 48 Tray 2

13 Vacuum Tray Dryer Drying 24 1

14 Glass lined Reactor Reaction 5 1



Table 2-8 Details of utility

Sr. No Description Capacity/Dimension Qty

1 Air Compressure 71 CFM 2

2 Air Handling Unit 6000 CFM 1



5 Ventillation Unit Supply 12.300 CFM 1

6 Ventillation Unit Return 12.300 CFM 1

7 Dust Collector 600 CFM 1

8 Purified water Plant 1-1.5 Kl/Hr 1

9 Thermax 1.5 TPH

Table 2-9 Details of utility

Sr.No Description Capacity/Dimension Qty

1 Steam Boiler 2 1

2 Chilled water Plant 30 TR 1


Page 78

3 Cooling Tower 500 TR 2

4 Cooling Tower 100 TR 1

5 Vacuum Ejector single stage 160m3/Hr 3

6 Water Ring Vacuum Pump 720 m3/Hr 1

7 Diesel Generator 250 KVA 2

9 Hoist 2.0 MT 1

10 Vacuum Blower 7.5 HP 1

11 Lifting Device 1300 Kg 1

12 Hydraulic Power Pack 20 HP 1

13 Purified water plant 2kl/Hr 1

14 DM Water plant 2kl/Hr 1

15 Thermopack 2 K.Calorie 1

Solvent and Mother Liquor Storage Tanks

Table 2-10 Details of Solvent and Mother Liquor tank

Sr. No. Description Capacity/Dimension Qty

1 Methanol Storage 15 KL 2

2 Distilled Methanol Storage 15 KL 2

3 Mother Liquor Storage 15 KL 4

4 Mother Liquor Storage 15 KL 4

Transfer Pumps

Sr. No. Description Capacity/Dimension Qty.

1 Methanol TR 5 m3/hr 2

2 Solvent Transfer 5 m3/hr 2

3 Process Water 32.4 m3/hr 1

4 Firehydrant Pump 42.40 m3/hr 1

5 ML TR Pump 5 m3/hr 1

6 Pressure filter Pump 15 m3/hr 1

7 Pressure Filter Pump 5 m3/hr 2

8 Cooling Tower Pump 80 KL/Hr 1

9 Aq. Layer TR Pump 15 m3/hr

Table 2-11 Details of Tanks


1 Feed Water Tanks 1700 Lit 1

2 Methanol Addtion Tanks 600 Lit 3

3 Solvent Receiver 2.5 Kl 1

4 Aq Layer Tr Tank 1800 Lit 1

5 Distilled Methanol Receiver 1800 Lit 1

6 Distilled Methanol Receiver 2500 Lit 1

7 Distillate Receiver 1800 Lit 3

8 Distillate Receiver 1500Lit 2

9 Distillate Receiver 2500 Lit 1


Page 79

Table 2-12 Details of Heat exchanger

Sr.No Description Capacity/Dimension Qty

1 Heat Exchanger 10 M2 11

2 Heat Exchager 5 M2 5

3 Heat Exchanger 20M2 1

4 Heat Exchanger 12.5 M2 1

5 Heat Exchanger 25 M2 1

Table 2-13 ETP plant details

Sr. No Description Capacity/Dimension Qty.

1 ETP Blower 3 HP, 140 CMF 2

2 ETP Feed Pump 10 HP 1

3 Sludge Pump 3 HP 1

4 Filtration Pump 2 HP 1

5 Sludge Separator 3 Hp 1

6 Effluent Tr Pump 10 Hp/ 60 KL/Hr 1

7 Sand Bed -PP FRP 2 KL 1

8 Carbon Bed- PPFRP 2 KL 1

Table 2-14 Details of laboratory


1 Glass Assembly 5 Lit 1





6 NF 100 Lit 1

7 Vacuum Ejector 3 HP 1

8 Centrifuge 12 “Basket Dia. 1

Table 2-15 Details of proposed QC Instruments

Sr. No Instrument. Name Qty. Sr. No Instrument. Name Qty

1 GC 1 2 pH meter 1

3 HPLC 1 4 Remi Centrifuge 1

5 Stability Chamber 1 6 1

7 Karl Fischer Titrator 1 8 Millipore Water system 1

9 Melting Point Apparatus 1 10 Refrigerator 1

11 Bulk density apparatus 1 12 Magnetic Stirrer 1

13 Potentiometric Titrator 1 14 Sieve Shaker 1

15 Analytical Balance 1 16 Water Bath (Digital) 1

17 UV Cabinet 1 18 Ultrasonic Bath 1


Page 80

2.7. Description of Manufacturing Process-

2.7.1. API Product Manufacturing Process-

1. Name of the Product: Albendazole

Sr. No. Description UOM Details

1 Quantity per Month: MT 60

2 No of days per Month No 30

3 Batch Output kg 2000

4 No of batches per Month No 30

5 No of Batches per Day No 1

6 Production per day kg 2000

Brief Manufacturing Process:

4- (Propylsulfanyl) benzene-1, 2- diamine and Ammonium salt of methyl-N-Cyanocarbamate is charged in

methanol at ambient temperature. The reaction mass is stirred for 20-30 minutes and acetic acid is added. The

reaction mass is heated to reflux and maintained for 3-5 hrs after completion of reflux the reaction mass is

cooled to ambient and centrifuged. The product is washed with methanol and spin dried. The wet product

unloaded from centrifuge is dried in tray dryer to get dry Albendazole. Mother liquor is subjected to distillation

to recover methanol. The concentrate reaction mass is cooled and filtered to get Ammonium acetate which is

sold to recycler. The solvent residue is dried and recycled.


Page 81

Synthetic Route- for

S NH2

NH2

4-( Propylsulphanyl) Benzene -1,2- Diamine Mol.Wt 182

+ NCNHCOOCH3.NH4 + 2 Acetic acid

Ammonium salt of N-Cyano carbamate Mol.Wt 118

Acetic acid

Mol.Wt 60

S

NH

N

NHCOOCH3 + + Methanol

AlbendazoleMol.Wt 265.40

CH3COONH4

Ammonium acetate Mol.Wt 77.30

Mole Balance:-

Name of Output Mole Mol.Wt

Albendazole 1 265.40

Ammonia 2 34,06

Total = 299.46

Name of Material Moles Mol. Wt.

4-Propyl Benzene diamine 1 182

Cyanocarbamte 1 118

Total = 300


Page 82

Material Balance = Input and output No of Batches /Month =30

Sr. No Input UOM Qty. Output Qty. Remark

1 4-propyl sulphanyl benzene

1,2-Diamine Kg 1400 Albendazole 2000 Final Product

2 Ammonim salt

CyanoCrabamate Kg 945 Rec.Methanol 980

Recycled to next

batch

3 Methanol Kg 1000 Ammonium Acetate 590 Sale to Recycler

4 Acetic acid kg 650 Methanol 20 Opertaional loss

5 ---------------- ---- Solvent Residue 405 To CHWTSDF

Total ----- 3995 Total 3995 --------------------

PROCESS FLOW DIGRAM:-

Total Input = 3995 kg Total Output = 3995 kg

1. SRM-I = 1400kg

2. Cyanaocarbamate = 945kg

3. Methanol = 1000kg

4. Acetic acid = 650

REACTOR

1. Albendazole = 2000kg

2. Methanol Rec. = 980kg

3. Ammonium Acetate = 590kg

4. Methanol = 20kg

5. Residue = 345 kg


Page 83

Pollution Load Unit= kg [No of Batches/Month = 30]

Stag

e

Wat

er in

put

Effluen

t

generat

ed

Solve

nt

resid

ue

Carb

on /

Hyflo

w

Spent

Solve

nt

Spent

Moth

er

Liquo

r

Process

Emission Spent

Organ

ic

solven

t

Organ

ic

proces

s

residu

e

In-

orgnaics

Evaporati

on salts Na

me

Qt

y.

Pollution Load per Batch/Stage

-- Nil Nil 405 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

Pollution Load per Month

-- Nil Nil 12150 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

Pollution Load per Day

-- Nil Nil 405 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

Solvent balance: Unit=kg

Qty. in Kg/Batch or Day

Stag

e

Name

of

solvent

Solve

nt

used

Recover

ed

(distilled

)

Fugiti

ve loss

Distillati

on

process

loss

To

wast

e

wate

r

Distillati

on

residue

Produ

ct

drying

loss

spent

solve

nt

Fresh

Make

up

-- Methan

ol 1000 980 -- 20 -- -- -- -- 20

Water Balance – Unit= kg

Water

input

per

Batch

Stage

No of

Batches

per

month

No of

Working

days

Qty.

water

per

Month

Distilled

Water

Recycled

Net Water

consumption

per month

Net Water

consumption

per day

Nil Nil 100 30 -- -- -- --

Total Dissolved Solids Unit= kg, No of Batches/Month = 30

Effluent TDS /Batch

TDS /Month

TDS/ Day TDS = kg/kg Remark

Nil Nil Nil Nil Nil NA

Chemical Oxygen Demand = Unit kg, No of Batches Month = 30

Remaining Product Manufacturing details are attached as Annexure VII.

Effluent COD /Batch COD /Month COD/

Day COD – kg/kg Remark

Nil Nil Nil Nil Nil NA


Page 84

2.8. Input Requirements

2.8.1. Raw Material Requirement

Raw materials will be received in drums, carboys as well as through tankers and stored in covered shed. Raw

materials are indigenously available and will be transported by road; and in case of unavailability, will be

exported. The raw materials will be stored/register will be maintained as per market requirement of the

products and production schedule. The list of raw material of each product is given below.

Table 2-16 List of Raw material

Sr. No. Name of Raw Material UOM

Quantity

required

Month/Batch

Category State

1. Product=1-Carbamoyl methyl cyclohexyl acetic acid [Gabapentin Intermediate]. Batches=50

1 1,1 Cycloheane diacetic anhydride Kg 200 Raw Material solid

2 Ammonia solution Kg 320 Reagent Liquid

3 CP HCl Kg 190 liquid

2. Name of the Product: 5-(5-Ethyl pyrdidine Ethanol) Pioglutazone Stage I, Intermediate.

Batches=52

1 Ethyl Methyl Pyridine kg 800 Raw Material Liquid

2 Paraformaldehyde kg 75 Raw Material Liquid

3 Dibutyl amine kg 32 Catalyst Liqiod

4 NaOH Flakes kg 32 Ragent Solid

3. Name of the Product: 2-Amino-4-Propyl Thioaniline. Batches= 12

1 2-Nitro 4-thiocyano Aniline kg 949 Raw Material Liquid

2 Methanol kg 260 Solvent Liquid

3 Sodium hydro sulphide 30% kg 3000 Raw Material Liquid

4. Isopropyl bromo isobutyrate. Finofibrate intermediate. Batches= 9

1 Isobutyric acid MT 0.45 Raw Material solid

2 Isopropyl Alcohol MT 0.90 Solvent Liquid

3 Liquid Bromine MT 0.67 Raw Material Liquid

4 Thionyl Chloride MT 0.88 Reagent Liquid

5 Sodium Bi Carbonate MT 0.040 Reagent Solid

6 Methylene di chloride MT 0.20 Solvent Liquid

5. 5-Iodo Benzoic acid. Batches= 9

1 Acetic acid kg 615 Reagent/RM Liquid

2 2-Chloro Benzoic acid kg 308 Raw Material solid

3 Ammonium per sulphate kg 250 Reagent Solid

4 Iodine kg 250 Catalyst Silid

5 Sulphuric acid kg 615 Reagent Liquid

6 Sodium thiosulphate kg 30 Reagent Solid

7 Toluene kg 3200 Solvent Liquid


6. 2-Fluoro Aniline. Flurbiprofen Intermediate. Batches/ Month= 100

1 2-Chloro Nitro Benzene kg 534 Raw Material solid


Page 85


Quantity

required

Month/Batch

Category State

2 Potassium Fluoride kg 256 Raw material liquid

3 Iron Powder kg 300 Reagent solid

4 Ferric chloride kg 20 Reagent solid

7. 2-Nitro- 4, 5- Dichloro acetanilide. Triclabendazole Intermediate. Batches/Month= 133

1 2,3-Dichloro Aniline kg 200 Raw Material solid

2 Acetic anhydride kg 190 Raw material liquid

3 Sulphuric acid kg 18 Reagent liquid

4 Acetic acid kg 575 Reagent liquid

5 Conc.Nitric acid kg 100 Raw Material liquid

6 EDC kg 400 Solvent liquid

7 Caustic lye kg 300 Reagent liquid

8. 2-Nitro-4-Propyl Thioaniline. Batches/Month= 84

1 2-Nitro 4-thiocyano aniline kg 825 Raw Material Solid

2 N-Propanol kg 2775 Raw Material Liquid

3 Sodium Hydroxide 50% kg 755 Reagent Liquid

4 N-Propyl Bromide kg 429 Raw Material Liquid

5 Sodium Chloride kg 18 Reagent Solid

9. 2-Nitro-4-Thiocyano aniline. Batches/Month= 183

1 2- Nitro Aniline kg 325 Raw Material Solid


3 Chlorine Gas kg 190 Reagent Gas

4 Ammonium thiocynate kg 390 Reagent Solid

10. 5- phenyl Mercapto-2-Nitro Aniline. Batches/Month= 10

1 5-Chloro-2- Nitro Aniline kg 750 Raw Material Solid

2 Thiophenol kg 540 Raw material Liquid

3 Sodium Hydroxide kg 427 Reagent Solid


11. 2-Nitro Aniline. Batches/Month= 1000

1 2-Chloro Nitro Benzene kg 1142 Raw Material Solid

2 Ammonia kg 246 Raw Material Liquid

12. 3, 4-Dimethoxy Aniline. Batches/Month = 50

1 3,4-Dihydroxy Anline kg 250 Raw Material Liquid

2 Potssium Carbonate kg 300 Reagent Solid

3 Dimethyl sulphate kg 200 Raw Material Liquid

4 Acetone kg 400 Solvent Liquid

13. 3-Hydroxy Acetophenone. Phenyl Epherine Intermediate. Batches/Month = 100

1 Acetophenone kg 175 Raw Material Solid


3 Fuming Nitric acid kg 105 Raw Material Liquid

4 Dry ice kg 878 Cooling Media Solid

5 Soda ash Kg 23 Reagent Solid


Page 86


Quantity

required

Month/Batch

Category State

6 Ammonium chloride kg 5 Reagent Solid

7 Iron powder Kg 300 Raw material Solid

8 Hydrose Kg 1 Reagent Solid

9 Sodium Nitrite kg 71 Reagent Solid


11 Ammonia solution kg 65 Reagent Liquid

12 Sodium chloride Kg 32 Helping agent Solid

14. 3-Nitro Acetophenone. Batches/Month= 46

1 Acetophenone kg 300 Raw Material Solid


3 Dry Ice kg 1500 Media Solid

4 Soda ash kg 15.0 Reagent Solid

5 Fuming Nitric acid kg 180 Raw Material Liquid

15. 4-(4-Ethyl-phenyl ethoxy) Benzaldehyde/Benzyl thiazolidine 2, 4-Dione. Batches/ Month =66

1 Stage I=PZ-I kg 90 Raw Material Liquid


3 Triethyl amine kg 80 Reagent Liquid

4 Methane sulphonyl chloride kg 87 Reagent Liquid

5 4-Hydroxy Benzaldehyde kg 97 Raw Material Solid

6 Potassium Carbonate kg 137 Reagent Solid

7 Isopropanol kg 400 Solvent Liquid


9 NaOH kg 30 Reagent Solid


11 Thiazoldine 2,4- Dione kg 75 Raw Material Solid

16.5-Chloro -4-Amino-2, 1, 3- Benzothiadiazole. Batches/Month = 6

1 Ethyl Acetate kg 700 Solvent Liquid

2 5-Chloro-4-Amino-2,1,3-

Bezothiadiazole kg 200 Raw Material Solid

3 Iron Powder kg 140 Raw Material Solid

4 Acetic acid kg 10 Reagent Liquid

5 Hexane kg 100 Solvent Liquid

6 Carbon/Hyflow kg 15 Filter aid/

Adosrbant solid

17. 4-Bromo-2-Fluoro Aniline. Flurbiprofen Intermediate. Batches/Month =30

1 2-Fluoro Aniline kg 180 Raw Materila Liquid

2 Acetic acid kg 400 Solvent Liquid

3 Hydrogen peroxide 50% kg 108 Reagent Liquid

4 NaOH solution 50% kg 700 Reagent Liquid

18. 4-Chloro Benzyl Alcohol = Typical hydrogenation process. Batches/Month = 100

1 4-Chloro Benzaldehyde kg 155 Raw Material Solid



Page 87


Quantity

required

Month/Batch

Category State

3 Pd/Carbon kg 4 Adsorbant/

Filter aid Solid

4 Hydrogen kg 28M3 Reducung agent Gas

5 Nitrogen kg 2M3 Intert media Gas

19. 1- [4-Chloro Phenyl]-phenyl methyl piperzine- CTZ.HCl intermediate. Batches/Month =66

1 4- Chloro benzophenone kg 150 Raw Materila Solid

2 Sodium Hydroxide kg 76 Reagent Solid


4 Sodium Borohydride kg 9 Reducing agent Solid

5 HCl 30 % kg 600 Reagent Liquid


7 Piperzine kg 90 Raw material Solid

20. 4-Hydroxy Coumarin. Batches / Month =62

1 2-Hydroxy Acetophenone kg 70 Raw Material Liquid


3 Sodium Methoxide kg 50 Reagent Solid

4 Dimethyl Carbonate kg 52 Raw material Liquid

5 HCl kg 30 Reagent Liquid

6 Carbon kg 10 Adsorbant Solid

7 Hyflow kg 5 Filter aid Solid

21. 5-Amino Salicylic acid. Batches/Month =58

1 4-Amino Phenol kg 250 Raw material Solid

2 Water kg 300 Solvent Liquid

3 potassium Carbonate kg 600 Reagent Solid

4 CO2 kg 150 Reagent Gas

5 Sulphuric acid 20% kg 50 Reagent Liquid

6 Activated Carbon kg 10 Adsorbant Solid

22. 5-Chloro-2-Nitro Aniline.Batches/Month =100

1 m-Chloro Aniline kg 300 Raw material Solid


3 Water kg 600 Solvent Liquid

4 Nitric acid kg 150 Reagent Liquid


6 NaOH lye 50% kg 300 Reagent Liquid

7 HCl kg 300 Reagent Liquid

23. 5-Methoxy-2-Mercapto Bnezimidazole. Batches /month I=36 , / II= 55

1 4-Methoxy Phenyl Acetanilide kg 472 Raw material Solid


3 Nitric acid kg 200 Reagent Liquid

4 Sodium Sulhide Na2S, 9H2O kg 4428 Reagent Liquid

5 Carbon di Sulphide kg 200 Reagent Solid



Page 88


Quantity

required

Month/Batch

Category State

24. Ammonium thiocyanate. Bathces /Month = 100

1 Carbon di Sulohide kg 1000 Raw material Liquid

2 25% Ammonia solution kg 1070 Reagent Liquid

3 NaOH 30 % kg 1500 Reagent Liquid

25. Chloroacetadehyde dimethyl acetal.

1 Vinyl acetate kg 1000 Raw material Liquid


3 Chlorine Gas kg 825 Reactant Gas

4 Calcium oxide kg 200 Reagent Solid

26. Cyanamide 45-50 % Solution /Hydrogen cyanamide. Batches/Month =20

1 Aq. Solution containing NaBr kg 4000 Raw material Liquid

2 Catalyst NEO-HEXA kg 30 Catalyst Solid

27. Cyanuric acid. Bathces /Month = 208

1 Urea kg 200 Raw material Solid

2 Water 200 Solvent Liquid

28. Dichloro Phenyl Imidazole Ethanone/Ethanol [Miconazole Intermediate.]. Batches/Month = 200

1 2,2,4-Trichloro Acetophenone kg 100 Raw material Solid


3 Sodium Carbonate kg 80 Reagent Solid

4 Imidazole kg 40 Raw material Solid

5 Sodium Borohydride kg 12.50 Reagent Solid


7 NaOH kg 1.2 Reagent Solid

29. Hydrogen Cyanamide. Batches/Month = 100

1 OHCN kg 500 Raw material Liquid

2 Ammonia solution kg 1000 Raw material Liquid

30. Lasamide [ 2,4-Dichloro-5-sulphonyl chloride].Batches/Month = 111

1 2,4-Dichloro Benzoic acid kg 300 Raw material solid

2 Chlorosulphonic acid kg 600 Raw material Liquid

3 Ammonia Solution 12.5% kg 3600 Reagent Liquid

31. m-Nitro Bendzaldehyde. Batches/Month =50

1 Benzaldehyde kg 100 Raw material Liquid

2 Sodium Nitrate kg 85 Reagent Liqud


32. N-Propyl Bromide. Batches/Month = 25

1 Sodium Bromide solution kg 8000 Raw material liquid


3 Soda ash kg 200 Reagent Solid

4 N-Propanol kg 700 Solvent/Reactant Liquid

33. 2-((4-methoxy-3, 5-dimethyl pyridin-2-yl) methylthio)-2,3-dihydro-5- methoxy -1H-

benzo[d]imidazole [ Omeprazole Intermediate]. Batches/Month = 57


Page 89


Quantity

required

Month/Batch

Category State

1 5-Methoxy -2-mercapto Benzimidazole kg 250 Raw material Solid

2 Chloro compound. kg 250 Raw material Solid

3 Sodium hydroxide kg 100 Reagent Solid


5 Ammonium molybdate kg 10 Catalyst Solid

34. 4-Nitro Bnezamide. Batches/Month =20

1 4-Nitro Benzoic acid kg 1670 Raw material Solid


3 Thionyl Chloride kg 800 Reagent Liquid

4 Ammonia 25 % kg 4000 Reagent Liquid

35. Sodium Bromide. Batches/Month =50

1 Mother Liquor with Sodium Bromide kg 5000 Raw material Liquid

36. Sodium Sulphide Flakes. Bathces 33

1 Mother Liquor with Sodium Sulphide kg 5000 Raw material Liquid

2 Caustic Soda kg 1400 Reagent Solid

37. 4-Chloro-5-(2, 3-dichlorophenoxy)-2-Nitro Aniline. TBZ= II, Batches/Month= 62

1 2,3-Dichloro Phenol kg 100 Raw material solid

2 Potassium Carbonate kg 82 Reagent Solid

3 Dichloro phenyl -2-Nitro-acetanilide kg 142 Stage I Solid

4 DMF kg 200 Solvent Liquid


6 Methanolic Sodium Hydroxide kg 100 Reagent Liquid

38. 6-Chloro-5-(2, 3-dichlorophenoxy-1H-benzimidazole thiol. TBZ- III. 90

1 5-Chloro-dichloro phenoxy-nitro phenyl

amine kg 350 Raw Material Solid


3 Raney Nickel kg 10 Catalyst Solid

4 Activated Carbon kg 10 Adsorbant Solid

5 Carbon di sulphide kg 55 Raw material Liquid

6 Hydrogen M3 50 Redcing agent Gas

7 Nitrogen M3 14 Inert media Gas

8 Methanolic Alkali solution kg 70 Reagent Liquid

10 HCl 30% Kg 80 Reagent Liquid

39. 2, 2, 4-Trichloro Acetophenone. Batches/ Month = 125

1 1,3-Dichloro Bnezene kg 100 Raw material Liquid

2 Alcl3 kg 122 Catalyst Solid

3 Chloro acetyl chloride kg 110 Raw material liquid

4 HCl 30% kg 20 Reagent Liquid

40. Tetra Butyl Ammonium Bromide. Batches/Month = 20

1 Tri butyl amine kg 1085 Raw material Liquid

2 n-Butyl Bromide kg 884 Raw material


Page 90


Quantity

required

Month/Batch

Category State

3 Aceto Nitrile kg 750 Solvent Liquid

4 Ethyl acetate kg 1300 Solvent Liquid

41. Thiophenol. Batches/Month = 120

1 Isopropanol kg 1000 Solvent Liquid

2 Disulphide kg 500 Raw material Liquid

3 Sodium bi sulphite-35% kg 270 Reagent liquid

4 Acetic acid kg 700 Solvent Liquid

5 Sulphur kg 50 Catalyst Solid

2.8.2. Water Requirement

Source- [MIDC] Maharashtra Industrial Development Corporation, Paithan.

The total water budget for proposed project is shownin the Table No. 2.17

Table 2-17 Details of Water Consumption

Sr. No Water Consumption Source Quantity(m3) Remark

1 Boiler 40 Condensate Recycled

2 Cooling Tower Blow Down 30 ---

3 APCM [ Air Pollution control system] 2 ---

4 Manufacturing Process HCOD 120 ---

5 Washings, Cleaning, Equipment, Utensils etc 14 ---

6 Total Industrial 206 ---

Gardening 30 ---

Domestic 10 ---

Total 246

Table 2-18 Effluent generation

Sr. No Effluent Generation Source Quantity (m3)

1 Boiler Blow Down 2

2 Cooling Tower Blow Down 5

3 APCM [ Air Pollution control system] 1.6

4 Manufacturing Process HCOD 115

5 Washings, Cleaning, Equipment, Utensils etc. 12.50

6 Total Industrial 136.10

7 Domestic 9

8 Industrial + Domestic 145.10

HCOD/HTDS 115

LCOD/ LTDS 21.10

Table 2-19 Summary of water budget

Sr. No Description Quantity(m3)

1 Total Effluent generated and recycled 145

2 Steam Condensate Recycled 38

3 Fresh water Requirement 63

4 Total 246

5 Rain water Harvesting in rainy season 20


Page 91

Figure 2-5 Water balance diagram

HCOD/ HTDS Treatment and disposal.

Treated in Stripper/ MEE/ ATFD and RO. Capacity Stripper

RO permeate used for make up to Boiler, cooling tower, cleaning.

RO Reject sent back to ETP for bio treatment.

LCOD/LTDS Treatment and disposal.

Effluent treated in ETP under biological treatment activated sludge method.

LCOD/LTDS effluent is treated in ETP, Bio-treatment. Treated Effluent after passing through sand and carbon

bed filter, it collected in holding tank and feed to RO. Permeate used for recycling. Reject from RO sent back

to ETP for bio-treatment.

HCOD 115 CMD, LCOD = 21.10 CMD.

ETP Based on activated sludge principal. Capacity 35 CMD

RO capacity 150 CMD, [75 CMD x 2 NO.] 20 hrs Functioning Flow 3.75 m3/Hr

Domestic Effluent 4 CMD/Day


Page 92

Treatment in dedicated sewage treatment plant, treated sewage used for green belt treatment.

2.8.3. Power:

The power requirement for proposed project is 300 HP. (Source: - MSEDCL) Boiler 2 T/Hr.; Fuel Briquette -

500 kg/Hr. Proposed Thermopack 1 no 2.0 lac Kcal/hr. and 2 No. of DG Set having capacity of 250 KVA is

sufficient to meet emergency power requirement of the plant.

2.8.4. Fuel requirement details:

Unit proposes to use Briquette as fuel in proposed steam Boiler of 2 TPH capacity, LDO is proposed for

Thermic Fluid Heater (2.0 lac Kcal/hr.). Also, HSD will be used for 2 nos. of D.G. Set at the rate of 30 lit/hr.

in case of power failure. Details of fuel consumption are given below;

Table 2-20 Fuel requirement

Equipment Fuel Quantity required at full load

Steam Boiler of 2 T/Hr. Briquette 500 Kg/Hr.

Consumption shown is based on 100% utilization of individual fuel.

Thermopack 1 no 2.0 lac Kcal/hr. LDO 80 Lit./Hr.

D G 2 no X 250 KVA HSD 30 Lit/Hr. each

2.8.5. Man Power

Manpower requirement will be 60 nos. of skilled and unskilled category.

2.9. Generation of Pollutants

The sources of generation of pollutants are described as below;

Table 2-21 Details of effluent generation

Sr. No Effluent Generation Source Quantity(m3)

1 Boiler Blow Down 2

2 Cooling Tower Blow Down 5

3 APCM [ Air Pollution control system] 1.6

4 Manufacturing Process HCOD 115

5 Washings, Cleaning, Equipment, Utensils etc. 12.50

6 Total Industrial 136.10

7 Domestic 9

8 Industrial + Domestic 145.10

HCOD/HTDS 115

LCOD/ LTDS 21.10

2.10. Gaseous Emission

Flue gas emission will be from one common stack attached to steam boiler of 2 TPH capacity, one stack

attached to Thermic Fluid Heater (2.0 lakhs kcal/hr.) and two number of stacks of stand by D.G. Set (2 x 250

kVA). Briquette will be used as a fuel for boiler, LDO for Thermic Fluid Heater HSD for D.G. Set. Most

probable pollutants will be SPM/TPM, SO2 and NOx.


Page 93

Table 2-22 Details of emission from process and flue gas

Sr.

No

Stack

No

Attached

to Capacity Fuel APCM

Stack

Height

Parameters

Emission

rate

Permissible

Limit

1 1 Steam

Boiler I 2 TPH

Briquette

500kg/Hr

Cyclone

separator

followed by

Dust collector

30M TPM <150 PPM

2 2 Thermopac

Boiler II 2 Lac/Hr

LDO

80 li/Hr

Dust collector

with

appropriate

Stack height.

30M

TPM

SO2

1.6 kg/H

<150 ppm

<35 ppm

3 3 DG 250 HSD 30

lit/Hr

Acoustic

Enclosure 6M*

SO2

3kg/Hr.

<150 ppm

<35 ppm

4 4 DG 250 HSD 30

lit/Hr

Acoustic

Enclosure 6M*

SO2

3kg/Hr. <35 ppm

Table 2-23 Details of proposed process and air emission

Sr.

No.

Stack

No Attached to APCM

Stack

Height Parameters

Permissible

Limit

1 1 Scrubber

Process

Catch pot with packed

column with water

supply

10m

Acid mist,

HCl

CO2/ SO2

<35 ppm

2 2

Laboratory

Fume

cupboard

Catch pot packed column

with water/Alkali

circulation.

10m SO2, HCL,

NO, HBr <35 ppm

4 3 Process

Reactor

Catch pot with packed

column 15 m

HCl, SO2,

CO2 < 35PPM.

Sources of fugitive emission:

Fugitive emission, dust is expected during storage, loading/unloading of raw materials, material transfer point,

generation of acid mist from material handling area, storage area. There will be also chances of generation of

fugitive emission from vehicular movement in the premises.


Page 94

Table 2-24 Details of stack

Attached to Steam Boiler Thermopac DG Set

Capacity 2 TPH 2 Lac Kcal 2 x 250 KVA

Fuel type Briquette LDO HSD

Fuel 500 Kg/Hr. LDO 80 li/Hr 30 lit/Hr.

MOC MS MS MS

Shape Round Round Round

Height m

(aboveground level) 30 m 30 m

6.0 m Above roof top

of the shed

Mitigation Measures Cyclone separator Dust

Collector

Appropriate Stack and

Dust collector Stack/ Acoustic

2.10.1. Hazardous & Solid waste generation

The main solid waste from this factory will be (a) non-hazardous and (b) hazardous from process;

a. Non-hazardous waste:

Table 2-25 Details of Non-hazardous waste

Sr.No. Description Schedule No UOM Frequency Quantity

1 Boiler Ash NA kg Day 1500

2 Canteen Waste NA MT Month 0.30

3 Packaging Waste NA MT Month 0.40

4 Office waste NA MT Month 0.40

5 Septic Tank Sludge NA MT Month 0.30

6 Polythene bags NA MT Month 0.30

7 Broken Glass NA MT Month 0.02

8 Electronic Waste NA kg Month 10

9 Corrugated Box NA kg Month 100

10 Mild still [ MS Scrap] NA kg Month 250

11 SS Scrap. NA kg Month 150

Non-hazardous waste will be segregated as recyclable/ saleable.

Waste minimization at all levels for discarded products, empty containers, packing, surplus, unloading

spillages and fugitives.

The plant will produce very less amount of scrap material. All these will however be stored carefully

on raised platform, with dwarf toe-walls all around and an overhead roof. The contents will not be

stored in the factory for more than a fortnight.

b. Hazardous Waste

Table 2-26 Details of hazardous waste

Sr.No. Description Schedule


1

Solvent

Distillation

Residue

28.10 Kg Day 3958 CHWTSDF


3 Evaporation Salts

/MEE 34.20 kg Day 6747 CHWTSDF

4 Spent Carbon/

Hyflow 28.30 kg Day 107 CHWTSDF

5 Off Specification

Products 28.40 kg Day 100 CHWTSDF


Page 95

6 Spent Mother

Liquor kg Day 8775 Sale to Recycler

7 Spent Acid kg Day 23755 Sale to authorized user

8 Spent Oil/ Process

Residue/ Waste 5.10/5.20 kg Month 200 CHWTSDF

9

Discarded

containers and

Drums

Barrels

33.10 No Month 100 Sale to authorized

Recycler/Reprocessor

10

Chemical sludge,

Oil and grease

skimming

residues.

35.40 kg Month 100 CHWTSDF

Reuse/ Recycle/ Recovery Systems proposed along with Details

The solvents used in manufacturing process will be recycled in the process itself.

The solvent recovery scheme will be proposed to recover maximum recovery of solvents.

Noise generation

Noise generation will be from process plant, from operation of boiler, TFH, D.G. Set and other

machineries/equipment, vehicular movements and other machineries. General noise level in the plant is

expected to come below acceptable limit.

2.11. Pollution Control Strategy

The details of pollution control strategy for various parameters are,

2.11.1. Effluent Management

1. Effluent is categorized as LCOD and HCOD based on COD value in terms of mg/Lit

2. Value more than 5000 mg/Lit is considered as LCOD and above as HCOD.

3. The corresponding streams of effluent are segregated and then sent for treatment to respective unit.

4. HCOD/ HTDS IS Treated in evaporation system. The unit has 3 no different units combined together.

Stripper column, MEE and ATFD. Condensate is pumped to RO with appropriate Capacity of RO or

sent to ETP biological treatment along with LCOD/LTDS effluent. [If COD /TDS within limit].

5. LCOD/LTDS is treated in ETP for biological treatment. Pretreated effluent shall be stored in a holding

tank and then pumped to RO for further treatment.

Description of Treatment

The total water requirement is 246 KL. Waste water generated from plant premises will be 145 KL Out of this

115 KLD will be high COD [Manufacturing Process] and 21 KLD Will be from washings, laboratory

usage,floor cleaning , equipment cleaning, product washing and utensils washings. Boiler / cooling tower blow

down etc. 9 KLD from domestic over flow from septic tank. [Treated separately in STP as outlined

below]This waste water shall be pumped into above ground level tank for storage and neutralization of HCOD.

LCOD effluent then routed to Zero liquid discharge facility in plant premises. All treatment tanks will be

constructed and installed above ground level with proof lining. HTDS/HCOD will be sent to MEE system with

stripper column followed by ATFD [Agitated thin film dryer]. The condensate from MEE/ATFD and

LTDS/LCOD effluents will be sent to either Biological ETP or recycled to MEE/ATFD. After pretreatment

the effluent will be sent to RO system.Permeate from RO system 70-75% shall be recycled and Reject shall


Page 96

be back to MEE system or can be transferred to ETP biological treatment. Salts collected from ATFD system

will be collected and sent to CHWTSDF for safe disposal.

Effluent Management and ZLD system:

The effluent management system shall be developed to ensure ZLD. Effluent streams shall be segrated as

HCOD/ LCOD characterization. COD value upto 5000 mg/Lit is categorized as LCOD [Low Chemical

Oxygen Demand] and COD value more than 5000 mg/Lit as HCOD [High Chemical Oxygen Demand].

HCOD / HTDS EFFLUENT

The treatment system facility consist of

1. Screen Chamber. 2. Collection tank/ Neutralization tank. 3. Stripper column 4.MEE double effect forced

evaporation. 5. ATFD

Effluent is pumped to stripper column with marinating the flow and other conditions of temperature to stripped

low boiling and organic matter. The stripped condensate is collected and stored. It can be sending to incinerator

or sold to recycler.

Bottom aqueous part shall be be inlet to MEE calendriya for forced evaporation under steam pressure of 4-

bar with TVR [Thermo vapour Recompressor]. Condensate is collected in a holding tank. The concentrate

from MEE having about 10-15 % aqueous part is discharged to ATFD with appropriately regulating the flow

for proper evaporation and discharge of solid as waste. Condensate from ATFD / MEE is sent to RO. Permeate

of RO is recycled and Reject is send to MEE/ATFD or ETP for Bio treatment along with

The solid discharged from ATFD Bottom is collected and packed in appropriate packaging material. It contains

about 5-10 % of moisture, sent to CHWTSDF for disposal.

LTDS/ LCOD effluent will be generated from process washing, floor washings, utensils cleaning, Laboratory

operations, cooling tower blow down and other general operations is sent to Biological treatment.


Page 97

Primary Treatment

The effluent enters into 2 no oil and grease chamber and then to equalization tank for dilution process for

better functioning and effective treatment. The effluent is thoroughly mixed with the help of air to get a

constant composition of the effluent. Effluent PH is adjusted to 7-8 with either acid or alkali. Neutralized

effluent is pumped to primary setting tank where the settled solid is separated. The clarified effluent is sent to

secondary treatment. Settled sludge is centrifuged and filtrate is recycled. The solid sludge is unloaded and

stored at quarantine area then disposed of to CHWTSDF or land filling if quality is compatible.

Secondary Treatment

The secondary is a biological activated sludge process. A two stage activated sludge process is adopted.

Stage I

Primary treated effluent is made inlet to aeration tank where aerobic bacterial culture is maintained in

suspension referred as mixed liquor suspended solids [MLSS].

The aerobic environment in the aerator is achieved by use of mechanical surface aerator or pure oxygen which

helps to maintain contents in a well mixed form with proper DO level. The effluent from aeration tank is

passed in to primary clarifier where the activated sludge is separated from treated waste water. A portion of

settled activated MLSS is retained. Over flow of primary goes to second stage of activated sludge process

called oxidation ditches.

Stage II

The surface aerator in series and connected in aeration tank. The treatment procedure is same as in stage I.

The overflow from the ditches is connected to secondary clarifier and collected in treated effluent sump.

Tertiary Treatment

The treated effluent collected from activated sludge process is sent to carbon and sand bed pressure filter and

collected in a separate holding tank and then pumped through RO, plant of appropriate capacity 150 kl/day

[6.85 KL/Hr]. The pump flow is based on 20 hrs functioning.

75-80 % permeate Output is collected and recycled to Cooling Tower, Boiler feed, cleaning etc. RO Reject is

sent to Evaporation system [MEE/ ATFD] or ETP for biological treatment depending upon COD/TDS values.


Page 98

Figure 2-6 Details of treatment facilities

Table 2-27 Characteristic of Untreated HCOD Effluent

Sr. No. Parameter Unit Value

1. pH -- 5.0 to 8.0

2. BOD BOD@270C for 3 days Mg/ Lit 16604.23

3. COD Mg/ Lit 45115.66

4. TDS Mg/ Lit 71895.82

5. TSS Mg/ Lit 100

6. O&G Mg/ Lit 400-500

Table 2-28 Characteristic of LCOD Effluent- 57.1 M3/day

Sr. No. Parameter Unit Value

1. pH -- 5.0 to 8.0

2. COD Mg/ Lit 4000

3. TDS Mg/ Lit 5000

4. O&G Mg/ Lit 10


Page 99

Table 2-29Characteristic of treated Effluent

Sr. No. Parameter Unit Value Standard as per MPCB

1. pH -- 7.0 to 8.0 7.0 to 8.0

2. COD Mg/ Lit <300 <250

3. BOD@270C for 3 days Mg/ Lit <100 <100

4. TDS Mg/ Lit <400

4. TSS Mg/ Lit <100 <100

5. O&G Mg/ Lit <10 <10

Details of Reverse Osmosis [RO1] HCOD/LTDS

1. RO Capacity 70 CMD 2 NO.

2. Each RO total Feed capacity 7 CMD.

3. Flow rate 3.5 KL/Hr. 20 hr. functioning.

4. Output 75-80 % permeate, -25-20 % Reject.

Figure 2-7 Details of RO


Page 100

Table 2-30 Technical specification of various unit

Sr. No Facility Description Treatment Unit No Capacity

In m3 MOC

1 Screening Chamber 0.95X0.85x 1.84 1 1.5 RCC

2 Oil and grease trap 0.9x0.8x1.85 2 1.5 RCC

3 Collection tank 3.94X3.92X3.2 1 50 RCC

4 Coagulation Tank 1.3X01.50 SWD 2 2 RCC

5 Flocculation Tank 1.3x 1.53 1 2 RCC

6 Primary settling Tank 3x3.1.8 1 10 RCC

7 Aeration Tank 5x6x4 1 120 RCC

8 Secondary Clarifier with hopper Bottom 3x3x1.70 1 15 RCC

9 Filter feed Tank 2x3.98x2.48 1 30

10 Treated water Tank 2.47x2.50x3 1 24

11 Centrifuge 56” 2 400 kg cake capacity MS

12 Decantar 2-5 m3/hr 1 2-4m3/Hr MS

Table 2-31 Details of mechanical equipments

Sr.

No Description Size/ Capacity Hp Quantity MOC

1 Poly Electorate Dosing Tan 100 lit NA 1 HDPE/PP-

FRP

2 Alum Dosing Tank 100 NA 1 HDPE

3 DAP Dosing Tank 100 NA 1 HDPE

4 Urea dosing tank 100 NA 1 HDPE

5 Sludge transfer pump 12 1

6 Sludge Recycle pump 12 1 1

7 Primary feed pump 12 1 1

8 PSF Feed pump 12 3 2

9 RO feed pump 12 3 2

10 Air blower for bioreactor or aeration

Tank 700 m3/Hr 7.50 2

11 Air Blower for equalization Tank 150m3/Hr 5 1

12 Air blower for collection Tank 150 m3/Hr 5 2

13 Pressure sand filter NA NA 1 PP-FRP

14 Activated carbon filter NA NA 1 PP-FRP

15 Fine bubbled diffused aeration system 70 Dia X 2M

Length NA 20 Silicon

16 Course bubbled mixing system for

equalization tank 1000 mm Long NA 20 PVC

17 Decanter feed screw pump 1000lit/Hr 1 1 CI/SS


Page 101

Table 2-32 Details of electrical units

Sr. No Description Size/ Capacity Hp Quantity MOC

1

Motor control center

Local motor control center

Earthling System

Area Lightening

--- NA 1 Flame proof

2 Interconnecting piping valves NA NA 1 Standard

Sewage Treatment Plant

Design Basis-

The plant is designed to treat the raw wastewater generated from domestic sources including kitchen having

following characteristics as given:

Capacity : 15 M3/D Average

Hours of Operation : 0.64 M3/Hr. @ 23 Hrs.

Peak Flow : 15 m3

Peak factor : 3.0 times for 3 hours

* The plant is designed to operate at max. +/- 10 % variation in raw wastewater parameters

The proposal for 15 CMD sewage treatment plant (STP)

• Features of MBBR Packaged system:

• Best present available highly aerobic technology for sewage treatment.

• Self-regulating biomass development and biomass holding process capability

• No operational adjustments required

• No sludge recirculation & Single pass treatment

• Lower footprints than any other technology& efficient process

• Stable under high organic loading

• Low mechanical equipment maintenance

• Low noise level

• No odour in surrounding environment

• No media replacement

• Old plants of any technology are upgraded with MBBR technology for capacity enhancement / quality

improvements.

Inlet Parameter

Parameter Details

pH 6.0-9.0

BOD 300 mg/L

COD 500-600 mg/L

Suspended Solids 200-300 mg/L

Oil & Grease 20-30 mg/L

Outlet Parameter

Parameter Details

pH 6.5-8.5

BOD <10.0 mg/L

COD <30.0 mg/L

Suspended Solids <10.0 mg/L

Oil & Grease < 01 mg/L


Page 102

• Complies Pollution Control Board and local authority norms

• Treated water can be directly utilized for gardening, flushing etc.

Sewage Effluent Treatment Schematic Flow Diagram

Table 2-33 Details of STP

Unit Capacity

(Volume-M3) Method Of Construction Location

Screen Chamber 1.5 RCC Underground

Equalization Tank 7.5 RCC Underground

MBBR Reactor 1+1 6 RCC Underground

Tube Settler 5 RCC Underground

Filter Feed Tank 4 RCC Underground

Sludge Holding Tank 5 RCC Underground

Final Treated Water Tank

(08 Hrs HRT) 5 RCC Underground

Plant Room 1 m X 1.5 m RCC Aboveground

Total Space Requirement Approx. 15 m2

3 m

5m


Page 103

Table 2-34 details of electro-mechanical works

Sr.

No. Equipment Detail MOC/ Type Make Quantity

1 Coarse Screen MSEP GMC 01

2 Sewage Transfer Pump- (2 CMH

@ 10m TDH) Horizontal Centrifugal

Kirloskar/

CRI/Equivalent

02

(1W+1S)

3 Filter Feed Pump -(2 CMH @

10m TDH) Horizontal Centrifugal Kirloskar/Equivalent

02

(1W+1S)

4 Sludge Pump Horizontal Centrifugal Kirloskar/Equivalent 02 Nos.

5

Air Blower – For EQT, Aeration

tanks & SHT

(4 CMH @ 0.3 Bar)

CI Everest/TMVT/Equi. 02

(1W+1S)

6 Dosing Pumps Edose/Equivalent 02 Nos.

7 Dosing Tanks HDPE 02 Nos.

8 MBBR media -(High Surface

Area) PP Marvellous/Equi. 1 LOT

9 Tube settler media PVC Marvellous/Cooldeck 1 LOT

10 MS powder coated Electrical

Control Panel Eaton/ Siemens

Auto/Manual buttons for

every components GMC Std. 01 Nos.

11 Inter connecting Piping between

pumps, fittings UPVC/GI

Astral/Prince/

Equivalent 01 Lot

12 Cables from panel to all electro-

mechanical

Polycab/Finolex/

equivalent 01 Lot

13 Air Grids for EQT, Aeration,

SHT CPVC + UPVC

Astral/Prince/

equivalent 01 Lot

14 Pressure Sand Filter-600X750

HOS MSEP GMC / Equivalent 01 Nos.

15 Activated Carbon Filter-600X750

HOS MSEP GMC / Equivalent 01 Nos.

16 Micron Filter PP / Equivalent 01 Nos.


Page 104

2.9.2 Air Pollution Control (APC) Measures

The main source of below mentioned gases is from manufacturing process of various products/ intermediate.

Table 2-35 Details of air pollution control measure

Sr.No. Name of the Product Name of

the Gas

Emission

kg/Day

Emission Rate

kg/Hr. Disposal Method

1 4.7- Dichloro

Quinoline

HCl

SO2

20.88

162.66

2.088

1.62

Scrubbed with chilled

water and caustic solution

2 2-Nitro thiocyano

aniline HCl 487 32.46


water and caustic solution

3 2-Bromo Isobutyrate HBr, HCl,

SO2

78.20, 85.4

105.73

6.51 ,

7.11,10.57


water and caustic

solution.

4 2-Nitro thiocycano

aniline HCl 487 24.35


water and caustic

solution.

5 4-Nitro Benzamide HCl

SO2

86

66.60

4.30

6.66


water and caustic

solution.

6 n-Propyl Bromide CO2 16.66 1.66 Disposed off to

atmosphere

7 Miconazole

Intermediate CO2 114.06 11.406

Disposed off to

atmosphere

8 Trichloro

acetophenone HCl 82.659 6.265

Scrubbed in chilled water

and caustic solution

9 4-Chloro dichloro

phenoxy Aniline CO2 201 2.01 Disposed to atmosphere

10 5-Amino Salicylic

acid CO2 186.20 12.40

Disposed off to

atmosphere

11 4-Amino Benzonitrile HCl, SO2 205.5, 180 2.055, 2 Scrubbed in chilled

water/ Caustic solution.

Fugitive Emission Control

To control fugitive emission, following steps will be implemented:

Entire process will be carried out in closed reactors.

Pneumatically transfer of liquid raw material in rector.

Provision of mechanical seals in pumps.

Raw material will be stored in the covered structure.

Regular maintenance of valves, pipes etc.

Provision dust suppression system (water sprinklers) to control air borne dust.

Fly ash will be stored in covered sheds only.

Internal road will be concreted or paved to reduce the fugitive emission during vehicular

movement.

Greenbelt will be developed around the plant to arrest the fugitive emission.

Frequent work area monitoring will be done ensure fugitive emissions level.


Page 105

2.11.2. Hazardous/Solid Waste Management

Entire quantity of hazardous waste will be handled & disposed as per Hazardous & Other waste (Management

& Transboundary Movement) Rules, 2016. There will be ten sources of Solid/hazardous waste generation.

ETP Sludge and salt from Spray Dryer will be disposed off to approve CHWTSDF site. Iron sludge and

gypsum sludge will be sold to the cement plant for co-processing or disposed off to approve CHWTSDF site.

Iron sludge and gypsum sludge will be sold to the cement plant for co-processing or disposed off to approve

CHWTSDF site.

Table 2-36 Hazardous waste Details

Sr.

No. Description

Schedule


1 Solvent Distillation

Residue 28.10 Kg Day 3958 CHWTSDF


3 Evaporation Salts /

MEE 34.20 kg Day 6747 CHWTSDF

4 Spent Carbon/ Hyflow 28.30 kg Day 107 CHWTSDF

5 Off Specification

Products 28.40 kg Day 100 CHWTSDF

6 Spent Mother Liquor kg Day 8775 Sale to Recycler

7 Spent Acid kg Day 23755 Sale to authorized user

8 Spent Oil/ Process

Residue/ Waste 5.10/5.20 kg Month 200 CHWTSDF

9

Discarded containers

and Drums

Barrels

33.10 No Month 100 Sale to authorized

Recycler/Reprocessor

10

Chemical sludge, Oil

and grease skimming

residues.

35.40 kg Month 100 CHWTSDF


Page 106

Table 2-37 Details of Non-hazardous waste

Sr.No. Description Schedule No UOM Frequency Quantity

1 Boiler Ash NA kg Day 1500

2 Canteen Waste NA MT Month 0.30

3 Packaging Waste NA MT Month 0.40

4 Office waste NA MT Month 0.40

5 Septic Tank Sludge NA MT Month 0.30

6 Polythene bags NA MT Month 0.30

7 Broken Glass NA MT Month 0.02

8 Electronic Waste NA kg Month 10

9 Corrugated Box NA kg Month 100

10 Mild still [ MS Scrap] NA kg Month 250

11 SS Scrap. NA kg Month 150

Non-hazardous waste will be segregated as recyclable/ saleable.

Waste minimization at all levels for discarded products, empty containers, packing, surplus, unloading

spillages and fugitives.

The plant will produce very less amount of scrap material. All these will however be stored carefully

on raised platform, with dwarf toe-walls all around and an overhead roof. The contents will not be

stored in the factory for more than a fortnight.

2.11.3. Noise Pollution Control Measures

The main noise generating sources in the plant will be from Boiler, Thermic Fluid Heater and D.G. set, process

plant, vehicular transportation & other machineries. All these sources will generate continuous noise.

However, the noise transmitted outside the plant boundary will be low because most of the noise generating

equipment’s will be in closed structures provided with acoustic enclosure. Ear muff, ear plug will be provided

to all workers working at noisy area. Additionally, extensive oiling, lubrication, periodic monitoring and

regular maintenance will be carried out for the machineries and equipment’s to reduce noise generation.

Adequate greenbelt (36 %) will be developed within premises and around the periphery to prevent the noise

pollution. By taking measures as mentioned, it is anticipated that noise levels in the plant will be maintained

below the permissible limit.

2.12. Rain Water Harvesting

A rainwater harvesting system comprises of various stages- transporting rainwater through pipes or drains,

filtration and storage in tanks for reuse. It is proposed to collect rainwater from roof top of building in a tank.

It is proposed to use this water for industrial purpose. Four no. of RWH Tank with capacity- 25 Cum each.

At the peak rainfall of 772 mm it is expected to generate runoff of 9076.54 m3. It is proposed to provide storm

water drainage of 0.5 m wide and 1 m depth along North boundaries of the plot. Connected to MIDC Storm

drain.

2.13. Green Belt Development

Total land area is 20,000 m2. The unit will develop greenbelt in area of 6600.42 m2. Overall greenbelt area

will be tuned around 33% of the total area of the project. As per the guidelines 2500 trees per hector of land

should br planted and the industry has exiting 65 nos. of trees and proposes 1585 nos. of trees will be planted

over the plot premises. The selection of trees is based upon the climatologically conditions of the Study area

and as per CPCB guidelines. The species for plantation have been selected on the basis of soil quality, place

of plantation, chance of survival, growth of plant etc.


Page 107

2.14. Occupational Health and Safety

The company is concerned with the Environment, Health and Safety protection. The company will formulate

and develop an ‘Occupational Health & Safety Policy’ to ensure good health and safety of its employees.

Following key safety measures shall be a part of the Health & Safety policy of the company & shall be followed

after the project implementation:

PPE will be provided to cover occupational injury to foot, head, hearing, and eye.

Evacuation routes will be planned such that alternate route is available from any corner in more than

one direction

Extra precautions will be taken in loading/ unloading of flammable/toxic chemicals.

Ensuring that operators/workers etc. follows the SOPs, Safety procedures & standards, work permit

system etc.

Make sure existing fire extinguishers are fully charged and ready for action.

Inspection of Storage Area, Earthing & Bonding system.

Inspections of plant, machinery, tools, equipment, premises, work practices, processes, procedures

and general environment must be carried out for the health and safety of plant, people and surrounding.

On-site and Offsite Emergency Plans shall be reviewed and updated, as per the requirement

Fire Extinguishers shall be provided and Fire Hydrant System shall be installed.

Mock drills shall be periodically conducted and factors like response time shall be evaluated.

First Aid Facility and training shall be provided.

Health check-ups shall be organized at regular intervals.

Safety/Health records and MSDS shall be maintained


Page 108

3. DESCRIPTION OF ENVIRONMENT

3.1. General

To assess environmental impacts from proposed project at a specific location, it is essential to monitor the

existing environmental quality prevailing in the surrounding area prior to implementation of the project. The

environmental status within the impact zone could be used for identification of significant environmental

issues to be addressed in the impact assessment study. Baseline data generation forms a part of the

Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) study and helps to evaluate the predicted impacts on the various

environmental attributes in the study area by using scientifically developed and widely accepted impact

assessment methodologies. This section contains the description of baseline studies of 10 km radius

surrounding the project site. The baseline study was carried out to understand following environmental

parameters.

Land Environment

Meteorology

Air Environment

Water Environment

Soil Environment

Noise Environment

Biological Environment

Socio-economic Environment

The data collected has been used to understand the existing environment scenario around the project site

against which the potential impacts of the proposed project can be assessed.

3.2. Study Area

The unit is located at Plot No. D-10, MIDC Paithan, Taluka: Paithan, Dist. Aurangabad, Maharashtra. Pin

code: 431107. An area of 10 km radius from the boundary of the project site is considered as study area for

the EIA study as per the TOR issued by MoEF&CC.


Page 109

Table 3-1 Environmental settling of study area

Sr.

No. particulars Details

A. Nature & Size of the

Project List of the products is mentioned in Table no.1.1

B. Category of the

Project

As per EIA Notification dated 14th Sep., 2006 as amended from time to

time; the project falls in Category ‘A’, Project or Activity -5(f).

C.

Location Details

Village Paithan

Tehsil Paithan

District Aurangabad

State Maharashtra




D.

Area Details

Total Project Area

and Green belt

development area

Total Plot Area = 20000.00 Sq. M.

Green Belt 33% Of Plot Area = 6600.42 Sq. M.

Parking Area 10.0 % Of Plot Area = 2000.00 Sq. M.



2. Nearest town and

City Aurangabad- 36.97 km

3.

Nearest National

Highway / State

Highway

State highway Aurangabad to Paithan- 0.5 km

4. Nearest Railway

station Aurangabad – 35.46 km


6.

National Parks,

Wildlife

Sanctuaries,

Biosphere

Reserves, Tiger/

Elephant

Reserves, Wildlife

Corridors

etc. within 10 km

radius

Project falls within 5 km radius of Protected area of Jaikwadi Bird

Sanctuary, which is notified under the Wild Life (Protection) Act, 1972 (53

of 1972). Subsequently this area has been declared as Eco-Sensitive Zone

by MoEF&CC {As per Gazette Notification 2202 E, Dated 12th July

2017}. The distance of project from boundary of Jaikwadi Bird Sanctuary

is 4.46 Km in South West Direction.

7.

Reserved Forests

(RF)/Protected

Forests (PF)

No

8.

Water Body (within

10 km

radius)

No.


3.3. Study Period

Baseline environmental quality represents the background scenario of various environmental components. As

part of EIA study, baseline environmental monitoring was done over a radial distance of 10 km around the

project site during the period of the period of baseline study is from December 2020 to February 2021.


Page 110

3.4. Source of Environmental Data Generation

Baseline information on micrometeorology, ambient air quality, water quality, noise level, soil quality and

ecology (flora-fauna) are generated by J.V. Analytical Services, Pune. Apart from these, secondary data have

been collected from census book, revenue records, soil survey and forest department, meteorological

department etc. The generation of primary as well as collection of secondary data & information from the site

and surrounding was carried out during theperiod of December, 2020 to February, 2021.

3.5. Methodology

SOPL survey at project site and surrounding area was conducted and environmental samples collected were

analyzed for relevant parameters to arrive at the baseline environmental setting. Data from secondary sources

was also used to define environmental conditions. A study area of 10 km radius has been considered as per the

guidelines issued by the EAC for the collection of baseline data. The sampling locations were decided by

respective FAE’s in consultation with EC and secondary data was procured from various agencies. The

baseline monitoring for ambient air quality, water quality, soil quality and noise levels has been carried out by

J.V. Analytical Services, Pune recognized by MoEFCC, GOI, New Delhi, and ISO 9001:2008, OHSAS

18001: 2007 NABL Certified Company. NABL Certificate No.TC-7323, dtd. 24/11/2020 and MoEF&CC

Laboratory Certificate No. F. No. Q-150-15018/7/2014-CPW. Details are enclosed as Annexure II

To assess the Air environment in the study area, monitoring of the Air quality was done by setting up

reconnaissance. The samples were collected by installation of Respirable Dust Sampler (RDS) (with gaseous

attachment & FPS facility) at different locations for monitoring of primary air pollutants to work out the

existing status of air quality.

Ground water samples & surface water samples were analyzed for the parameters necessary to

determine water quality (based on IS: 10500-2012 criteria) and those which are relevant from the

point of view of environmental impacts of the project site.

Soil samples were collected using an Auger and analyzed for relevant physico-chemical

characteristics in order to assess the impact on soil.

The noise level monitoring was done at various locations at different intervals of time with the help

of sound level meter.

Socio-economic data was collected from field studies and secondary sources like Census of India

2011, Revenue record, etc.

3.5.1. Land Use of Study Area

The land-use & land cover map of the 10 km radial study area from the periphery of project site has been

prepared using Resource SAT-2 (IRS-P6), sensor-LISS-4 having 5.8 m spatial resolution and date of pass 30TH

Dec 2020 satellite image with reference to Google Earth data and the IRS-P5- Cartosat-I data having 2.5 m

spatial resolution and date of pass March 2016. In order to strengthen the baseline information on existing land

use pattern, the following data covering approx. the proposed project site as well as the 10 km radius from the

periphery of the project site i.e. 19° 38' 23.25"N to 19° 27' 27.21"N latitude and 75° 17' 22.61"E to 75° 28'

57.73"E longitude and elevation 358 to 453 meter are observed. The project is located in Survey of India topo

sheet no 47M/6 while 10 km radius study area covers two toposheets as 47M/6 and 47M/7.

The digital image processing was performed on ERDAS Imagine 2014 and QGIS 2.2 software system on high-

configured computer. This software package is a collection of image processing functions necessary for pre-

processing, rectification, band combination, filtering, statistics, classification, etc. Apart from contrast


Page 111

stretching, there are large numbers of image processing functions that can be performed on this station. Arc

GIS map 10.1 is used for final layout presentation.

Table 3-2 details of the used satellite details

Satellite/ Image Sensor Spatial resolution Date of Acquisition

Resource SAT-2 LISS-4 5.8 m 30TH Dec 2020

IRS-P-5 Cartosat-1 2.5 m March 2016

3.5.2. Land Environment

Since, a major part of 10km study area comprises of Water body, Agricultural Area and Open scrub thus study

on land environment of ecosystem play an imperative role in identifying susceptible issues and taking

appropriate action to uphold ecological equilibrium in the region. The main objective of this section is to

provide a baseline status of the study area covering 10 km radius around the project site so that temporal

changes due to the industrial activities on the surroundings can be assessed in future.

3.5.3. Methodology

The land use pattern of the study area was studied by analysing the available secondary data published in the

District Primary Census abstract of the year 2001 & 2011.

Salient features of the adopted methodology are given below:

1. Acquisition of satellite data

2. Preparation of base map from Survey of India topo sheets

3. Data analysis using visual interpretation techniques

4. Ground truth studies or field checks using GPS

5. Finalization of the map

6. Digitization using head up vectorisation method

7. Topology construction in GIS

8. Area calculation for statistics generation

9. Masking

Four spectral bands provide high degree of measurability through band combination including FCC

generation, bands rationing, classification etc. These features of the IRS data are particularity important for

better comprehension and delineation of the land use classes. Hence, LISS-4data and IRS-P5 – Cartosat-I data

having 2.5 m spatial resolution having pan chromatic imagery has been used for land use mapping.

The satellite data from the compact disc is loaded on the hard disk and by studying quick look (the sampled

image of the appropriate area ;) the sub-scene of the study area is extracted. Supervised classification using all

the spectral bands can separate fairly accurately, the different land use classes at level II on the basis of the

spectral responses, which involve the following three steps:

Acquisition of ground truth

Calculation of the statistics of training area

Classification using maximum likelihood algorithm


Page 112

The training areas for classification were homogeneous, well spread throughout the scene with bordering

pixels excluded in processing. Several training sets have been used through the scene for similar land use

classes. After evaluating the statistical parameters of training sets, the training areas were rectified by deleting

no congruous training sets and creating new ones.

3.5.4. Pre-Field Interpretation Of Satellite Data

The False Color Composite (FCC) of LISS-4 satellite imagery having 5.8 m spatial resolution satellite data at

1: 50,000 scales were used for pre-field interpretation work. Taking the help of topo sheets, geology, geo-

morphology and by using the image elements, the features were identified and delineated the boundaries

roughly. Each feature was identified on image by their image elements like tone, texture, color, shape, size,

pattern and association. A tentative legend in terms of land cover and land use was formulated. The sample

area for field check is selected covering all the physiographic, land use/land cover feature cum image

characteristics. Figure 3.1 shows the FCC of 10 KM radius of LISS-4Imagery.

False Colour Composite (FCC): It is an artificially generated colour image in which blue, green and red colours

are assigned to the wavelength regions to which they do not belong in nature. For example, in standard a False

Colour Composite blue is assigned to green radiations (0.5 to 0.6 μm), green is assigned to red radiations (0.6

to 0.7 μm and red is assigned to Near Infrared radiation (0.7 to 0.8 μm).

Figure 3-1 FCC of the 10 km radius with project location

3.6. Topography

The physical setting of study area shows a contrast of immense dimensions and reveals a variety of landscapes

influenced by climate, vegetation and economic use by man. Regionally, there is relatively less variation with

respect to relief features. The area shows a variation of approximately 20m-30m from North East to South


Page 113

West and approximately 30-50 m from North West to South East. The Surface elevation map of the study area

is shown in Figure 3.2 and Figure 3.3The Elevation from 358 m to 453m MSL are observed in the study area.

Figure 3-2 Elevation Profile of NW-SE Direction with in 10 km Radius

Figure 3-3 Elevation Profile of NE-SW Direction with in 10 km Radius

Figure 3-4Digital Elevation Model with in 10 km Radius

3.6.1. Land Use/Land Cover Classification

Total three major land use/land cover classes were demarcated in the study area following Level I classification

furthermore a level II classification also adopted as per the requirement of MoEF & CC in which total 10

classifications has been classified in the study area. A thematic map of 1:50,000 scale was generated

incorporating these classified categories considering the area of the project


Page 114

3.6.2. Core Land Use

The core land use Table 3.3 i.e. 1km radius from project site Land Use/Land Cover shown in Figure 3.5is

prepared separately. Of the 6 LU/LC classes as per NRSA-TR-LU & CD-01-90 Only 4 LU/LC classes are

present within 1Km radius core zone as Built-up land is 1.41 Km2: 44.90%, waste land i.e. open scrub

comprises of 0.66 Km2: 21.02% and agriculture land 1.07 Km2:34.08%. The area of the fourth class “Water

body” was found to be 0.001 Km2 (hence taken as ‘zero). The land use distribution is also depicted in Pie

Diagram Figure 3.6.

Table 3-3 LU/LC within 1 km radius

Level – I Level – II Level –III Area

(Km2)

Percentage

(%)

1. Built – up land 1.1 Built – up land 1.1.1 Urban (towns &

cities) 1.41 44.90

2. Agricultural land 1.1 Crop land

Double Cropped 2.1.1 Irrigated crop land 1.07 34.08

3. Wastelands 3.1 Land with or without scrub

& Barren Land 3.1.1 Open Scrub 0.66 21.02

4. Water bodies

4.1 River/stream 4.1.1River/stream

0 0 4.2 Lake /reservoir/tank/ canal

4.2.1 Lake

/reservoir/tank/ canal

Total Area 3.14 100


Page 115

Figure 3-5LU/LC Details of 1 KM Radius

Figure 3-6 Pie Chart of The Lu/Lc Classification Within 1 Km Radius

The 6 LU/LC classes as per NRSA-TR-LU & CD-01-90 the 10 Km radius study area has presence of mainly

4 LU/LC classes are shown in table and fig. The categories of general land use may vary from user to user.

Table No. 3.4represents six categories of land use and total area under it. The land use classes are ranging

from 314 (Km2). The presence of different land use is shown in Figure 3.7of the pie chart distribution.

1.41, 45%

0.65, 21%

1.07, 34%

AREA OF LU/LC CLASS PRESENT WITHIN 1 KM

Builtup Open scrub Agriculture


Page 116

Table 3-4LU/LC and its Coverage Within 10 KM Radius

Level – I Level – II Level –III Area

(Km2)

Percentage

(%)

1. Built – up land 1.1 Built – up land 1.1.1 Urban (towns &

cities) 34.78 11.08

2. Agricultural land 1.1 Crop land

Double Cropped 2.1.1 Irrigated crop land 134.12 42.71

3. Wastelands 3.1 Land with or without

scrub 3.1.1 Open Scrub 72.51 23.09

4. Water bodies

4.1 River/stream 4.1.1River/stream

72.58 23.12 4.2 Lake /reservoir/tank/

canal

4.2.1 Lake

/reservoir/tank/ canal

5. Forest - - 0 0

6. Other - - 0 0

Total Area 314 100


Page 117

Figure 3-7LU/LC Details of 10 KM Radius

Figure 3-8Pie Chart of the Lu/Lc Classification Within 10 KM Radius

Conclusion –

1. Agriculture land the highest category of land use covering as much as 42.71 % (134.12 Km2) of the total

area.

2. Water body is 23.12% (72.58Km2) followed by waste lands i.e. Open Scrub 23.09% (72.51 Km2).

3. The Built up land which is 11.08 % (34.78 Km2) of the area.

4. There are no regions which are classified under Forests and Others.

5. It is also observed that the study area is well connected to Paithan road which is passing within the 10 km

radius of the study area.

34.78, 11%

72.51, 23%

72.58, 23%

134.12, 43%

AREA OF LU/LC CLASS PRESENT WITHIN 10 KM

Builtup Open scrub Water Agriculture


Page 118

Drainage Map:

Drainage layer, which was generated after scanning the thematic manuscripts, was edited for line the errors.

Two different layers were made separately for line drainage. Drainage order was given to all the drain lines in

the layer ‘s. Strahler method of ordering was used for giving order to drainage. Whenever two drains of any

order joined the order of next drain was increase by one.

Figure 3-9Drainage Pattern Present in the Study Area Within 10 Km Radius

3.7. Meteorology

Meteorology is the key to understand the air quality. Wind fluctuations over a very wide range of time,

accomplish dispersion and strongly influence other processes associated with them. The micrometeorological

conditions at the project site will be regulating the transport and diffusion of air pollutants released into the

atmosphere.

3.7.1. Site specific micro-meteorological data

The data on surface meteorological parameters in the study area were collected from December, 2020 to

February, 2021, by setting up portable weather monitoring station placed at project site. The sensor of the

equipment was kept at sufficient height (about 10 m) from groundlevel with free exposure to the atmosphere.

The monitoring methodology is given in Table 3.3 & data collected are presented in Table 3.4. The following

parameters were recorded at hourly intervals during monitoring period:

Wind speed & Wind direction

Temperature

Relative humidity

Rainfall


Page 119

Frequency of Sampling

Details of frequency of environmental sampling considered for the study are illustrated in Table 3.5.

Table 3-5Frequency of Environmental Monitoring

Attributes Sampling

Locations Attributes

Sampling

Locations

A. Air Environment

Micro-

meteorological

Data

Nr. Project Site

Temperature, Relative

Humidity, Precipitation Wind

direction, Wind Speed

Hourly data for the

period 10th November

2019 to 10th January

2020

Ambient Air

Quality

8 numbers of locations in

the study area of 10 km

radius.

PM2.5, PM10, SO2, NOx,

CO, H2S, HCl, HBr, Cl2

NH3and Total VOC

24-hour basis, twice a

week during study

period

B. Noise

Ambient Noise

8 numbers of locations in

the study area of 10 km

radius.

Noise Levels in dB (A) Once in a study period

C. Water

Ground Water

Samples from 7 numbers

of locations within 10 km

radius from the project

site.

Physical, Chemical,

Microbiological and Heavy

Metal.

Once in Study Period

Surface Water




site.

Physical, Chemical,

Microbiological and Heavy

Metal.

Once in Study Period.

D. Soil Quality

Soil Quality




site.

Physical, Chemical

Characteristics, Soil Texture. Once in Study Period.

3.7.2. Windrose –

Wind rose is the diagrammatic representation of wind speed in a specified direction with its arms representing

sixteen directions, each arms give a clear frequency distribution of wind speed in a particular direction for a

given period of time. It is one of the most important meteorological

Parameters and governs dispersion, diffusion & transportation of pollutants. The % frequencies of wind in 16

directions have been computed from the recorded data during the study period for 24-hourly intervals to plot

wind rose. The predominant wind directions –NNE, NE, ENE, E; implying that winds come from these

directions for most of the time during the period.

Wind rose diagram is shown as Figure 3.10.


Page 120

Figure 3-10 Meteorological Data for the Monitoring Period

(December, 2020 to February, 2021)

3.8. Ambient Air Quality

3.8.1. Introduction

To quantify the impact of the proposed project on the ambient air quality, it is necessary to evaluate the existing

ambient air quality of the area. The ambient air quality monitoring with respect to the study area of 10 km

radius around the project site was done for the baseline information.


Page 121

3.8.2. Selection of Sampling Locations

Following points were considered during the selection of Ambient Air Quality Monitoring locations.

Topography/terrain of the study area

Regional synoptic scale climatologically norms,

Densely populated areas within the region,

Location of surrounding Industries,

Representation of regional background,

Facility for Ambient Air Monitoring,

Representation of valid cross – sectional distribution in downwind direction,

Avoidance of proximity of roads, construction activity or any other perturbing activity which may be

temporary in nature, which may lead to some erroneous conclusions.

Availability of manpower, electricity, approach, sturdy structure and protection of samplers.

Dominant Wind Direction.

3.8.3. Reconnaissance

To establish the baseline status around the project site of the study region, monitoring was conducted for 8

numbers of locations during December 2020 to February 2021. At the time of location selection previous

micrometeorological data was referred and general wind pattern in the study region was considered for the

selection of minimum one location in the downwind direction and one upwind direction. However, ambient

air monitoring locations were selected in all the directions looking towards the possibility of change in wind

pattern during the study period. Ambient Air Quality monitoring locations are presented in Table 3.7and

Figure No. 3.11.

3.8.4. Parameters, Frequency and monitoring Methodology

Ambient Air quality monitoring-

The existing ambient air quality, in terms of Particulate Matter-10 (PM10), Particulate Matter-2.5 (PM2.5),

Sulphur Dioxide (SO2), Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx), Carbon Monoxide (CO), Hydro Carbon & Volatile

Organic Compounds (VOCs) has been measured. It was ensured that, the equipment was placed at open space

free from any obstacles at a height of at least 3 to 4 m above the ground level at each monitoring station to

avoid the effects of wind-blown ground dust.

Monitoring has been carried out as per the latest CPCB & MoEF&CC guidelines and notifications. Details of

methodology are given below.


Page 122

Table 3-6Monitoring Methodology of Meteorological Data

Attributes Methods

Sampling/Preservation Analysis/data analysis

A. Air Environment

Micro-meteorological

Data

Data collected on hourly basis using

wind monitor as per CPCB Guideline.

as per IS 8829

IS 8829

Ambient air quality As per IS: 5182, CPCB & AWMA. IS:5182, CPCB & AWMA

B. Noise

Ambient Noise Instrument: Sound level meter Survey carried out as per CPCB

guideline.

C. Water

Ground Water,

Surface Water and

Marine Water

Standard Methods for Examination of

Water and Wastewater, 23rd edition,

APHA 2017

IS 3025 & Standard Methods for

Examination of Water and Wastewater,

23rd edition, APHA 2017

C. Soil Quality

Soil Quality

IS 2720, Soil Testing in India

(Department of Agriculture &

Cooperation).

IS 2720, Laboratory developed Method

as per NABL requirement and Book -

Soil Testing in India (Department of

Agriculture & Cooperation).

The duration of sampling of PM 2.5, PM10, SO2 & NOx was 24-hourly continuous sampling per day and CO,

HC & VOCs were sampled for 8-hours duration. The monitoring was done for twice a week for three months.

Parameters and frequency of sampling is given in Table 3.6.

Table 3-7Monitored Parameters and Frequency of Sampling


Page 123

Table 3-8Monitoring locations

Code Location name Distance from project site in

Km Latitude Longitude

A1 Project site 0 Km 19°32'55.55"N 75°23'8.80"E

A2 Near Yashwant Nagar 0.93 Km 19°32'51.49"N 75°22'40.52"E

A3 Near Pimpalwadi 1.94 Km 19°31'52.66"N 75°22'47.72"E

A4 Near Wahegaon 2.10 Km 19°33'36.31"N 75°23'49.52"E

A5 Near Iswardi 2.03 Km 19°33'51.99"N 75°22'31.04"E

A6 Near Pachalgaon 3.43 Km 19°33'19.69"N 75°25'29.00"E

A7 Near Jaikwadi Irrigation

Colony 3.15 Km 19°31'20.61"N 75°22'42.74"E

A8 Near Amrapur Waghundi 9.26 Km 19°33'32.29"N 75°17'51.45"E

Figure 3-11 Monitoring Locations for AAQM and Noise


Page 124

Table 3-9Monitoring Results and observations

Parameter Station

code

Name of the

location

Concentration

Minimum Maximum Average 98% percentile

Particulate

Matter (size

less than

10µm) or

(PM10,),

µg/m3 [100] *

24 Hours

A1 Project site 50.2 58.6 53.83 52.76

A2 Near Yashwant

Nagar 40.4 48.2 42.23 41.38

A3 Near Pimpalwadi 41.6 49.4 45.14 44.24

A4 Near Wahegaon 41.4 49.3 44.55 43.65

A5 Near Iswardi 40.8 47.3 44.54 43.65

A6 Near Pachalgaon 40.5 48.5 44.10 43.22

A7 Near Jaikwadi

Irrigation Colony 40.3 49.8 44.65 43.76

A8 Near Amrapur

Waghundi 42.4 48.6 44.91 44.01

Particulate

Matter (size

less than

2.5µm) or

(PM2.5),

µg/m3 [60]*

24 Hours

A1 Project site 13.7 19.4 16.12 15.79

A2 Near Yashwant

Nagar 12.1 18.8 16.94 16.60


A4 Near Wahegaon 12.2 19.6 16.06 15.74

A5 Near Iswardi 14.3 19.5 17.19 16.84


A7 Near Jaikwadi


A8 Near Amrapur

Waghundi 13.8 25.4 18.08 17.71

Sulphur

Dioxide (SO2),

µg/m3 [80]*

24 Hours

A1 Project site 13.9 17.3 15.70 15.39

A2 Near Yashwant

Nagar 13.0 16.8 14.71 14.42


A4 Near Wahegaon 13.1 17.7 15.76 15.45

A5 Near Iswardi 14.4 17.5 15.95 15.63


A7 Near Jaikwadi


A8 Near Amrapur

Waghundi 14.7 17.8 16.28 15.96

Nitrogen

Oxide (NOx),

µg/m3 [80]*

24 Hours

A1 Project site 20.5 26.2 23.72 23.24

A2 Near Yashwant

Nagar 17.6 24.3 21.38 20.96


A4 Near Wahegaon 17.8 25.7 22.08 21.64

A5 Near Iswardi 20.9 28.3 23.19 22.72


A7 Near Jaikwadi


A8 Near Amrapur

Waghundi 20.4 25.7 23.95 23.47

Carbon

monoxide

(CO), mg/m3

[80]* 8 Hours

A1 Project site 0.12 0.43 0.24 0.23

A2 Near Yashwant

Nagar 0.1 0.32 0.17 0.17



Page 125

A4 Near Wahegaon 0.11 0.41 0.22 0.22

A5 Near Iswardi 0.13 0.43 0.24 0.24


A7 Near Jaikwadi


A8 Near Amrapur

Waghundi 0.14 0.44 0.25 0.25

Hydrocarbon

(HC), µg/m3,

24 Hours

All results are BDL

VOC µg/m3,

24 Hours All results are BDL

3.8.5. Interpretation of result

Particulate Matter (PM2.5) - The average PM2.5concentration at all locations ranged between 25.4-12.1

μg/m3. The PM2.5 concentrations for all locations were observed within stipulated standards for NAAQS (24

hourly PM2.5 = 60 μg/m3).

Particulate Matter (PM10) - The average PM10 concentrations at all locations varied in the range of 58.6

g/m3 – 40.3 μg/m3. The highest concentration i.e. 58.6 μg/m3 is noticed at project site which is attributed to

windblown dust, vehicular movements etc. The PM10 concentrations for all locations were observed to be

below stipulated standards for NAAQS (24 hourly PM10 = 100 μg/m3)

Sulphur Dioxide (SO2) & Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx)- The average SO2 concentrations at all locations were

found 18.5 μg/m3-13.0 μg/m3 and the average concentration of NOx ranged between 28.3 μg/m3 -13.8 μg/m3.

The levels of gaseous pollutants were below the stipulated CPCB standards (24 hourly SO2 is 80μg/m3 and

for NOx is 80μg/m3).

Carbon Monoxide (CO) - The average CO concentrations at all locations were found 0.45 – 0.1 mg/m3.

In general, the ambient air quality is satisfactory with respect to all major pollutants. The 98th percentile values

of all pollutants were found to be below NAAQS. The other parameters such as Ammonia (NH3), Benzene,

Benzo-α-Pyrene (BAP), Ozone (O3), Lead (Pb) and Nickel (Ni) were found be to below respective detection

limits.

Hydrocarbon and VoC- All values of Hydrocarbon and VoC’s are within limit.

Conclusion: The ambient air quality in the study area & at project site is well within prescribed.

3.8.6. Noise Environment

Ambient noise level is the background sound pressure level at a given location. Examples of background noise

levels in environment are because of waves, traffic, alarms, people talking, bio acoustic noise form animals or

birds and mechanical noise from devices such as refrigerators or air conditioning, power supplies or motors

etc. and also vehicular traffic. The objective of monitoring background noise levels in study area is to establish

baseline noise level to identify impact due to proposed activity. Locations selected for Noise Sampling are

presented in Table No. 3.10.


Page 126

Table 3-10The Noise Level in study area

Location Project

site

Near

Yashw

ant

Nagar

Near

Pimpalw

adi

Near

Waheg

aon

Near

Iswa

rdi

Near

Pachalg

aon

Near

Jaikwa

di

Irrigat

ion

Colony

Near

AmrapurWag

hundi

Time N1 N2 N3 N4 N5 N6 N7 N8

6.00 54.2 44.1 42.2 47.9 45.7 44.5 45.3 43.8

7.00 56.6 46.3 44.3 46.3 46.7 44.5 49.2 44.7

8.00 56.7 53.1 48.7 48.6 48.7 44.2 52.3 46.2

9.00 62.8 53.6 51.1 57.8 54.6 54.1 52.6 50.8

10.00 63.7 52.7 50.8 53.2 54.1 53.6 51.1 52.6

11.00 64.5 51.5 52.6 52.6 52.3 54.0 53.0 51.4

12.00 63.4 50.3 51.4 52.1 50.9 52.4 51.3 50.2

13.00 61.0 51.6 50.1 52.8 51.6 53.6 50.6 52.1

14.00 61.3 51.2 52.5 53.1 50.5 52.8 51.3 52.8

15.00 62.4 50.1 51.2 52.9 52.7 52.1 50.0 51.3

16.00 60.5 54.6 52.6 54.7 52.2 53.8 53.3 50.1

17.00 58.2 53.3 50.2 53.4 51.0 54.3 54.2 51.6

18.00 57.9 53.1 47.1 53.3 51.2 52.4 53.1 50.1

19.00 55.1 51.3 46.6 51.1 52.4 51.2 54.6 52.7

20.00 55.6 50.2 46.9 45.7 49.1 46.8 53.7 44.1

21.00 54.6 47.9 45.8 43.4 46.5 45.6 51.4 43.8

22.00 53.8 45.2 44.9 42.1 50.2 43.1 48.0 41.1

Avg.-day

(dB(A)) 58.95 50.59 48.76 50.64 50.61 50.17 51.47 48.78

23.00 53.4 44.3 42.4 43.4 42.5 43.4 42.4 42.4

24.00 51.3 42.3 42.3 42.3 41.5 40.6 40.5 40.4

1.00 52.4 41.5 43.4 41.2 41.3 41.1 42.3 40.2

2.00 51.3 40.5 41.5 45.1 42.1 42.4 40.4 41.1

3.00 49.6 41.6 40.2 42.4 40.4 40.1 41.1 40.4

4.00 50.5 41.2 40.1 42.5 40.5 40.4 40.4 41.2

5.00 53.4 43.6 40.7 40.7 41.3 41.2 42.3 41.1

Avg.-Night

(dB(A)) 51.70 42.14 41.51 42.51 41.37 41.31 41.34 40.97

Observations: The noise quality was monitored at eight (8) locations in the study area during the study period.

The day time noise level at the project premises was observed to be 58.95 dB (A) Leq while during night time

the noise level was recorded to be 51.70 dB (A) Leq. It should be noted that the noise levels during the day

time as well as night time were observed to be within the prescribed standards by Central Pollution Control

Board.

Conclusion: The baseline monitoring of noise levels shows that, there is no disturbance due to noise in study

area.

3.9. Hydrogeology

The Godavari is the second largest basin and accounts for nearly 9.5% of the total geographical area of the

country. It extends over states of Maharashtra (48.7%), Andhra Pradesh (23.7%), Chhattisgarh (12.4%) and

Odisha (5.7%) in addition to smaller parts in Madhya Pradesh (7.8%), Karnataka (1.4%) and Union territory

of Puducherry (0.01%).


Page 127

The basin area extends over an area of 302065.10 Sq. km, with a maximum length and width of about 995 km

and 583 km, respectively. The Central Water Commission {CWC} reported area of the basin is 312812.0 Sq.

km. The basin falls in the Deccan Plateau lying between 73°24’ to 83°4’ east longitudes and 16°19’ to 22°34’

north latitudes. The basin is bounded on the north by the Mahadeo Hills, the Satmala Hills, on the north-west

by the Ajanta Range, on the west by the North Sahyadri range of the Western Ghats, on the east and south-

east by the Eastern Ghats and on the south by the Balaghat Range. The interior part of the basin lies in

Maharashtra Plateau, the greater part of which is at an elevation of 300-600 m sloping eastward. The eastern

part of the basin is majorly covered by the Dandakaranya Range with the Eastern Ghats forming the eastern

boundary of the peninsula.

The core components of the water network include the river Godavari, the largest of the peninsular river and

its principal tributaries finally draining into the Bay of Bengal. The river Godavari rises at an elevation of 1067

m in the Western Ghats near the Triambak hills in the Nasik district of Maharashtra.

The Godavari receives the waters from the Darna, the Pravara and the Manjra on its right bank whereas from

the Kadwa, the Purna, the Kaddam, the Pranhita, the Indravati and the Sabari on its left bank. The Godavari

basin receives major part of its rainfall during the south-west monsoon season. The delta of the Godavari is

gradually extending into the sea and consists of a wide belt of river borne alluvium. The salient features for

the basin are;


Page 128

Secondary Data Source: India-WRIS: Title –Godavari Basin

{http://india-wris.nrsc.gov.in/wrpinfo/index.php?title=Godavari#About_Godavari_Basin}


Page 129

3.10. Hydrogeology of District

The basaltic aquifers are regarded as anisotropic because of variability in type morphology and geohydrology

of flows; the presence of dykes, lava tubes and the unpredictable patterns of vascularity weathering and

jointing with respect to their extent and thickness, as also to the frequency and inter-connections of joints. A

wide variation in aquifer parameters such as storativity, specific gravity, transmissivity and specific yield of

the well can be attributed to such anisotropism.

The Aurangabad district area is included in Deccan Trap ground province comprising of hard rock formations.

Massive Trap does not possess any granular primary porosity hard compact nature have low primary porosity,

generally unproductive. However, the secondary porosity is developed due to weathering, jointing and

fracturing. The groundwater occurs in secondary porosity and the joints and fracture provided channels for the

groundwater movement and spaces for storages.

Ground Water Scenario:

The major part (95%) of the district constitutes a sequence of basaltic lava flows (Deccan Trap) while alluvium

occupies a small portion. There are two distinct hydrogeological units in the district i.e. fissured formations

(different units of basaltic lava flows) and porous formations (isolated patches of alluvial deposits). The

occurrence and movement of ground water is controlled by variation in water bearing properties of these

formations.

Hard Rock Areas: Deccan Trap Basalt

Deccan traps are a thick pile of basaltic flows, horizontally disposed and apparently more or less uniform in

composition. Each individual flow is a typical section, which varies from porous weathered base to a massive

middle unit, becoming increasingly vesicular towards the top. The ground water occurs under water table and

semi confined to confined conditions in Deccan Trap Basalt. The vesicular units in different trappean flows

range in thickness from 2-8 meters and have primary porosity. However, the nature and density of the vesicles,

their distribution, interconnection between the vesicles, depth of weathering and topography of the area are

the decisive factor for occurrence and movement of ground water in these units. Since the zeolitic units in

vesicular traps are highly susceptible to weathering, the vesicular units comprising weathered zeolitic traps

occurring in topographic lows are the main water bearing formation in hard rock terrain of the district.

In massive unit of Deccan Trap Basalt, ground water occurs in soil cum weathered mantle, joints, cracks and

other weaker zones. The upper portion of the massive traps show persistent spheroidal weathering and

exfoliation which helps in retaining more ground water in these rocks in comparison to compact massive unit.

The storage of ground water in compact massive unit totally depends upon the presence of joints and their

nature, distribution and interconnection. The average depth range of dug wells is 12.00 m to 15.00 m and that

of borewells is 50.00 to 60.00 m in hard rock areas, whereas the yield ranges from 0.60 to 3.10 lps.

Soft Rock Areas: Alluvium

The ground water in isolated alluvial pockets in the Godavari, Shivna, Purna and their tributaries occur under

both water table and semi-confined conditions. The exploration of shallow alluvial area reveals that the

saturated thickness of the alluvial material comprising silty clay, sand and gravel ranges from 1-7 meters. The

depth to basement ranges between 16.25 to 26.45 m bgl. The aquifer horizons were encountered as coarse sand

mixed with clay and silt between 15.00 and 26.00 m bgl, which constitute the potential aquifer in the area with


Page 130

discharge of up to 4.50 lps. The dugwells are generally down to 20 m depth and yields varying between 0.5

and 0.8 lps.

Groundwater Prospect Map:

National Remote Sensing Centre (NRSC), ISRO / Dept. of Space, Govt. of India prepared ground water

prospects maps (technically Hydro Geo Morphological-HGM maps) on 1:50,000 scale using remote sensing

and GIS technology. In the study area around 50% area having aquifer yield ranges from 100 -200 LPM with

moderate depth around 30-80 M. The area covers south and south-west part of the study area. On the other

area remaining part having aquifer yield range from above 800 LPM and 30 to 100 LPM with shallow to

moderate depth. Figure No. 3.12 showing groundwater prospect map around 10 Km. radius study area.

3.10.1. Geology

3.10.1.1. Regional Geology: Deccan Trap:

Deccan Trap basalts are heterogeneous known to be monotonously uniform volcanic rocks covering 90% part

of Aurangabad District. The lava responsible for their formation issued through long narrow fissures or cracks

in the earth’s crust.

The lavas spread out far and wide as nearly horizontal sheets forming piles of different types of basaltic flows.

Four major types of flows constitute the Deccan Trap;

1. Compact Basalts

2. Amygdaloidal Basalt

3. Vesicular Basalt

4. Tachylitic Basalt (Red bole)

3.10.1.2. Local Geology:

Aurangabad Quadrangle is bounded by latitudes 19o to 0o North, and longitudes 75o to 76o East, covering

parts of Ahmednagar, Aurangabad, Beed and Jalna district of Maharashtra. Physio graphically it forms part of

Upper Godavari Valley. It is drained by Godavari river flowing almost a straight ENE-WSW course, with

minor meanders. The entire area is occupied by sequence of basalt flows of Deccan Trap. The flows are typical

quartz normative tholeiites. Both Aa and compound Pahoehoe flows are seen. The Aa flows characterize

fragmentary top. It consists of fragment of basalt of various size and shape generally angular, few centimeters

to 0.5-meter size embedded in vesicular basaltic matrix. All the base of these flows are clinker pockets.

The compound Pohoehoe flows are characterized by the presence of basal zone of pipe vesicles, middle

massive part and top vesicular part with spherical vesicles. This character is repeated as a sequence within one

flow. They also show ropy surfaces, toe structure and squeeze ups.

Simple flows consist of lower massive part and vesicular top. Secondary minerals occur as amygdales and

consist of a variety of cryptocrystalline silica, quartz and zeolites. The flows are demarcated on the basis of

presence of red bole bed, vesicular tops or particular weathering pattern.

The entire basalt pile of above 800 m is classified into three formations. The total aggregate thickness of flows

may far exceed this, due to pinching of flows and uneven spread of flows. A very small outcrop of megacryst


Page 131

flow grouped under Lower Ratangarh Formation. The Upper Ratangarh Formation is an assemblage of

essentially compound Pahoehoe flows with a distinct marker flow M3 at the top. This marker flows with a

distinct marker flow M3 at the top. This marker flow is megacryst basalt with about 30 m thickness. The

phenocrysts of feldspar are 3 to 5 cm in length. The flows are moderately to highly porphiritic. The Upper

Ratangarh Formation occupies a large portion in the study area. It has a thickness of about 360 m. overlying

the Ratangarh Formation is the Indrayani Formation. Both Pahoehoe and Aa flows comprise this formation.

Total numbers of flows are 5 Pahoehoe and 17 Aa in study area. {Secondary Data Source: www.gsi.gov.in}.

3.10.1.3. Seismic Zoning of India:

Bureau of Indian Standards [IS-1893 – part – 1: 2002], based on various scientific inputs from a number of

agencies including earthquake data supplied by IMD, has grouped the country into four seismic zones viz.,

Zone-II, -III, -IV and -V. Of these, zone V is rated as the most seismically prone region, while zone II is the

least. The Modified Mercalli (MM) intensity, which measures the impact of the earthquakes on the surface of

the earth, broadly associated with various zones, is as follows:

Table 3-11 Seismic Zoning of India

Seismic Zone Intensity on MMI scale % of total area

II (Low intensity zone) VI (or less) 43%

III (Moderate intensity zone) VII 27%

IV (Severe intensity zone) VIII 18%

V (Very severe intensity zone) IX (and above) 12%

{Secondary Data Source: IMD: Title- Ministry of Earth Sciences: Open Source}

The study area falls in Zone III, this is moderate intensity zone (Figure No. 3.12).

Figure 3-12Seismic zone map of India

{Secondary Data Source: Wikipedia: Title Seismic Zone of India: Open Source

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Earthquake_zones_of_India}

3.11. Ground Water Sampling

Ground water samples were collected from different locations within the study area and the locations are

presented in Table No. 3.12.


Page 132

Table 3-12Monitoring locations for Ground water sampling

Sr.

No. Village Name

Type of

sample

Distance from project site

in Km Latitude Longitude

1. Wahegaon Well 2.16 Km 19°34'0.42"N 75°23'47.02"E

2. Dhangaon Well 3.80 km 19°34'53.21"N 75°22'30.73"E

3. Dhakephal Well 7.96 Km 19°34'46.45"N 75°18'14.14"E

4. Nanegaon Well 9.73 Km 19°33'36.31"N 75°23'49.52"E

5. Narayangaon Well 2.54 Km 19°32'13.51"N 75°24'26.62"E

6. Paithan

(MIDC) Well 2.0 Km 19°32'19.95"N 75°22'53.97"E

7. Dhorkin Well 6.08 Km 19°36'13.19"N 75°23'13.52"E

8. Rahatgaon Well 6.29 Km 19°31'23.75"N 75°26'26.30"E

Figure 3-13 Monitoring Locations for Ground water and Surface water sampling locations within 10

Km


Page 133

Table 3-13Ground water analysis report

Sr. No. Parameter Unit(s)

Location Limits as per

IS 10500:2012 Analysis Method GW1

Wahegaon

GW2

Dhangaon

GW3

Dhakephal

GW4

Nanegaon

1. Color Hazen Clear Clear Clear Clear 5.00 IS : 3025

(Part4):1983

2. Odor -- Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable IS : 3025

(Part5):1983,

3. pH -- 7.50 8.10 7.40 7.30 6.5-8.5 APHA 4500 H+,

A, 23rd Ed.2017

4. Conductivity µS/cm 1012.00 590.00 674.52 640.00 Not Specified IS 3025 (Part 14)

1984 (RA 2006)

5. TDS mg/lit 654.01 384.00 434.52 410.00 < 500.00 IS 3025 (Part 16):

6. Turbidity NTU 03.00 01.00 02.00 12.00 < 1.00 IS 3025 (Part 10):

1983

7. TSS mg/lit <5.00 <5.00 <5.00 <5 Not Specified IS: 3025 (Part-

17)-1984

8. COD mg/lit 10.00 <5.00 <5.00 <5.00 Not Specified IS:3025 (Part 58)-

2006 .

9. BOD mg/lit 3.00 <4.00 <4.00 <4.00 Not Specified IS:3025 (Part 44)-

1993,

10. Ammonical

Nitrogen mg/lit 0.54 0.34 0.36 0.34 < 0.50

APHA 4500 NH3

F

11. Nitrate as NO3 mg/lit 14.23 7.14 10.12 09.80 < 45.00 APHA 4500

NO3 – B

12. Nitrite as NO2 mg/lit BDL BDL BDL BDL Not Specified IS 3025 (Part 34)

1988,

13. Nitrogen as N mg/lit BDL BDL BDL BDL Not Specified APHA-4500

14. Phosphorous as

PO4 mg/lit 3.21 2.21 2.68 2.48 Not Specified APHA 4500 P-C

15. Potassium as K mg/lit 24.21 12.42 16.52 14.10 Not Specified APHA 3111 B

16. Sodium as Na mg/lit 34.52 21.54 28.70 22.40 Not Specified APHA 3111 B

17. Calcium as Ca mg/lit 84.56 44.03 54.60 51.24 < 75.00 IS 3025 (Part 40)

1991

18. Magnesium as

Mg mg/lit 35.42 12.40 16.52 15.64 < 30.00

IS 3025 (Part 46)

1994 (RA 2009)


Page 134



IS 10500:2012 Analysis Method GW1

Wahegaon

GW2

Dhangaon

GW3

Dhakephal

GW4

Nanegaon

19. Total Hardness as

CaCO3 mg/lit 321.21 142.36 184.00 174.56 < 200.00

IS 3025 (Part 21):

2009

20. Carbonates as

CO32-

mg/lit 74.56 56.34 64.37 61.80 Not Specified APHA 2320

21. Bicarbonates as

HCO3 mg/lit 54.60 42.60 48.72 44.52 Not Specified APHA 2320

22. Chlorides as Cl- mg/lit 236.94 48.90 78.90 72.40 < 250.00 IS 3025 (Part 32):

23. Sulphates as SO4 mg/lit 86.31 48.72 62.34 61.42 < 200.00 IS 3025 (Part-24):

24. Sulphide as H2S mg/lit BDL BDL BDL BDL < 0.05 APHA-4500-S2

25. Fluorides as F- mg/lit 0.23 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 < 1.00 APHA 4500-F- D

26. Iron as Fe mg/lit 0.64 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 < 0.30 APHA 3111 B

27. Aluminum as Al mg/lit BDL BDL BDL BDL <0.03 APHA 3111 B

28. Barium as Ba mg/lit BDL BDL BDL BDL <0.70 APHA 3111 B

29. Boron as B mg/lit <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 < 0.50 APHA 3111 B

30. Copper as Cu mg/lit <0.04 <0.04 <0.04 <0.04 < 0.05 APHA 3111 B

31. Selenium as Se mg/lit BDL BDL BDL BDL <0.01 APHA 3111 B

32. Zinc as Zn mg/lit <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <5.00 APHA 3111 B

33. Cadmium as Cd mg/lit BDL BDL BDL BDL <0.003 APHA 3111 B

34. Lead as Pb mg/lit BDL BDL BDL BDL <0.01 APHA 3111 B

35. Mercury as Hg mg/lit BDL BDL BDL BDL <0.001 APHA 3111 B

36. Nickel as Ni mg/lit BDL BDL BDL BDL < 0.02 APHA 3111 B

37. Arsenic as As mg/lit BDL BDL BDL BDL < 0.01 APHA 3111 B

38. Chromium as Cr mg/lit <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 < 0.05 APHA 3111 B

39. Total Coli form No./100ml <2 <2 <2 <2 Absent

IS: 1622

(Rev.1,R.A :

2014)

40. Fecal Coli form No./100ml <2 <2 <2 <2 Absent

IS: 1622

(Rev.1,R.A :

2014)


Page 135



IS

10500:2012

Analysis

Method GW5

Narayangaon

GW6

Paithan

(MIDC)

GW7

Dorkingaon

GW8

Rahatgaon

1. Color Hazen Clear Clear Clear Clear 5.00 IS : 3025

(Part4):1983


(Part5):1983,

3. pH -- 7.40 8.20 7.50 7.30 6.5-8.5 APHA 4500 H+,

A, 23rd Ed.2017


1984 (RA 2006)

5. TDS mg/lit 398.00 166.00 442.01 424.00 < 500.00 IS 3025 (Part

16):

6. Turbidity NTU 02.00 <1.00 01.00 11.00 < 1.00 IS 3025 (Part

10): 1983

7. TSS mg/lit <5.00 <5.00 <5.00 <5.00 Not Specified IS: 3025 (Part-

17)-1984

8. COD mg/lit <5.00 <5.00 <5.00 <5.00 Not Specified IS:3025 (Part

58)-2006 .

9. BOD 3 mg/lit <4.00 <4.00 <4.00 <4.00 Not Specified IS:3025 (Part

44)-1993,

10. Ammonical Nitrogen mg/lit 0.12 BDL 0.21 0.18 < 0.50 APHA 4500

NH3 F

11. Nitrate as NO3 mg/lit 8.69 1.64 10.26 09.36 < 45.00 APHA 4500

NO3 – B


1988,


14. Phosphorous as PO4 mg/lit 1.68 0.61 2.12 2.01 Not Specified APHA 4500 P-C




1991

18. Magnesium as Mg mg/lit 14.35 8.94 17.64 14.68 < 30.00 IS 3025 (Part 46)

1994 (RA 2009)


Page 136


CaCO3 mg/lit 168.00 112.00 188.00 170.14 < 200.00

IS 3025 (Part

21): 2009

20. Carbonates as CO32- mg/lit 56.82 26.40 66.98 61.84 Not Specified APHA 2320

21. Bicarbonates as HCO3 mg/lit 42.13 12.60 45.48 42.69 Not Specified APHA 2320

22. Chlorides as Cl- mg/lit 36.10 21.40 74.69 71.23 < 250.00 IS 3025 (Part

32):

23. Sulphates as SO4 mg/lit 28.90 16.90 54.92 51.23 < 200.00 IS 3025 (Part-

24):


25. Fluorides as F- mg/lit 0.12 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 < 1.00 APHA 4500-F-

D

26. Iron as Fe mg/lit <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 < 0.30 APHA 3111 B













39. Total Coli form No./100ml <2 <2 <2 <2 Absent

IS: 1622

(Rev.1,R.A :

2014)

40. Fecal Coli form No./100ml <2 <2 <2 <2 Absent

IS: 1622

(Rev.1,R.A :

2014)


Page 137

Observations: Ground Water samples were collected during month February 2021 for establishing baseline

of water quality within the 10 km radius for parameters like physical, chemical, biological & trace metals. The

sampling locations are listed in Table No. 3.5 and depicted in Figure No. 3.3. The results are presented in

Annexure. Parameters for analysis of water quality were selected based on the utility of the particular source

of water as per CPCB/ MoEFCC guidelines, hence quality of ground water was compared with IS:10500: 2012

for drinking purposes. Results indicate that the pH of all the ground water samples was withinthe prescribed

standards. The concentration of heavy metals like zinc was below detection limit. Iron was not detected in any

of the ground water samples. The hardness of all the ground water samples was found to be ranging between

112.0 mg/lit to 321.21 mg/lit. The value of hardness was within the acceptable limit at all the locations. It can

be observed that the values for total dissolved solids in all the sampling locations were estimated to be under

the acceptable standards for drinking water. The concentration of total dissolved solids ranged between 166.0

mg/lit to 654.01 mg/lit. The maximum concentration was observed at location Wahegaon. It should be noted

that the microbiological analysis of all the samples indicate that Total coliform and e-coli was absent in all the

ground water samples. Thus based on the above results it can be stated that the water from the said samples

can be considered fit for consumption and potable purpose with basic primary treatment. The water can be

used for domestic utilization and gardening without any treatment.

Analysis of collected samples reveals that rest of the parameters satisfy the permissible limits as per IS

10500:2012 (Annexure 3{VI}) specified for drinking water and hence the ground water is suitable for

drinking, however it is suggested that the water may be disinfected by suitable method before use for potable

purpose.

3.12. Surface Water Sampling

Surface water sample were collected from different locations within the study area and are presented

Table 3-14 Surface water locations

Sr. No. Location name Distance from project site in Km Latitude Longitude

SW1 Paithan Road 8.20 Km 19°30'53.68"N 75°22'38.19"E

SW2 North Jaikwadi Flyover 8.0 km 19°29'1.16"N 75°22'24.42"E

SW3 Amrapur 9.18 Km 19°32'25.00"N 75°18'13.41"E

SW4 wadavali 9.73 Km 19°27'36.13"N 75°25'59.26"E

SW5 Godavari River 9.26 Km 19°27'58.83"N 75°24'0.16"E

SW6 Paithan Left Bank Canal 3.65 Km 19°30'55.68"N 75°23'10.60"E

SW7 Shivbhadra River 4.43 Km 19°34'55.33"N 75°21'43.31"E


Page 138

Table 3-15Surface water analysis report


Location

Limits as per

IS

10500:2012

Analysis Method SW1

Paithan

Road Village

SW2

North

Jaikwadi

Flyover

SW3

Amrapur

SW4

Wadvali

1. Color Hazen Clear Clear Clear Clear 5.00 IS : 3025 (Part4):1983


(Part5):1983,

3. pH -- 7.80 8.20 7.70 7.60 6.5-8.5 APHA 4500 H+, A,

23rd Ed.2017


1984 (RA 2006)

5. TDS mg/lit 212.00 344.00 284.00 256.00 < 500.00 IS 3025 (Part 16):

6. Turbidity NTU 02.00 02.00 02.00 01.00 < 1.00 IS 3025 (Part 10):

1983

7. TSS mg/lit <5.00 <5.00 <5.00 <5.00 Not Specified IS: 3025 (Part-17)-

1984

8 D.O mg/lit 3.60 3.20 3.50 3.40 Not Specified IS:3025 (Part-38)-

1989

9. COD mg/lit 12.00 16.00 14.00 07.00 Not Specified IS:3025 (Part 58)-

2006 .

10. BOD 3 mg/lit 04.00 05.0 04.00 03.00 Not Specified IS:3025 (Part 44)-

1993,

11. Ammonical Nitrogen mg/lit 0.68 1.24 0.98 0.69 < 0.50 APHA 4500 NH3 F

12. Nitrate as NO3 mg/lit 14.60 16.98 12.34 8.46 < 45.00 APHA 4500 NO3 – B


1988,


15. Phosphorous as PO4 mg/lit BDL BDL BDL BDL Not Specified APHA 4500 P-C




1991

19. Magnesium as Mg mg/lit 10.65 16.98 12.54 11.84 < 30.00 IS 3025 (Part 46)

1994 (RA 2009)


Page 139


Location

Limits as per

IS

10500:2012

Analysis Method SW1

Paithan

Road Village

SW2

North

Jaikwadi

Flyover

SW3

Amrapur

SW4

Wadvali


CaCO3 mg/lit 98.95 136.90 112.36 1104.02 < 200.00

IS 3025 (Part 21):

2009

21. Carbonates as CO32- mg/lit 22.41 26.84 24.56 22.48 Not Specified APHA 2320

22. Bicarbonates as

HCO3 mg/lit 11.00 14.65 12.28 11.98 Not Specified APHA 2320

23. Chlorides as Cl- mg/lit 36.98 46.38 38.95 32.64 < 250.00 IS 3025 (Part 32):

24. Sulphates as SO4 mg/lit 25.64 32.54 28.46 21.45 < 200.00 IS 3025 (Part-24):


26. Fluorides as F- mg/lit <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 < 1.00 APHA 4500-F- D

27. Iron as Fe mg/lit <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 < 0.30 APHA 3111 B













40. Total Coli form No./100ml 24 26 14 11 Absent IS: 1622 (Rev.1,R.A :

2014)

41. Fecal Coli form No./100ml 06 07 04 04 Absent IS: 1622 (Rev.1,R.A :

2014)


Page 140


Location

Limits as per

IS 10500:2012 Analysis Method

SW5

Godavari

River

SW6

Paithan Left Bank

canal

SW7

Shivbhadra

River

1. Color Hazen Clear Clear Clear 5.00 IS : 3025 (Part4):1983

2. Odor -- Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable IS : 3025 (Part5):1983,

3. pH -- 7.60 7.70 7.40 6.5-8.5 APHA 4500 H+, A, 23rd

Ed.2017

4. Conductivity µS/cm 526.34 536.12 560.23 Not Specified IS 3025 (Part 14) 1984

(RA 2006)

5. TDS mg/lit 321.48 336.00 364.00 < 500.00 IS 3025 (Part 16):

6. Turbidity NTU 10.00 11.00 05.00 < 1.00 IS 3025 (Part 10): 1983

7. TSS mg/lit 78.00 84.00 24.00 Not Specified IS: 3025 (Part-17)-1984

8 D.O mg/lit 3.40 3.30 3.50 Not Specified IS:3025 (Part-38)-1989

9. COD mg/lit 10.00 12.00 14.00 Not Specified IS:3025 (Part 58)-2006 .

10. BOD 3 mg/lit 03.00 04.0 05.00 Not Specified IS:3025 (Part 44)-1993,

11. Ammonical Nitrogen mg/lit 0.74 1.02 0.84 < 0.50 APHA 4500 NH3 F

12. Nitrate as NO3 mg/lit 23.20 25.68 21.30 < 45.00 APHA 4500 NO3 – B

13. Nitrite as NO2 mg/lit BDL BDL BDL Not Specified IS 3025 (Part 34) 1988,

14. Nitrogen as N mg/lit BDL BDL BDL Not Specified APHA-4500

15. Phosphorous as PO4 mg/lit BDL BDL BDL Not Specified APHA 4500 P-C

16. Potassium as K mg/lit 11.36 16.90 12.63 Not Specified APHA 3111 B

17. Sodium as Na mg/lit 22.68 24.24 26.34 Not Specified APHA 3111 B

18. Calcium as Ca mg/lit 36.98 39.86 35.42 < 75.00 IS 3025 (Part 40) 1991

19. Magnesium as Mg mg/lit 12.40 14.51 12.26 < 30.00 IS 3025 (Part 46) 1994

(RA 2009)


CaCO3 mg/lit 154.68 162.34 148.98 < 200.00 IS 3025 (Part 21): 2009

21. Carbonates as CO32- mg/lit 26.98 28.94 22.48 Not Specified APHA 2320

22. Bicarbonates as

HCO3 mg/lit 16.82 18.94 14.68 Not Specified APHA 2320

23. Chlorides as Cl- mg/lit 42.16 45.6 49.63 < 250.00 IS 3025 (Part 32):

24. Sulphates as SO4 mg/lit 26.90 32.46 27.86 < 200.00 IS 3025 (Part-24):

25. Sulphide as H2S mg/lit BDL BDL BDL < 0.05 APHA-4500-S2

26. Fluorides as F- mg/lit 0.36 0.41 <0.01 < 1.00 APHA 4500-F- D

27. Iron as Fe mg/lit <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 < 0.30 APHA 3111 B


Page 141


Location

Limits as per

IS 10500:2012 Analysis Method

SW5

Godavari

River

SW6

Paithan Left Bank

canal

SW7

Shivbhadra

River

28. Aluminum as Al mg/lit BDL BDL BDL <0.03 APHA 3111 B

29. Barium as Ba mg/lit BDL BDL BDL <0.70 APHA 3111 B

30. Boron as B mg/lit <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 < 0.50 APHA 3111 B

31. Copper as Cu mg/lit <0.04 <0.04 <0.04 < 0.05 APHA 3111 B

32. Selenium as Se mg/lit BDL BDL BDL <0.01 APHA 3111 B

33. Zinc as Zn mg/lit <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <5.00 APHA 3111 B

34. Cadmium as Cd mg/lit BDL BDL BDL <0.003 APHA 3111 B

35. Lead as Pb mg/lit BDL BDL BDL <0.01 APHA 3111 B

36. Mercury as Hg mg/lit BDL BDL BDL <0.001 APHA 3111 B

37. Nickel as Ni mg/lit BDL BDL BDL < 0.02 APHA 3111 B

38. Arsenic as As mg/lit BDL BDL BDL < 0.01 APHA 3111 B

39. Chromium as Cr mg/lit <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 < 0.05 APHA 3111 B

40. Total Coli form No./100ml 28 30 21 Absent IS: 1622 (Rev.1,R.A :

2014)

41. Fecal Coli form No./100ml 07 09 06 Absent IS: 1622 (Rev.1,R.A :

2014)


Page 142

The values obtained are compared with the standards prescribed for the respective designated use of the water

body as categorized in the earlier part of the study. The analysis helps to concluded that the pH of all the

samples was found to vary between: 7.20 – 8.20. It should be noted that the values obtained were within the

desirable limit for pH as prescribed by CPCB. The total hardness was observed to be ranging between 1104.02

mg/l to 98.95 mg/lit. The maximum value of hardness was recorded at Wadawali and the minimum value was

recorded at Paithan Road village. The concentration of Total Dissolved Solids was estimated in the range of

212 mg/l to 364 mg/l. The maximum concentration of Total Dissolved Solids (TDS) was observed at

Shivbhadra River whereas the minimum TDS concentration was observed at Paithan Road Village. The

Chemical Oxygen Demand (COD) & Biochemical Oxygen Demand (BOD) values were calculated to be in

the range of 16 mg/lit. to 7 mg/lit. & 3 mg/lit.to 5.0 mg/lit. respectively.

The presence of heavy metals like, Zinc were found out be below the detection limit for all the water samples.

It should be noted that the iron content in all the samples of surface water bodies were below the detection

limit. Surface runoff from agricultural fields using the fertilizers can be the major source of nitrate.

Conclusion: The comparison of surface water results with IS 2296:1992 ,shows that the designated best use

of water falls under category A & B.


Page 143

3.13. Soil Environment

The soils in the 10 km radius of study area, keeping in view the topography are covered in total 9 sampling

locations [Figure No 3.14]. The soil samples were collected as per the standard procedure. The location

identification within project area is given in following Table No. 3.16;

Table 3-16Soil Sampling Locations

Sr. No. Location name Type of soil

Distance from

project site in

Km

Latitude Longitude

S1 Project site Clay 0 Km 19°32'55.55"N 75°23'8.80"E

S2 Near Yashwant

Nagar Clay 0.93 Km 19°32'51.49"N 75°22'40.52"E

S3 Near Pimpalwadi Clay 1.94 Km 19°31'52.66"N 75°22'47.72"E

S4 Near Wahegaon Clay 2.10 Km 19°33'36.31"N 75°23'49.52"E

S5 Near Iswardi Clay 2.03 Km 19°33'51.99"N 75°22'31.04"E

S6 Near Pachalgaon Clay 3.43 Km 19°33'19.69"N 75°25'29.00"E

S7 Near Jaikwadi

Irrigation Colony Clay 3.15 Km 19°31'20.61"N 75°22'42.74"E

S8 Near Amrapur

Waghundi Clay 9.26 Km 19°33'32.29"N 75°17'51.45"E

Figure 3-14 Soil sampling locations within 10 Km radius


Page 144

Table 3-17 Soil analysis report

Parameters unit

S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8

Project

site

Near

Yashwant

Nagar

Near

Pimpalwadi

Near

Wahegaon

Near

Iswardi

Near

Pachalgaon

Near

Jaikwadi

Irrigation

Colony

Near

Amrapur

Waghundi

Bulk Density gm/cm3 1.48 1.46 1.35 1.52 1.23 1.16 1.01 1.28

Porosity % 48.78 56.84 46.35 52.18 51.48 56.94 52.48 46.92

Water

Holding

Capacity

% 45.30 49.68 42.15 45.60 52.46 45.85 49.62 48.60

Permeability Cm/Hr. 0.51 0.42 0.48 0.58 0.78 0.31 0.41 0.36

Particle size distribution

Sand % 28.00 26.00 25.00 27.00 23.00 22.00 24.00 21.00

Clay % 56.00 59.00 57.00 56.00 60.00 58.00 58.00 63.00

Stilt % 16.00 15.00 18.00 17.00 17.00 20.00 18.00 16.00

Texture Class -- Clay Clay Clay Clay Clay Clay Clay Clay

pH (5%

Solution) -- 7.60 8.20 7.40 7.80 7.60 7.20 7.50 7.10

Electrical

Conductivity µS/cm 1480.68 1240.36 1026.32 1248.00 1124.92 1014.36 1285.46 1458.36

Cation

Exchange

Capacity

meq/100

gm 48.78 42.48 52.48 56.92 46.98 42.16 62.69 62.14

Potassium mg/Kg 212.4 226.80 198.74 210.49 162.48 148.70 187.46 221.48

Phosphorous mg/Kg 84.56 95.60 81.46 112.36 136.98 98.74 121.46 136.95

Available

Nitrogen mg/Kg 268.90 274.69 271.46 256.48 326.98 302.14 289.62 324.62

Total organic

matter mg/Kg 1.28 2.10 1.36 3.49 1.01 1.26 1.26 1.48

Iron as Fe mg/Kg 1.24 0.94 0.46 0.28 0.21 0.62 0.52 0.94

Zinc as Zn mg/Kg 2.68 1.29 2.18 1.68 2.58 3.68 1.46 1.36

Nickel as Ni mg/Kg 2.68 1.56 2.16 3.28 2.49 3.26 2.16 1.48


Page 145

Baseline status of Soil:

Physical Characteristics

Physical characteristics of soil samples are delineated through specific parameters, viz., particle size

distribution, texture, bulk density, porosity, water holding capacity, Moisture Content and Total Organic

Matter.

The particle size distribution in terms of percentage of sand, silt and clay is furnished in Table No. 3.17.

The predominant texture of soil is clay, followed by clay loam.

The bulk density of soils is in the range of 1.01 – 1.52 gm/cc, which, is considered as moderate. and

Total Organic Matter is in the range of 1.01 – 3.49 % which shows medium to high nutrient value of

the soil. Soil porosity is a measure of air-filled pore spaces and gives information about movement of

gases, inherent moisture, and development of root system and strength of soil. Variations in soil porosity

and water holding capacity are presented in Table No.3.17

3.14. Ecology & Biodiversity

Erratism in the species composition and functioning of ecosystem carried out by anthropogenic

activities. The first part to be affected directly as well as indirectly and in a short, medium- and long-

term span would be the biotic component of the area. The biological assessment is trustworthy and

acceptable method to understand the impact on surroundings. This leads to suggestion of remedial

measures for minimizing the anticipated impacts on the ecosystem and living things.

Forest and Forest type of study area:

Project site and surrounding area of site comes under southern dry mixed deciduous and southern thorn

forest types (Chmapion and Seth 1968). Mixed forest consisting of various varieties of species the

occurrence of which is considerably influenced by biotic interferences and management. Major tree

species occurring in the forest can be listed as Teak, Moi, Arjun, Bel, Babul, Khair, Palas, Parijatak etc.

Thorny scrub type which is more or less a regressed subtype where overwood has been completely

removed and due to excessive grazing only thorny species such as karwand, henkal, amoni, ghaneri,

etc., survive. Grass lands which are well protected commercial kurans used mainly for fodder grass

which is sold on cutting terms, the main species being sheda, marvel, kunda, paonya, rosha, kusali etc.

Biological environment of the area was studied during the study period. No endangered species have

been sighted in the area. No Wildlife Sanctuary, National Park, Biosphere Reserves, Wildlife Corridors

exists within study area of 10 km radius Except Jayakwadi Bird Sanctuary.

Flora and Fauna:

To conduct the study related to flora and fauna, the 10 km radius area was surveyed and the existing

flora and fauna were recorded. The information about flora and fauna were also obtained from local

people.

Flora:

Proposed project site: Acacia nilotica, Senna auriculata, Tephrosia purpurea these kinds of common

plants were observed at proposed plant site.Buffer zone (10 km from project boundary). The structure

and composition of vegetation in the buffer zone was studied by visual observations during the site visit.

The study area is dominated by agricultural fields. Most of the area is covered by active cropping

accompanying patches of barren land and grassland inbetween. The project is located in the area which


Page 146

is considered to be dry deciduous zone with geographically having no distinct variation. However, the

Jayakwadi Dam on the river Godavari is situated at to the south direction from the project site at about

7.6 Km. and presence of the surrounding region is rich in the bird diversity apart from the floral and

faunal diversity as compared to other part of the area.

The study area has dry and arid type of climate. Most of the area is covered by the agricultural fields

with natural vegetations in between. No reserved forest, National Park or any other ecologically

sensitive zone like Wild Life Sanctuary is recorded. However, Jayakwadi Birds sanctuary falls under

the study area. With regard to the tree vegetation is concerned Azadirachta indica, Acacia nilotica and

Prosopis Juliflora occur in abundance. Other dominant tree species exhibited by the region are Acacia

leucophlea, Albizia lebbeak, Mangifera indica, Senna siamea, Cassia fistula, Tamarindus indicus, Ficus

bengalensis, Ficus racemosa, Crocus nucifera, Bauhinia racemosa, Aegle marmelos, Ailanthus excelsa,

Annona squamosa, Bombax ceiba, Bougainvillea glabra, Butea monosperma, Dalbergia sissoo, Delonix

regia, Ficus racemosa, Ficus religiosa, Mangifera indica, Peltophorum pterocarpum, and many others.

Some of the plants introduced by human beings, agencies either as ornamentals, fruits, vegetable

sources or merely as the curiosities. Barren and grassy land show the occurrence of Justicia adathoda,

Calotropis procera, Agave americana, Euphorbia tirucali, Nerium pulchellum, Argemone mexicana,

Lantana camara, Gymnosporia montana, Ricinus communis, etc. grasses are found in abundance,

particularly during rainy season.

Notable aquatic plants observed during survey, of which, Ceratophyllum, Vallisnaria, Oetellia and

Ipomea carnea are dominant species. As these are weeds but they help to maintain aquatic ecosystem,

most of birds use these plants for feed as well as for shelter. Two aquatic pteridophytes also found

during survey, Azolla pinnata and Marsilea crenata among which Marsilea is more dominant in marshy

areas.

Table 3-18The list of plant species

Sr.

No. Scientific name

Common

Name Family Habit

1 Abrus precatorius L. Gunj Fabaceae Climber

2 Acacia concinna (Willd.) DC. Shikakai Fabaceae Climber

3 Cocculus hirsutus (L.) W.Theob. Vasanvel Menispermaceae Climber

4 Combretum indicum (L.) DeFilipps Madhumalati Combretaceae Climber

5 Cucumis prophetarum L. Wild kakadi Cucurbitaceae Climber

6 Cucumis sativus L. Wild kakadi Cucurbitaceae Climber

7 Ipomoea carnea Jacq. Besharam Convolvulaceae Climber

8 Luffa acutangula (L.) Roxb. Kadu ghosale Cucurbitaceae Climber

9 Mukia maderaspatana (L.) M.Roem. Bilavi Cucurbitaceae Climber

10 Pentalinon luteum (L.) B.F.Hansen

&Wunderlin

Yellow

alamanda Apocynaceae Climber

11 Tinospora sinensis (Lour.) Merr. Gulvel Rubiaceae Climber

12 Trichosanthes dioica Roxb. Padval Cucurbitaceae Climber

13 Mansoa alliacea (Lam.) A.H.Gentry Lasun vel Boraginaceae Climber

14 Achyranthes aspera L. Chirchita Amaranthaceae Herb

15 Aerva lanata (L.) Juss. Kapurmadhuri Amaranthaceae Herb

16 Agave americana L. Agave Asperagaceae Herb

17 Ageratum conyzoides (L.) L. Ghanera osadi Asteraceae Herb

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cucurbitaceae

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cucumis_sativus

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cucurbitaceae


Page 147

Sr.

No. Scientific name

Common

Name Family Habit

18 Aloe vera (L.) Burm.f. Korphad Xanthorrhoeaceae Herb

19 Alternanthera sessilis (L.) R.Br. ex DC. Kanchari Amaranthaceae Herb

20 Alternanthera ficoidea (L.) Sm. Kusal Amaranthaceae Herb

21 Amaranthus spinosus L. Katemath Amaranthacea Herb

22 Argemone mexicana L. Mexican poppy Papaveraceae Herb

23 Arundinella pumila (Hochst.) Steud. Grass Poaceae Herb

24 Asparagus racemosus Willd. Shatavari Asparagaceae Herb

25 Barleria cristata L. Koranti Acanthaceae Herb

26 Cynarospermum asperrimum (Nees)

Vollesen Dikna Acanthaceae Herb

27 Blumea lacera (Burm.f.) DC. Bamurda Asteraceae Herb

28 Boerhavia diffusa L. punarnava Nyctaginaceae Herb

29 Brassica rapa L. Mohari Brassicaceae Herb

30 Canna indica L. Karhdal Canaceae Herb

31 Senna tora (L.) Roxb. Vala Fabacea Herb

32 Senna auriculata (L.) Roxb. Tarvad Fabaceae Herb

33 Celosia argentea L. Kurdu Acanthacea herb

34 Chloris barbata Sw. Gondvel tan Poaceae Herb

35 Cleome viscosa L. Tilvan Capparaceae herb

36 Crotalaria juncea L. Dhakati ghagri Fabaceae Herb

37 Croton bonplandianus Baill. Ban Tulasi Euphorbiaceae Herb

38 Cyathocline purpurea (Buch.-Ham. ex

D.Don) Kuntze Galphule Asteraceae Herb

39 Cynodon dactylon (L.) Pers. Harali Poaceae Herb

40 Cyperus alternifolius L. Cyperaceae Herb

41 Dendrocalamus strictus (Roxb.) Nees Bamboo Poaceae Herb

42 Desmodium triflorum (L.) DC. Chipti Fabaceae Herb

43 Dichanthium annulatum (Forssk.) Stapf Grass Poaceae Herb

44 Dicliptera paniculata (Forssk.) I.Darbysh. Acanthaceae Herb

45 Dimeria Sp. Poaceae Herb

46 Echinochloa colona (L.) Link Poaceae herb

47 Eichhornia crassipes (Mart.) Solms Jalparni Hycianthaceae Herb

48 Emilia sonchifolia (L.) DC. ex DC. Sadamandee Asteraceae herb

49 Euphorbia hirta L. Dudhi Euphorbiaceae Herb

50 Euphorbia tirucalli L. Euphorbiaceae Herb

51 Flaveria trinervia (Spreng.) C.Mohr Asteraceae Herb

52 Hemidesmus indicus (L.) R. Br. ex

Schult. Karala Apocynaceae Herb

53 Heteropogon contortus (L.) P.Beauv. ex

Roem. & Schult. Grass Poaceae Herb

54 Hygrophila auriculata (Schumach.) Heine Ekhara Acanthaceae Herb

55 Imperata cylindrica (L.) Raeusch. Grass Poaceae Herb

56 Indigofera sp. Fabaceae Herb

57 Justicia procumbens L. Karambal Acanthaceae Herb


Page 148

Sr.

No. Scientific name

Common

Name Family Habit

58 Lepidagathis cristata Willd. Bhui gend Acanthaceae Herb

59 Ludwigia prostrata Roxb. Primerose Onagraceae Herb

60 Mimosa pudica L. Lajalu Momosaceae Herb

61 Ocimum gratissimum L. Van tulasi Lamiaceae Herb

62 Oxalis stricta L. Oxalis Oxalidaceae Herb

63 Parthenium hysterophorus L. Gajar grass Asteraeae Herb

64 Cenchrus ciliaris L. Buffle grass Poaceae Herb

65 Persicaria glabra (Willd.) M.Gómez Sheral Polygonaceae Herb

66 Phyllanthus niruri L. Bhui Awala euphorbiaceae Herb

67 Physalis peruviana L. Popati Solanaceae Herb

68 Portulaca oleracea L. Parslane Portulacaceae Herb

69 Melinis repens (Willd.) Zizka Grass Poaceae Herb

70 Saccharum spontaneum L. Wild sugarcane Poaceae Herb

71 Sida acuta Burm.f. Chikna Malvaceae Herb

72 Solanum americanum Mill. Wild bringle Solanaceae Herb

73 Solanum virginianum L. Wild bringle Solanaceae Herb

74 Spilanthes acmella (L.) L. Akkalkara Asteraceae Herb

75 Synedrella nodiflora (L.) Gaertn. Pig grass Asteraceae Herb

76 Tephrosia purpurea (L.) Pers. Unhali Fabaceae Herb

77 Tribulus terrestris L. Gokharu Boraginaceae Herb

78 Trichodesma indicum (L.) Lehm. Chota kalpa Boraginaceae Herb

79 Tridax procumbance Dagadful Asteraceae Herb

80 Triumfetta rhomboidea Jacq. Nichardi Tiliaceae Herb

81 Typha angustifolia L. Paankanis Typhaceae Herb

82 Urena lobata L. Van bhendi Malvaceae Herb

83 Zea mays L. Makka Poaceae Herb

84 Ceratophyllum demersum L. Ceratophyllaceae Herb

85 Vallisneria spiralis L. Tape grass Hydrocharitaceae Herb

86 Potamogeton indicus Roxb. Potamogetonaceae Herb

87 Azolla pinnata R. Brown Salvinaceae Herb

88 Marsilea crenata C. Presl Water clover Marsileaceae Herb

89 Abutilon indicum (L.) Sweet Petari Malvaceae Shrub

90 Bougainvillea spectabilis Willd. Boganvel Nyctaginaceae Shrub

91 Caesalpinia bonduc (L.) Roxb. Sagargota Caesalpinaceae shrub

92 Caesalpinia pulcherrima (L.) Sw. Shankhasur Caesalpinaceae shrub

93 Calotropis gigantea (L.) Dryand. Rui Asclepiadaceae Shrub

94 Calotropis procera (Aiton) Dryand. Mandera Asclepiadaceae Shrub

95 Calliandra haematocephala Hassk. Red powder

puff Fabaceae shrub

96 Chromolaena odorata (L.) R.M.King &

H.Rob. Eupatorium Asteraceae shrub

97 Duranta erectaL. Golden duranta verbenaceae Shrub

98 Euphorbia pulcherrima Willd. ex

Klotzsch Euphorbiaceae Shrub

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Duranta_erecta


Page 149

Sr.

No. Scientific name

Common

Name Family Habit

99 Hibiscus rosa-sinensis L. Jaswand Malvaceae Shrub

100 Hyptis suaveolens (L.) Poit. Darp Tulas Lamiaceae Shrub

101 Lantana camara L. Tantani Verbenaceae Shrub

102 Lawsonia inermis L. Mehandi Lythraceae Shrub

103 Nerium oleander L. Kanher Apocynaceae Shrub

104 Ricinus communis L. Arandi Euphorbiaceae Shrub

105 Tecoma stans (L.) Juss. ex Kunth Ghantiful Bignoniaceae Shrub

106 Vitex negundo L. Nirgudi Verbenaceae Shrub

107 Xanthium strumarium L. Ghagara Asteraceae Shrub

108 Acacia auriculiformis Benth. Australian

babul Fabaceae Tree

109 Acacia catechu (L.f.) Willd. Khair Fabaceae Tree

110 Acacia leucophloea (Roxb.) Willd. Pandhara khair Fabaceae Tree

111 Acacia nilotica (L.) Delile Babul Fabaceae Tree

112 Aegle marmelos (L.) Corrêa Bel Rutaceae Tree

113 Ailanthus excelsa Roxb. Maharukh Simaroubaceae Tree

114 Albizia lebbeck (L.) Benth. Shirish Mimosaceae Tree

115 Albizia procera (Roxb.) Benth. Safed Shirish Mimosaceae Tree

116 Alstonia scholaris (L.) R. Br. Saptparni Apocynaceae Tree

117 Annona reticulata L. Ramfal Annonaceae Tree

118 Annona squamosa L. Sitafal Annonaceae Tree

119 Neolamarckia cadamba (Roxb.) Bosser Kadamb Rubiaceae Tree

120 Azadirachta indica A.Juss. Neem Meliaceae Tree

121 Bauhinia purpurea L. Kanchan Fabaceae Tree

122 Bauhinia racemosa Lam. Apta Fabaceae Tree

123 Bombax ceiba L. Katesawar Bombacaceae Tree

124 Butea monosperma (Lam.) Taub. Palas Fabaceae Tree

125 Callistemon citrinus (Curtis) Skeels Bottle brush Myrtaceae Tree

126 Carica papaya L. Papaya Caricaceae Tree

127 Cassia fistula L. Bahava Fabacae Tree

128 Cassia javanica subsp. nodosa (Roxb.)

K.Larsen & S.S.Larsen Pink cassia Fabaceae Tree

129 Senna siamea (Lam.) H.S.Irwin &

Barneby Kashid Fabaceae Tree

130 Citrus limon (L.) Osbeck Lemon Rutaceae Tree

131 Cocos nucifera L. Naral Arecaceae Tree

132 Cordia dichotoma G.Forst. shelu Boraginaceae Tree

133 Dalbergia latifolia Roxb. Sisam Fabaceae Tree

134 Dalbergia sissoo DC. Sisoo Fabaceae Tree

135 Delonix regia (Hook.) Raf. Gulmohar Fabacea Tree

136 Eucalyptus tereticornis Sm. Nilgiri Myrtaceae Tree

137 Ficus amplissima Sm. Pimpran Moraceae Tree

138 Ficus benghalensis L. wad Moraceae Tree

139 Ficus racemose L. Umber Moraceae Tree


Page 150

Sr.

No. Scientific name

Common

Name Family Habit

140 Ficus religiose L. Pimpal Moraceae Tree

141 Gliricidia sepium (Jacq.) Walp. Undirmari Fabaceae Tree

142 Grewia tiliifolia Vahl Dhaman Tiliaceae Tree

143 Gymnosporia montana (Roth) Benth. Mountain spike Celastraceae Tree

144 Hardwickia binata Roxb. Ajan Fabaceae Tree

145 Justicia adhatoda L. Adulasa Acanthaceae Tree

146 Lagerstroemia speciosa (L.) Pers. Taman Lythraceae Tree

147 Lannea coromandelica (Houtt.) Merr. Moi Anacardiaceae Tree

148 Leucaena latisiliqua (L.) Gillis & Stearn Subabul Fabaceae Tree

149 Mangifera indica L. Amba Anacardiaceae Tree

150 Manilkara zapota (L.) P.Royen Chiku Sapotaceae Tree

151 Melia azedarach L. Bakan neem Meliaceae Tree

152 Millingtonia hortensis L.f Bhuchache zad Bigoniaceae Tree

153 Morinda citrifolia L. Bartondi Rubiaceae Tree

154 Muntingia calabura L. Singapore

cherry Muntinginaceae Tree

155 Musa paradisiaca L. Kel Musaceae Tree

156 Nyctanthes arbor-tristis L. Parijatak Oleaceae Tree

157 Peltophorum pterocarpum (DC.)

K.Heyne Tambat sheng Caesalpinaceae Tree

158 Phoenix sylvestris (L.) Roxb. Khajur Aracaceae Tree

159 Phyllanthus emblica L. Awala Euphorbiaceae Tree

160 Pithecellobium dulce (Roxb.) Benth. Vilayati chinch Fabaceae Tree

161 Plumeria alba L. Chafa Apocynaceae Tree

162 Polyalthia longifolia (Sonn.) Thwaites Ashok Annonaceae Tree

163 Pongamia pinnata (L.) Pierre Karanj Fabaceae Tree

164 Prosopis juliflora (Sw.) DC. Shami Fabaceae Tree

165 Psidium guajava L. Peru Myrtaceae Tree

166 Punica granatum L. Dalimb Lythraceae Tree

167 Santalum album L. Chandan Santalaceae Tree

168 Albizia saman (Jacq.) Merr. Rain tree Mimosaceae Tree

169 Spathodea campanulata P.Beauv. Pichakari Bignoniaceae Tree

170 Syzygium cumini (L.) Skeels Jambhul Myrtaceae Tree

171 Tamarindus indica L. Chinch Fabaceae Tree

172 Tectona grandis L.f. Teak verbenaceae Tree

173 Terminalia arjuna (Roxb. ex DC.) Wight

& Arn. Arjun Combretaceae Tree

174 Terminalia catappa L. Badam Combretaceae Tree

175 Thespesia populnea (L.) Sol. ex Corrêa Bhend Malvaceae Tree

176 Ziziphus jujuba Mill. Ber Rhamnaceae Tree

Based on field survey, total 69 Tree species, 19 Shrubs species and 75 Herbs and 13 Climber species

are identified in entire study area. No species found during field survey which comes under IUCN RET

categories.


Page 151

Cucumis prophetarum L. Trichodesma indicum (L.) Lehm.

Senna tora (L.) Roxb. Ziziphus jujuba Mill.

Croton bonplandianus Baill. Tephrosia purpurea (L.) Pers.

Figure 3-15 Photographs of floral species


Page 152

Fauna:

Faunal diversity studied during field visit and categorised as per the respective groups and occurrence

as well. Photographic evidences of same provided as per the requirement of project. Proposed project

site is open and only two butterflies and two odonates found during the survey. Spider webs also found

near project site but no without spiders. Jayakwadi dam is closer to proposed project site (Within 10

Km radius) and some flocks of migratory birds has been observed. Detailed faunal investigation with

checklist and photographs enlisted below,

Odonates:

Dragonflies and damselflies play key roles in both terrestrial and aquatic habitats. They are predators

as both nymphs and adults, feeding on a variety of prey including nuisance species such as mosquitoes

and biting flies. They can be indicators of different biotypes and habitats and have been used as tools

to assess the biological health of aquatic habitats and to detect levels of heavy metals such as mercury.

They are also considered model organisms to assess the effects of global climate change.


Page 153

Table 3-19 List of fauna

Sr. No Common Name Scientific Name

1 Ground Skimmer Diplacodes trivialis

2 Ditch Jewel Brachythemis contaminata

3 Crimson Marsh Glider Trithemis aurora

4 Black Marsh Trotter Tramea limbata

5 Crimson-tailed Marsh Hawk Orthetrum pruinosum

6 Senegal Golden Dartlet Ischnura senegalensis

7 Pygmy Dartlet Agriocnemis pygmaea

8 Saffron-faced Blue Dart Pseudagrion rubriceps

9 Grey Damselfly Pseudagrion hypermelas

10 Coromandel Marsh Dart Ceriagrion coromandelianum

5 dragonfly and 5 damselflies found during entire field visit and most of them near aquatic habitat

except ground skimmer which found on proposed project site.

Insects:

Beetles:

Beetles are important biological control agents of aphids and scale insects and useful as decomposers

and recyclers of organic nutrients also. Seven species of beetles found during faunal survey from 3

families of which Coccinellinae is more dominant family.

Table 3-20 Deatails of beetels

Sr No Scientific name Family

1. Altica sp. Chrysomelidae

2. Leaf beetle Chrysomelidae

3. Harmonia octomaculata Coccinellinae

4. Coccinella transversalis Coccinellinae

5. Hycleus polymorphus Meloidae

6. Psyllobora sp. Coccinellinae

7. Illeis sp. Coccinellinae


Page 154

Bugs:

Insects are crucial components of many ecosystems, where they perform many important functions.

They aerate the soil, pollinate blossoms, and control insect and plant pests. As decomposers, insects

help create top soil, the nutrient-rich layer of soil that helps plants grow. Without insects to help break

down and dispose of wastes, dead animals and plants would accumulate in our environment and it would

be messy indeed. Insects are underappreciated for their role in the food web. They are the sole food

source for many amphibians, reptiles, birds, and mammals. Seven bugs were recorded during survey.

Chrysocoris sp. also known as Jewel bug was most common insect found during survey especially on

weed Croton sp., which is host plant for this bug.

Table 3-21Dertails of Bugs

Sr. No Scientific name Family

1. Leptocorisa sp. Alydidae

2. Homoeocerus sp. Coreidae

3. Nezara viridula Pentatomidae

4. Riptortus sp Alydidae

5. Cofana sp. Cicadellidae

6. Scutellera sp. Scutelleridae

7. Chrysocoris sp. Scutelleridae

Butterflies:

Ecosystem value. Butterflies and moths are indicators of a healthy environment and healthy ecosystems.

They indicate a wide range of other invertebrates, which comprise over two-thirds of all species. These

collectively provide a wide range of environmental benefits, including pollination and natural pest

control. 21 species of butterflies found during the survey.

Table 3-22 Details of Butterflies

Sr. No Common name Scientific name Family

1. Blue pansy Précis orithyia Nymphalidae

2. Chocolate pancy Junonia iphita Nymphalidae

3. Common crow Euploea core Nymphalidae

4. Common Emigrant Catopsilia crocale Pieridae

5. Common four ring Ypthima huebneri Nymphalidae

6. Common grass yellow Eurema hecade Pieridae

7. Common leopard Phalanta phalantha Nymphalidae

8. Common rose Pachliopta aristolochiae Papilionidae

9. Common sailor Neptis hylas Nymphalidae

10. Common sergeant Athyma perius Nymphalidae

11. Danaid eggfly Hypolimnas misippus Nymphalidae

12. Glassy Tiger Parantica aglea Nymphalidae

13. Grey pancy Junonia atlites Nymphalidae

14. Indian jezebel Delias eucharis Pieridae

15. Orange tip Colotis etrida Pieridae

16. Towny coster Acraea terpsicore Nymphalidae

17. Striped pierrot Tarucus nara Lycaenidae

18. Pea blue Lampides boeticus Lycaenidae

19. Peacock pansy Précis almanac Nymphalidae

20. Plain tiger Danaus chrysippus Danaidae

21. Striped Tiger Danaus genutia Nymphalidae


Page 155

Pea Blue Striped Perriot

Blue Ground Skimmer Chrysocoris sp.

Figure 3-16 Photographs of Butterflies


Page 156

Mammals:

Faunal assessment provides a basis for determining relative abundance and rarity of each species which

is important for assessing the diversity of fauna of a area. Since animals are capable of movements from

one place to another, this makes their study entirely different. Different animals prefer different types

of habitat for food and shelter. There was no major physical sighting of large mammals during

biodiversity study other than domestic mammals’ viz., cow, buffalo, cat, stray dogs, goat etc. During

the field studies some tracks and signs Indian Hare (Lepus nigricollis) and domesticated animals were

observed in the study area.

Table 3-23Details of Mammals


Palm Squirrel Funambulus pennanti Sciuridae

Mongoose Herpestes edwardsii Herpestidae

Indian Hare Lepus nigricollis Leporidae

Common House Rattus rattus Muridae

Avifauna:

As with other native organisms, birds help maintain sustainable population levels of their prey and

predator species and, after death, provide food for scavengers and decomposers. Many birds are

important in plant reproduction through their services as pollinators or seed dispersers. During overall

survey in the study area, a total of 53 bird species belonging to 30 families were recorded in the study

area. The bird species were mostly observed around Jayakwadi dam, agriculture fields and human

habitation.

Table 3-24 Details of Avifauna


1 Black Kite Elanus caeruleus Accipitridae

2 Marsh Harrier Circus aeruginosus Accipitridae

3 Black winged kite Elanus caeruleus Accipitridae

4 Small blue kingfisher Alcedo athhis Alcedinidae

5 White throated kingfisher Halcyon smyrnensis Alcedinidae

6 Eurasian Teal Anas crecca Anatidae

7 Ruddy Shelduck Tadorna ferruginea Anatidae

8 Cattle egret Bubulcus ibis Ardeidae

9 Grey heron Ardea cinerea Ardeidae

10 Pond heron Ardeola grayii Ardeidae

11 Large Egret Casmoerodius albus Ardeidae

12 Little ringed plover Charadrius dubius Charadiriidae

13 Red wattled lapwing Vanellus indicus Charadriidae

14 Asian openbill Anastomus oscitans Ciconiidae

15 Wooly necked stork Ciconia episcopus Ciconiidae

16 Blue Rock Pigeon Columba livia Columbidae

17 Dove Streptopelia sengalensis Columbidae

18 House Crow Corvus splendens Corvidae

19 Jungle crow Corvus macrorhynchos Corvidae

20 Crow Pheasant Centropus sinensis Cuculidae

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Sciuridae

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Herpestidae

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Leporidae

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Muridae


Page 157

21 Indian Cuckoo Cuclus micropterus Cuculidae

22 Koel Eudynamys scolopacae Cuculidae

23 Black drongo Dicrurus macrocercus Dicruridae.

24 Barn swallow Hirundo rustica Hirundinidae

25 Wire tailed swallow Hirundo smithii Hirundinidae

26 Long tailed shrike Lanius schach Laniidae

27 Common tern Sterna hirundo Laridae

28 Green Bee Eater Merops Orientalis Meropidae

29 Citrine wagtail Motacilla citreola Motacillidae

30 White browed wagtail Motacilla maderaspatensis Motacillidae

31 Yellow wagtail Motacilla flava Motacillidae

32 Pied bushchat Saxicola caprata Muscicapidae

33 Purple Sunbrid Nectarinia asiatica Nectariniidae

34 House Sparrow Passer domesticus Passerinae

35 Rose – ringed Parakeet Pesitacula Kramri Pesittacidae

36 Little cormorant Microcarbo niger Phalacrocoracidae

37 Greater Flamingo Phoenicopterus roseus Phoenicopteridae

38 Baya weaver Ploceus philippinus Ploceidae

39 Red – vented Bulbul Pycononotus cafer Pycononotidae

40 Purple swamphen Porphyrio porphyria Rallidae

41 Black winged stilt Himantopus himantopus Recurvirostridae

42 Black tailed Godwit Limosa limosa Scolopacidae

43 Wood Sandpiper Tringa glareola Scolopacidae

44 Brahminy Starling Sturnus Pagodarum Sturnidae

45 Common Myna Acridotheres tristis Sturnidae

46 Black Ibis Pseudibis papillosa Threskiornithidae

47 Glossy ibis Plegadis falcinellus Threskiornithidae

48 Jungle babbler Turdoides striatus Timaliinae

49 Hoopoe Upupa epops Upupidae

Green Bee Eater Purple sunbird


Page 158

Yellow Wagtail Grey Wagtail

Egret Pond Heron

Eurasian spoonbill Openbilled stork and Cormorant


Page 159

Glossy Ibis OpenBill Stork and White Ibis

SpotBill Ducks Grey Heron

Eurasian teal Black Winged Stilt

Whiskersed Tern Greater Flamingoes


Page 160

Figure 3-17 Photographs of Avifauna

3.15. Socioeconomic Study

The socio-economic survey was conducted on January 2021. The objectives of the study were as under.

1. To collect socio-economic and demographic details of study area by adopting the methods of filling

field data Sheet, Survey Format, Participatory Rural Appraisal (PRA) and Rapid Rural Appraisal

(RRA).

2. To identify the impacts of the project on community as a whole.

3. To assess the environmental impact, Socio-economic information, communities livelihood, social

needs, agriculture information, cropping pattern survey and action plan to address the expressed needs

by communities.

• Methodology & Data Collection

Social survey, field data sheet and RRA were conducted on 8th October, 2018 to 10th December, 2018

for 21 villages within 10 km radius of the project. In order to collect the information of the desired

objective it is necessary to collect the authenticate information about the village and personal interaction

with people. Hence, village visits, field data sheet and survey forms, Van Diagram, using RRA, PRA

methods were used to obtain the baseline information of the area. The selected villages within 10 km

radius of the project site have near to similar characteristics. The published information, data collected

through Govt. Offices, Grampanchayat, and Census of India 2011 is used as the basis of the survey.

1] Venn/ Chapati Diagram: This shows relationships of various institutions, organizations, programs

with each other and with the villages as perceived by the villagers. The exercise is carried out with

theuse of different sizes of circles and colors papers which indicate the relative importance or

unimportance of a particular institution to that particular village.

2] Participatory Rural Appraisal (PRA) and Rapid Rural Appraisal (RRA): Social survey and

RRA is the methods to collect the factual information by involving the community. People’s

Participation in the development process has been now recognized as most critical input for any

programme to be successful. People Participation at all the levels of project cycle (i.e. Planning, action

plan, implementation, monitoring and evaluation) develops a sense of ownership among them, which

facilitates their involvement in planning, implementation and Public hearing and even in monitoring.

Participatory Rural Appraisal (PRA) thus, includes participatory approaches and methods

thatemphasize on villagers, farmers making their own appraisal and analysis. The purpose of PRA is to

enable development practitioners, government officials, Gram-panchayats, local farmers, villagers,


Page 161

women’s to work together to plan appropriate programs in tune with their “felt needs” and aspirations.

Implementation, monitoring and evaluation) develops a sense of ownership among them, which

facilitates their involvement in planning, implementation and Public hearing and even in monitoring.

Participatory Rural Appraisal (PRA) thus, includes participatory approaches and methods that

emphasize on villagers, farmers making their own appraisal and analysis. The purpose of PRA is to

enable development practitioners, government officials, Gram-panchayats, local farmers, villagers,

women’s to work together to plan appropriate programs in tune with their “felt needs” and aspirations.

3] Primary data: Primary data was collected from the villages through Schools, Grampanchayat office,

Anganwadi centers, Talathi Office, villagers, farmers, SHGs, Youths as per the availability.

4] Secondary data: For secondary data Census abstract of 2011, Government of India has been used.

All the basic information as per the field data sheet of population statistics, water resources was

collected from secondary data sources like census 2011.

5] Baseline Socio-economic survey and Sampling: Basic information is required for planning of the

project which depends upon the demographic parameters of the project area population. This includes

total population, their livelihood, and total no. of households, socio-economic information, cropping

pattern, health, sanitation, village level infrastructure, community based organizations etc. Similarly,

and equally important is the data related to the occupational pattern of the population and relative size

of each occupational group.

Table 3-25Villages Identified for Socioeconomic Survey of Study Area

Sr. No. Village Distance from project site in Km

1 Dhorkin 6.2

2 Isarwadi 1.7

3 Mudhalwadi 1.5

4 Narayangaon 1.6

5 Katpur 2.5

6 Pimpalwadi 2.1

7 Wadala 3.5

8 Wawa 4.0

9 Paithan 6.5

10 Amrpur 9.3

11 Borgaon 5.2

12 Dhakephal 9.2

13 Rahatgaon 4.7

14 Kasarpadali 5.8


Page 162

Profile at a glance: Detailed Socio economic profile of District Aurangabad, Taluka Paithan & Project

site is presented in Table 3.26

Table 3-26Socio economic Profile of District, Taluka& Project site at a Glance

Table 3-27 Details of Socio-economic Indicator


Page 163

Table 3-28Details on Population of District Aurangabad

The Description Profile of Rural & Urban Area Population of District Aurangabad in study area is

presented in Table 3.28.


Page 164

Table 3-29Comparison between Rural and Urabn Area

Aurangabad

The Aurangabad city was a major silk and cotton textile production center. A fine blend of silk with

locally grown cotton was developed as Himroo textile. Much of the silk industry has vanished over

time, but some manufacturers have managed to keep the tradition alive. Paithani silk saris are also made

in Aurangabad. The name of this cloth is derived from Paithan town. In 1889 a cotton-spinning and

weaving mill was erected in Aurangabad city, which employed 700 people. With the opening of the


Page 165

Hyderabad-Godavari Valley Railways in the year 1900 several ginning factories were started. In the

Jalna alone there were 9 cotton-ginning factories and 5 cotton-presses, besides two ginning factories at

Aurangabad and Kannad, and one oil- press at Aurangabad. The total number of people employed in

the cotton-presses and ginning factories in the year 1901 was 1,016. Until 1960,

Aurangabad languished as a city, remaining industrially backward. In 1960, the region of Marathwada

was merged with Maharashtra.

The industrial development of the Marathwada region began, propelled through designated backward

area benefits. Growth began when the Maharashtra Industrial Development Corporation (MIDC) began

acquiring land and setting up industrial estates. Aurangabad is a now classic example of efforts of a

state government towards the balanced industrialization of the state. Major Industrial areas of

Aurangabad are Chikhalthana MIDC, Shendra MIDC, Waluj MIDC, Paithan MIDC and Aurangabad

MIDC.

GDP ($US): 840 million.

Conclusion: Social, cultural and economic aspects in the surrounding region due to proposed project is

expected to contribute towards change in the quality of life of local people. The proposed project will

help in improving socio – economic status of surrounding area as there will be direct employment

generation for 60 people. Preference shall be given to local people at the time of man power recruitment.

Communication with local community will be institutionalized & done on regular basis by the project

authorities.


Page 166

4. ANTICIPATED ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS AND MITIGATION

MEASURES

4.1. Introduction

The chapter aims at controlling pollution at the source level to the extent possible with the available and

affordable technology followed by treatment measures before they are discharged. The proposed project

would create impact on the environment in two distinct phases:

During the construction phase which may be regarded as temporary or short term;

During the operation phase which would have long term effects.

The construction and operational phase of the proposed project comprises various activities each of

which will have an impact on some or other environmental parameters. Various impacts during the

construction and operation phase on the environmental parameters have been studied and mitigation

measures for the same are discussed briefly below and elaborated in the subsequent sections.

Anticipated environmental impacts due to the expansion project/ production has been evaluated for

significance and based on corresponding likely impacts VEC‟s (Valued environmental components)

has been identified and mitigation measures has been incorporated

4.2. Construction Phase

Impact assessment during the construction phase of the project is of importance as the construction

activities lead to adverse effects on the environment on a short term basis. The major activities that are

undertaken during this phase are civil works, mechanical works, machinery works and transportation

works.

During the construction phase, the following activities among many are considered to be important

towards creating environmental impacts:

1. Site preparation (fencing, boundary & clearing of site)

2. Excavation, backfilling and levelling

3. Hauling and dumping of earth materials & construction spoils

4. Foundation works

5. Fabrication erection of Steel structures such as, Tanks, Pipelines and Sheds

6. Construction of internal roads, drains & water supply

7. Painting and finishing

8. Cleaning, landscaping and plantations

4.2.1. Land Environment Impacts

The activities carried out during the construction phase will involve a change in the land use from vacant

industrial land to a built up industrial land, which will pose the following impacts on the land

environment.

1. Compaction of soil and a change in the soil structure due to the use of heavy construction vehicles

and machineries.


Page 167

2. Removal of soil from the site.

3. Mixing of the topsoil and subsoil.

4. Dispersion of dust.

Mitigation measures

1. Employing techniques such as restricting access during wet conditions, using protective boarding

and low ground pressure machineries to minimize compaction of soil.

2. The removed soil will be properly stored for subsequent reinstatement.

3. Reuse of excess excavated material for road development, green belt development and landscaping.

4. A well designed closed depository for storage of construction materials to prevent land/soil

pollution.

5. Effective stabilization of altered landforms to minimize soil erosion and the potential for water

pollution (e.g. Vegetation).

6. Reuse of construction wastes such as sand, brick, gravel, cement for developing internal road and

project structures.

4.2.2. Air Environment

Impacts

The activities that might lead to a decline in the local air quality due to generation of dust are;

1. Site Preparation-fencing, boundary and clearing of site will cause disturbance to the surroundings.

2. Excavation, backfilling and levelling.

3. Hauling and dumping of earth materials and construction spoils.

4. Foundation works can cause dust generation which will decrease the air quality and it can impact the

labours working.

5. Fabrication, erection of steel structures such as tanks, pipelines and sheds.

6. Construction of internal roads drains and water supply.

7. Cleaning and landscaping.

8. Emission from Construction DG & Construction Equipment’s.

Mitigation measures

1. Barricading the construction area and minimizing exposed areas to reduce dust generation.

2. Areas generating dust during dry weather will be sprayed with water.

3. Conserving the existing vegetation screens to act as a barrier to dust.

4. Appropriate enclosed areas for storage of construction materials.

5. Facilitating the workers with the required personal protective equipment’s.

6. Efficient usage and maintenance of equipment’s/machineries to lower air emissions, noise pollution

and consumption of energy resource.


Page 168

7. Exhaust vent of DG set will be provided with adequate stack height to ensure quick dispersal of

gaseous emissions.

8. Periodic monitoring and maintenance of transport vehicles to check on the quality of emission to be

within permissible limits and consumption of fuel

9. Regular inspection of construction site to ensure timely removal and disposal of construction debris

to the dumping sites or for recycle/reuse.

4.2.3. Water Environment

Impacts

1. Contamination of watercourses by leakage from fuel and materials storage areas.

2. Oil and suspended solids in run-off from vehicles and access roads.

3. Use of heavy machineries and vehicles causes compaction of topsoil due to which a change in the

surface water drainage pattern may occur.

4. Generation of sewage.

Mitigation measures

1. The water demand during the construction phase will be met from the private water suppliers (or)

existing bore well

2. Impenetrable lining will be provided to storage premises to avoid accidental mixing or fugitive losses.

3. Storehouse will be located at a distance away from the water storage area to prevent accidental release

or spillage.

4. Proper management of rain water run-off during monsoon and creating bunds to utilize the rain water

for construction purpose.

5. An appropriate water management system will be implemented.

Wastewater Management:

Domestic:

Sewage generated from construction activities will be collected in Septic Tank.


Impacts

1. The major sources of noise generation at the construction site are pneumatic hammers, DG sets,

compressors, concrete mixers, operating machineries, horns & acoustic signals and communication

among workers.

2. Noise nuisance causes discomfort and health related issues in those who work at the site and those

who reside in the neighboring villages.

Mitigation measures

1. Barricading the construction site.

2. The green belt will help in reducing the noise nuisance.

3. Selection of equipment’s of high quality.


Page 169

4. Proper planning and organizing of construction activities which will help in avoiding loud verbal

exchanges between the intervening parties.

5. Transportation activities will be carried out only during the day and only in case of emergency, the

transportation activities will be permitted in night time

6. The vehicles used for construction activities and transportation of materials will be provided with

the horn of low noise level as recommended by RTO/ concerned authorities.

7. Minimization of operation time of noisy equipment and operation of machineries/equipment that

generate high levels of noise only during day time.

8. Inadequate use of plant and equipment, namely, running on full power when the work does not

necessitate it will be avoided.

9. Personal protective equipment’s, education and public awareness and exposure control through

rotation of work will be provided to the workers engaged in construction activities in the area generating

high levels of noise.

4.2.5. Waste Generation

Sources of waste are construction debris such as bricks, steel scrap, wooden scrap, sand and gravel etc.

Mitigation measures

1. Prior to commencement of construction works, assessment of materials required, location and

planning of available space for its storage will be conducted.

2. Quality control will be implemented to reject defective materials at the time of delivery thus avoiding

later disposal.

3. Stockpiles of sand, gravel, soil will be situated in such a manner that they do not spill or washed onto

the adjacent roads.

4. Materials that come in will be labelled and the date of receiving will be recorded.

5. Preparation of a proper waste management system which includes identification of wastes, collection,

segregation, storage and disposal methods.

6. Recycling and reuse of certain construction debris.

7. Spent oils and other lubricants from equipment will be collected in enclosed containers before

disposing it to approved recyclers.

4.2.6. Ecology

The proposed facility is situated in industrial area; hence no impacts have been expected to arise on the

biological environment. Except for the removal of weeds, the ecological status of the site will be well

maintained by conserving/developing the greenbelt at the site.

4.2.7. Social Environment

The impacts of construction activities are beneficial on the social environment as it contributes to the

economic and social development by providing employment to about 10 workers during the

construction phase and thereby raising the standards of living and quality of life. Procurement of

construction materials locally leads to increase in trading opportunities.


Page 170

4.3. Operation phase

From an environmental perspective, this phase is of paramount significance due to its potential to invoke

long-term impacts. The adverse effects that are likely to occur during this operational phase. of the

project are: Air Pollution (gaseous emissions), Effluent generation, Noise generation, Solid waste

generation etc.

4.3.1. Land Environment and Location

It is a proposed project hence there will be no change in land use pattern and no impact due to location.

4.3.2. Discharges on Land-Impact

The sewage generated from domestic usage will be treated in sewage treatment plant. The wastewater

treatment system will be maintained with ZLD, hence there will be no discharges on land premises.

Mitigation Measures

1. Periodic maintenance and check of wastewater conveyance pipelines

2. Attempt to restore by replacing a part or putting together the torn or broken parts of the conveyance

pipeline in case of any leakage is detected.

3. Necessary preventive measures for spillage from pipelines, such as surface RCC channels along the

pipelines is adopted.

4. Lining of effluent collection tank/ETP common guard pond.

5. Treated wastewater quality shall be ensured as per standards before using it for various requirements.

6. With regards to ETP-There will be institutional arrangement to check the efficiency of Zero Liquid

Discharge.

4.3.3. Impacts- Soil Contamination-

Potential impacts on land environment are envisaged due to hazardous and non-hazardous wastes

generated due to various operations in the project site. Sludge generated during production process,

chemical waste including toxic waste, burnt fuel waste, oil slurry, Salts from ATFD etc. are the source

of hazardous waste. Sludge from ETP will be generated. Poor management of such materials/wastes

from the operations is a potential risk of soil contamination.

Mitigation Measures-

Good housekeeping and best practices of waste handling shall be adopted to eliminate/minimise the

risks of soil contamination. The wastes generated will be stored in temporary storage facility and

transferred to nearby Treatment, Storage and Disposal Facility (TSDF) and also to the approved vendors

of Maharashtra State Pollution Control Board (MPCB) landfill and Co-processing.

However, waste minimisation techniques will be adopted in order to minimise the generation of wastes.

4.3.4. Air Environment

Base line data reveals that ambient air quality in the study area for the Parameters PM10, PM2.5, SO2,

NO2, CO are well within the permissible Limits as prescribed by the National Ambient Air Quality

Standards (NAAQS) for Industrial Area, Residential, Rural & Other areas.


Page 171

The major air pollution sources from the industry are DG sets, boilers, reactors and thermic fluid heater.

The DG set and boiler sources are provided with stacks of adequate height so as to disperse the

emanating flue gases containing particulate matters, oxides of sulphur and nitrogen without affecting

the ground level concentrations. Bag filters will be installed for the Boiler. The emissions generated

from the reactors are scrubbed out by wet scrubbers.

Air Modeling-

M/s. Shalini Organics Pvt. Ltd. is a Greenfield project, proposes to set up Manufacturing unit for API

and API Intermediate unit at Plot No. D-10, MIDC Paithan, Taluka: Paithan, Dist. Aurangabad,

Maharashtra, Pin code: 431107. API= 6 Nos., Capacity = 112 MT/Month and API Intermediate = 43

Nos., Capacity =1171 MT/Month, Total Number of Products = 49 Nos. Total Capacity= 1283

MT/Month

The power requirement for proposed project is 300 HP. (Source: - MSEDCL) Boiler 2 T/Hr.; Fuel

Briquette -500 kg/Hr. Proposed Thermopack 1 no 2.0 lac Kcal/hr. and 2 No. of DG Set having capacity

of 250 KVA is sufficient to meet emergency power requirement of the plant.

For Boiler fuel will be used, which will get increased, leads to release of extra pollutants in ambient air.

Considering above it is necessary to provide suitable mitigation measures in proposed setup for

protection of air environment. The objectives for air modeling studies are narrated in below section.

The following objectives were identified for conducting air dispersion modeling studies:

To identify & classifying the sources, contributing in release of criteria air pollutants in the

environment.

To estimate emission rate of identified air pollution causing sources on gram/second basis in violation

phase as well as into proposed operational phase

To identify the sensitive receptors, present within study area of 10 km radius.

To identify the ratio of increase in baseline concentration due to proposed activity.

To identify impacts due to estimated incremental concentration on nearby environment.

To suggest suitable mitigation measures to reduce the impacts of proposed activity on air environment.

Identification of Source

The following sources/activities are identified and considered for performing Air Modeling studies:

Steam Boiler of 2 TPH capacity

Thermic Fluid heater of 2 Lac Kcal/Hr capacity.

Note: Operation of DG set will be limited and subjected to power failure; therefore operation of DG set

is not considered in air modeling studies.

For the quantitative impact analysis on the air quality, air dispersion modeling is performed. The criteria

pollutants like PM10, PM2.5, SO2, NOx & CO generated from operation of above mentioned utilities

were considered for air modeling.

Analysis Method

For the quantitative impact analysis on the air quality due to the proposed activity, air dispersion

modeling is performed. The criteria pollutants like PM10, PM2.5, SO2, NOX & CO generated from

activities mentioned in sec 3.0 were considered for air modeling.


Page 172

AERMODCloud5 developed by Envitrans and authorized by CPCB is used for air modeling simulation

which is based on the steady state Gaussian plume equation.

Model option used for computation

Point Source Modeling is considered;

Calms processing routine is used by default;

Wind profile exponents is used by default;

Flat and elevated terrain is used for computations;

It is assumed that the pollutants do not undergo any physico-chemical transformation and

that there is no pollutant removal by dry deposition;

Washout by rain is not considered; and

Cartesian co-ordinate system has been used for computations.

Uniform polar receptor grid is used. The grid consists of 180 receptors each assumed to

be at ground level.

Modeling Procedure

The prediction of the Ground Level Concentrations (GLC’s) due to activity has been computed by

AERMODCloud5 as per CPCB guidelines. While performing the model the urban dispersion and

regulatory defaults options were selected as per guidelines on air quality models (PROBES/70/1997-

1998).

Meteorological Data Processing

The surface synoptic meteorological data of project site was collected in month of December 2020 to

February 2021. The meteorological observation station. The quality assurance process was undertaken

as required by the EPA (EPA-454/R-99-005) to identify and fill the missing data for preparation of

hourly surface meteorological data. The surface and profile met data were prepared for use in AERMOD

using the AERMET meteorological data preprocessor of Envitrans. Processing the surface file indicated

more than 90 % data availability. Meteorological inputs required are hourly wind speed and direction,

ambient temperature, pressure, precipitation, cloud cover, stability class and mixing height.

According to Micro Meteorological data received from Laboratory of JV Analytical Services.

Following Wind rose pattern is plotted using AERMET Tool.


Page 173

Figure 4-1 Wind rose diagram

Interpretation: Above presented Figure no1, reveals that; the majority of wind during month of study

period. At project site were blowing from East to West direction.. It is also been noted that, 23% of total

air is blowing from East to West direction and 19% of total wind is from NEE direction was blowing

with speed range of 2.1-3.8 meters per second.


Page 174

Model Input data:

Existing Phase

The emission factor is used in the air dispersion modeling for estimating the pollutants from the boiler

& TFH is calculated using the document (EPA) AP-42 Chapter No. 1 External Combustion Sources,

Section 1.8 i.e., Bagasse combustion in sugar mills is utilize to predict the emissions proposed to be

release in air environment due to burning of briquettes. The briquettes will be made up of agricultural

residues like groundnut husk, coffee husk; coir pit etc. The most significant pollutant emitted by

briquettes-fired boilers is particulate matter, caused by the turbulent movement of combustion gases

with respect to the burning briquettes and resultant ash. Emissions of sulfur dioxide (SO2) and nitrogen

oxides (NOx) are lower than conventional fossil fuels due to the characteristically low levels of sulfur

and nitrogen associated with briquettes. The moisture content in briquettes is considered to be around

10%. Emission factor units are lb of pollutant/ton of wet, as-fired briquettes containing approximately

10% moisture, by weight. As per calculation furnished under identification of sources i.e. 4.1.2.1 it is

assumed that 1 lb of briquettes will produce 6 lb of steam, in lieu of any site-specific conversion data.

Therefore, to convert lb/ton to kg/ton, emission factor is multiplied by 0.16. The modeling has been

performed to identify the existing contribution of industry into current baseline scenarios and to identify

proposed GLC concentration in current baseline by increase in fuel combustion rate of industry in its

different units.

Table 4-1Modeling Input data for Steam boiler of 2 TPH capacity

Briquettes fired boiler of 2 TPH capacity

Parameter Unit Stack (Point Source) of 30meter height

attached boiler of 2 TPH capacity

Stack No No. 1

Fuel Briquettes 500 Kg/Hr.

Ht. of stack m 30

Temp. of flue gas oC 180

Vel of flue gas m/sec 6

Dia. Of stack at top m 0.9

APCD attached - Bag Filter

Gas quantity Nm3/hr

Emission Rate of PM 10 g/s 0.03022

Emission Rate of PM 2.5 g/s 0.1866

Emission Rate of SO2 g/s 0.555

Emission Rate of NOx g/s 0.0266

Emission Rate of CO g/s 21.84


Page 175

Table 4-2Modeling Input data for Steam boiler of 2 TPH capacity

Briquettes fired TFH of 2 Lac kcal/hr capacity

Parameter Unit Stack (Point Source)of 30 meter height

attached to TFH

Stack No No. 1

Fuel Briquettes 250 Kg/Hr

Ht. of stack m 30

Temp. of flue gas oC 180

Vel of flue gas m/sec 6

Dia. Of stack at top m 0.9

APCD attached - Bag Filter

Gas quantity Nm3/hr

Emission Rate of PM 10 g/s 0.0151

Emission Rate of PM 2.5 g/s 0.0933

Emission Rate of SO2 g/s 0.277

Emission Rate of NOx g/s 0.0133

Emission Rate of CO g/s 10.92

Interpretation

The workers including Technical staff, Administration staff, security and others in the factory premises

who may be affected due to the unscientific operation of boilers. Mostly the health effects associated

with particulate matter are respiratory, pulmonary injury, lung cancer etc. Exposure to SO2 and NOx

also lead to respiratory problems. Carbon monoxide decreases the oxygen carrying capacity of blood

by reducing the hemoglobin. The incremental values at various monitoring stations were predicted and

integrated with the baseline value for PM10, SO2, NOx & CO is tabulated in the below table. The output

image of the dispersion modeling describing the incremental predictive values during existing and

proposed phase of operation is given below:


Page 176

Figure 4-2 Air Dispersion Modeling Image for PM10 criteria pollutant


Page 177

Figure 4-3 Air Dispersion Modeling Image for SO2 criteria pollutant


Page 178

Figure 4-4 Air Dispersion Modeling Image for NOx criteria pollutant


Page 179

Figure 4-5 Air Dispersion Modeling Image for CO criteria pollutant


Page 180

Table 4-3Incremental emission load due to current activity, contributing in existing baseline values

Sr. No. Sampling Location Code & Name

PM10 (ug/m3) SO2 (ug/m3) NOx (ug/m3) CO (mg/m3)

BV IV RV BV IV RV BV IV RV BV IV RV

1 A1 41.38 0.0380 41.418 14.42 0.3534 14.7734 20.96 0.0169 20.9769 0.17 0.0427 0.2127

2 A2 44.24 0.077 44.317 15.23 1.41 16.64 23.19 0.0678 23.2578 0.23 0.256 0.486

3 A3 43.65 0.0193 43.6693 15.45 0.3534 15.8034 21.64 0.0169 21.6569 0.22 0.128 0.348

4 A4 53.83 0 53.83 15.7 0 15.7 23.72 0 23.72 0.24 0 0.24

5 A5 43.65 0 43.65 15.63 0 15.63 22.72 0 22.72 0.24 0 0.24

6 A6 43.22 0 43.22 15.87 0 15.87 23.48 0 23.48 0.24 0.085 0.325

7 A7 43.76 0 43.76 15.32 0 15.32 23.63 0 23.63 0.26 0.085 0.345

8 A8 44.01 0 44.01 15.96 0 15.96 23.47 0 23.47 0.25 0.042 0.292

NAAQS Standards 100 (24 hourly) 80 (24 hourly) 80 (24 hourly) 4 (1 hourly)

M/s. Shalini Organics Pvt. Ltd.,MIDC Paitha, Dist- Aurangabad. EIA/EMP

Page 181

The incremental value of the specific pollutant at the particular monitoring station is added to the baseline value

of that specific pollutant measured during the monitoring period of the project. The resultant value thus calculated

used for predicting the impacts of the proposed project on the air environment in the study area. The resultant

value for all the locations are well within the prescribed limit of NAAQS, the air modeling studies are carried out

considering mitigation measures.

Mitigation Measures:

The roads within the premises shall be sprinkled with water at a regular interval to avoid the dust

generation.

To ensure that all transportation vehicles carry a valid PUC (Pollution under Control) Certificate.

Proper servicing & maintenance of vehicles is being carried out.

Adequate green belt covering area greater than 33% of total plot area have been developed in the project

plot as per National Forest Policy. Green belt act as surface for settling of dust particle and thus will

reduce the particulate matter in air.

Ambient air quality shall be regularly monitored to ensure the air pollution devices are working

efficiently.

Periodic burner replacement shall be done to avoid CO generation; while sufficient air shall be provided

for combustion process.

All air pollution control measures like scrubber’s bag filters/Cyclone separator will be provided by the

industry.

Ambient air quality monitoring will be carried out regularly at selected locations in order to check and

compare the predicted concentrations with the measured concentrations.

NAAQS Exceedance if any may be checked thoroughly and adequacy/Performance of Air Pollution

Control measures shall be reviewed.

Water sprinkling shall be carried out on road surfaces in the project area.

Trucks with cargo susceptible for fugitive suspension will be covered with tarpaulin. All the vehicles will

be periodically checked to ensure compliance to the emission standards.

In addition, unit will be with essential pollution control measures as to be stated by CPCB.

VOC Control Measures

Use of double condenser system for reactors/tanks.

Addition of solvents will be carried out by dosing/ metering pumps.

Cooling and chilled water vent condenser traps will be installed on reactor/ storage tanks to control

VOC’s and recycle the trapped solvents back to the process.

Regular monitoring of VOC’s will be carried out to check the functioning of the vent condensers.


Impact

Noise generation sources during operation phase is classified into two categories:

Stationary sources due to operation of heavy duty machineries at the project site like Boilers,

Thermopack, Compressors, DG sets, Cooling towers, Boiler feed water Pumps etc.

Mobile sources corresponding to mainly vehicular traffic for staff mobilization, materials, material

transportation, liquid fuel transportation to project site, etc.

Vibrations are expected to be generated by various activities associated with the proposed project during

operational phase. The impact of vibrations beyond the site would be negligible during normal operation

phase. However, the impacts on workers engaged in the plant area would be considerable due to

occupational exposure. The proposed fixed major equipment/units such as boiler house, compressors,


Page 182

pumps, DG sets etc., also generate vibrations during operational phase and may cause exposures to the

workers/operators engaged at these units.

Mitigation Measures

The major noise generating equipment like Compressors, DG sets, Boiler Feed water pumps etc. will be

enclosed in an acoustic enclosure designed for an insertion loss of 25 dB (A) and silencers to other

equipment etc.

Major noise generating equipment will be designed with 85 dB (A) ensuring cumulative noise at 1.0 m

remains at 85 dB (A).

The occupational noise exposure to the workers in the form of eight hourly times weighted average will

be maintained well within the prescribed Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)

standard limits.

Adequate PPE will be provided to the staff exposing to noise risks.

Acoustic silencers will be provided in equipment wherever necessary.

Acoustic design with sound proof glass paneling will be provided for critical operator cabins control

rooms of individual modules as well as central control facilities.

Use of personal protective equipment’s/devices such as ear-muffs, ear plugs etc. will be strictly enforced

for the workers engaged in high noise areas.

Periodic maintenance of the equipment to be used in the developmental works will be carried out. Worn

out parts will be replaced and rotating parts will be lubricated to minimise noise emissions.

Implementation of greenbelt for noise attenuation will be undertaken: shrub plantation; landscaping with

horticulture; and Tree plantation at vehicle parking areas and along approach roads.

Ambient noise levels will be monitored at regular intervals during operational phase of the project.

Low vibration generating machines/equipment will be selected to meet internationalstandards and

foundations will be so designed to minimise vibrations and secured properly.

Vibration generating sources and their platforms should be maintained properly to minimize vibrations

and related impacts.

Various standards pertaining to vibrations are formulated by statutory bodies like Bureau of Indian

Standards (BIS) and Director General of Mines Safety (DGMS), which is being practiced would be

continued to mitigate the workers’ health effects due to vibrations.

Vibration dampers will be provided around the source of generation.

Transportation Management Plan will be prepared and the transportation of construction materials will

be planned in line with the same.


Page 183

4.3.6. Vibration

There is no source of vibration which will contribute to significant impacts

Mitigation Measures

By adopting smooth roads and yard for transportation, noise due to transport shall be drastically reduced.

Plantation shall be done along the road so that noise can be reduced.

If required noise barrier shall be installed.

Steam release shall be of small duration of the time

All the machinery including pumps and compressors should be lubricated and well-fixed to minimize

noise.

DG set shall be provided with acoustic enclosure


Impact on water resources

During operation phase, water requirement of proposed units will be mainly for process, cooling water, service

water, domestic use, fire water, green belt etc.

The major use of water is for industrial purposes. Total water consumption: 246.0 CMD. Source of water will be

from MIDC. Effluent generation from the process will be from 145.10 CMD.

Wastewater generated from the project is being treated in ETP followed by MEE and Zero Liquid Discharge

concept will be adopted for proposed project also, hence the impact due to the proposed project is very minimal.

Impacts on water quality

Effluent is generated from manufacturing process, cooling tower & boiler blow down, floor washing, vessel

washing, domestic use etc. Wastewaters from the pharmaceutical industries are characterized to have a high BOD,

COD, TDS & TSS concentrations and extremely variable pH values. If this untreated wastewater discharged

outside without proper treatment than it may affect surface as well as ground water quality.

Mitigation Measures

Effluent treatment plant (ETP) will be proposed to treat the wastewater, from the proposed project. The total

waste water generation of proposed project will be 145.10 CMD. There will be negative impact on water resources

after the implementation of project. To neutralize this impact to some extent, the unit is having rain water

harvesting tank and storm water during the monsoon season.

The sewage will be treated in Sewage Treatment Plant and mitigation measures of water environment are

presented in Table.

Table 4-4 Impacts and Mitigation measure

Sr.

No. Impacting Activity Impact Mitigation measure

i. Construction Phase

1. Use of Fresh Water

Increase in the possibility ofless

water available forcompeting

users.

Use water judiciously. Usetreated

effluent from proposedETP.

2. Domestic effluentdisposal Possibility of contaminationof

the surrounding waterbodies

Domestic effluent disposedinto

septic tank & soak pit


Page 184

due to discharge of domestic

effluent

ii. Operational Phase

1 Use of Fresh Water

Increase in the possibility ofless

water available forcompeting

users.

Minimize the waterconsumption

by recycle &reuse.Firm allocation

of water forindustrial use.

2. Disposal of treatedwaste

water.

Increase in the possibility

ofdeterioration of the water

quality surrounding waterbodies

due to discharge of waste water.

Treated waste water is reused in

process or used for gardening.No

discharge to water bodies or

outside factory premises

3.

Generation of wastewater

frommanufacturing

process,domestic

use,washings, blow downetc.

Increase in the possibility

ofdeterioration of the water

quality surrounding waterbodies

due to discharge of waste water.

Full fledge state of arttreatment

facility based onwaste

characteristics shall be Provided.

4.3.8. Land Use/Land Cover

Proposed Projects site falls in MIDC area which land is specially allotted for industrial development so the land

use and land cover changes are inevitable hence there will be no impact on Land Use/ Land Cover.

4.3.9. Geology

Proposed Projects falls in already developed MIDC area so there will be no impact on geology is envisaged from

the proposed project.

4.3.10. Solid/Hazardous Wastes

Impact

Generation of Solid/Hazardous waste due to various industrial activities may contaminate soil fertility.

Improper handling and disposal of used oil, discarded containers; incineration ash, process waste/MEE

salt, spent catalyst, STP sludge, ETP waste and fly ash may lead to occupational hazard.

Mitigation Measures

Hazardous waste generated from the site will be send to CHWSTDF

Fly ash will be sent to brick manufacturer.

Discarded containers will be sold off to authorized MPCB approved scrap dealers.

Used oil will be sold to authorized recyclers

Solid/ Hazardous waste will be collected, stored, transported and disposed as per the Hazardous Waste

(Management, Handling and Transboundary)

4.3.11. Risk and Occupational Hazards

Impacts on Occupational Health, Community Health and Safety are listed as below:

The processes for the present range of products involve reactions, which are slightly exothermic and with

medium temp and atmospheric pressure conditions and separation of Class A solvents by distillation. For

these processes HAZOP study will be carried out and all the recommendations for safe operation with

respect to instrumentation, and operating procedures will be done.

Possible accidents hazard due to reactions at high pressure.

Fire Hazard due to storage of solvents in underground tanks

Fire Hazards due to spillage, which may lead to fire and spreading the fire to other solvents stored in

other drums and can lead to serious fire and explosion.

Hazards due to handling of chemicals.

Health hazards for workers due to exposure of various chemicals


Page 185

Mitigation Measures

It is strongly recommended to take all the preventive measures to minimize the probability of the accident

to the minimum and make the process and reactor operation as intrinsically safe as possible. Because

prediction of realistic estimation of the extent of damage and damage control after the accident is

extremely difficult in case of reactor accident.

For the reactions carried out at more than atmospheric pressures following mitigation measures will be

adopted;

Reactor will be designed at pressure which will be double than operating pressure.

It is necessary to have Pressure control loop.

Rupture Disc and safety relief valve will be installed on the reactor to control excess pressure.

It is advisable to install reactor in a separate location, away from the main plant covered on three sides

with pressure resistant walls and open roof.

All operations should be PLC based controlled from the control room, located at a safe distance.

Major hazard for underground storage tanks is fire due to

1) Leakage or failure of unloading hoses

2) Due to improper earthing of tanks and tanker from which solvent is being unloaded.

The other hazard is soil pollution due leakage of underground tanks due to improper maintenance, use of

improper anti corrosive paint, failure to conduct regular pressure testing and thickness testing.

Storage of Class A solvents must have license issued by the CCE as per the rules, all the conditions

specified there in have to be fulfilled. Fire5fighting around the storage of Class A solvents is

recommended.

Good Ventilation in the storage area. No ignition source. To be stored in good containers. No spillage.

Control of spillage. Adequate separation from each other and other storage areas and process areas.

Storage of Acids in drums/carboys.

Full fledge arrangements for fire detection and control.

Provision of in house ambulance for emergencies.

Implementation of onsite and offsite disaster management plan.

Provision of fire extinguishers and fire hydrant system.

Regular health checks up of workers.

Regular training for first aid & fire control, establishing OHC.

MSDS of all hazardous chemicals will be available at office and with responsible person.

Antidotes for all chemicals being used as per MSDS will be available at the site.

Any leakage /spillage of liquid chemical shall be immediately attended.

Instructions of emergency/disaster will be displayed.

Work area will be monitored to maintain work environment free from any dust/chemicals5fumes/vapors

and to keep well within below permissible limit.

Provisions of immediate accident/incident reporting and investigation.

Safety Posters and slogans will be exhibited at conspicuous places.

Availability of Self Breathing Apparatus at site.

Requisite personnel protective equipment shall be provided. Instruction/Notice to wear the same will be

displayed. Further, it will be insisted to use the same while at work.

Safety Committee will be constituted and safety, health and environmental matters/issue will be discussed

in the meeting and enlighten the participants in these respect.


Page 186

4.3.12. Ecological Biodiversity

Impacts on Ecology and Biodiversity

The proposed project site is well within the premises of Paithan MIDC. The construction work to be done for the

proposed project will have minor impact on biological environment;

During construction phase, anthropogenic activity and noise generated by different machinery may lead

to temporary shifting of sensitive species of reptiles [Krait, Common Rat Snake, small mammals (Indian

Hare) and birds [Common Birds like Barn swallow, Baya weaver, Black drongo, Common Myna, Small

Bee eater etc.] to the surrounding similar habitat.

During operation phase, emission of gaseous pollutants will occur from the industry, which will impact

human health as well as biodiversity of the surrounding area.

Ecologically Important site i.e. Jayakwadi Bird sanctuary are within 1.8 km of the project area.

Mitigation Measures

There will not be adverse impact due to the proposed project on the environment specially on the bird

sanctuary as the major land use in between the bird sanctuary and MIDC area are agriculture fields and

human habitation which forms a buffer zone for the avifauna population in the bird sanctuary.

During the construction, the fencing barricading will be created which prevents the dust spread and sound

created by machinery, vehicles etc.

It has been reported that gaseous pollutants are absorbed by the leaves, while the particulate forms are

absorbed through the outer surface of the plants having thick canopy. (Prajapati & Tripathi, 2008). Plant

species, particularly trees and shrubs, are important sinks for trapping and absorbing many gases,

particulates, aerosols and airborne pollutants (Gajghate and Hassan 1999). To reduce the impact of

gaseous pollutants in the surrounding area thick plantation will be proposed in the company premises and

open areas outside the plant boundary.

During construction and operation phase proper green belt should be developed to minimize air pollution,

due to gaseous pollutants, vehicular pollution & dust to attract different faunal groups and maintain the

biodiversity.

Some of the points to create high quality habitat for avifauna in sanctuary area are as following;

Manage water level throughout the year, hydrology which is a primary driver of wetland characteristics.

Provide floating and submerged grasses in the edges of the wetland.

Do not plant huge trees on the edges of the wetland.

Provide a buffer of upland vegetation of 100 feet or more around the wetland to protect it from sediment

and chemical runoff, and other degradation.

Plant buffers to dense grass. If, necessary shrubs or trees can also be maintained within the grasses.

Maintain this buffer along streams, rivers and on lake front properties as well. The process will help in

maintaining a healthy fringe of the wetland vegetation at the edge of lakes and streams.

Leave naturally dying and decaying trees standing in swamps because they provide insects for

woodpeckers and homes for cavity dwellers.

Invasive species tend to eliminate native species and also reduce plant diversity so it can be eradicated.

Provide the verities of vegetation cover with different strata.

Specifically, designed nest site materials placed in the wetland and the area shall be free from human

encouragement.

Periodic removal of weeds to improve the ecosystem healthy.

Watch towers away from the nesting sites but good visibility sites.

Traditional vegetation management techniques can be used such as grass cutting in seasonal manner but

in a controlled (based on the local situation).


Page 187

Provide mosaic flooded and unfolded grassland on the edges which attract diverse group of birds.

Vegetation cover in the water area should not exceed one third of the total area.

Table 4-5 Impact and mitigation measures

Sr. No Impacting Activity Impact Mitigation Measure

1. Preparation of site

Clearance of shrubs at site/

Removal of top soil and

vegetation

Possibility of loss of

local floral and faunal

species & top soil.

Use top soil for green belt

development Green belt

development may retain the

local plant species.

2. Construction Phase

2.1. Noise generation due to

movement of heavy vehicles

Possibility of disturbance

to faunal species.

Green belt development may

retain the local faunal species.

3. Operational Phase

3.1. Gaseous emission from boiler,

Thermopack & DG set

Increase in gaseous

emission, it may affect

surrounding vegetation

& faunal species

Appropriate stack height shall

be provided with APC.

3.2. Discharge of effluent

/ sewage waste water

Improper discharge of

waste water & sewage

water, may effect on

aquatic life of

surrounding water

bodies.

ETP will be installed for the

treatment of waste water.

Treated water will be reused

for gardening.

3.3. Green belt development -- Green belt development may

retain the local plant species

4.3.13. Traffic Study

Proposed Traffic study

In MIDC area, 20 feet wide tar road is already constructed. For the proposed project 3 to 4 heavy vehicles will be

required for transportation of raw material & finished products. The total number of vehicles visiting site on daily

basis on under

Two Wheeler-25 Nos

Four Wheeler- 10 Nos

Heavy Vehicles- 04 Nos.

Transportation Risk

Industry is located in the Notified Industrial area and Aurangabad Paithan Highway is near from the project site.

The traffic density of the nearest highway is high mainly commercial and passenger vehicle traffic. Raw materials

and finished products will be transported by road. The traffic generated due to the proposed project will be 2 to 3

nos. of vehicles per day. The impact will be negligible.


Page 188

Table 4-6Impact and Mitigation Measure for Transportation

Sr. No. Impacting Activity Mitigation Measure

1. Risk during transportation of hazardous

chemicals and finished products

(Proper safety precautions will

be taken)

4.3.14. Odor Management

Odor can be defined as the “perception of smell” or in scientific terms as “a sensation resulting from the

reception of stimulus by the olfactory sensory system”. Whether pleasant or unpleasant, odor is induced by

inhaling air borne volatile organics or inorganic.

Sources of odor

Manufacturing process

1) Effluent Treatment Plant

2) Volatile Organic Compound’s (VOC’s)

Control measure

Appropriate stack height shall be provided for release of gases.

For the removal of odor, from odor emitting gases scrubber shall be installed.

Proper Ventilation system shall be provided to reduce the odor problem._

To reduce the odor from treated waste water, activated carbon filter shall be installed._

Reduction of odor at generation source, by storing volatile material in closed containers to prevent

volatile emission and carrying out chemical reactions in closed chambers._

Green Belt development can help to minimize the odor.

4.3.15. Socio- Economic

i. Vehicle Movement and utilities operation

Positive impact on employment generation for the plant operation, housekeeping, Gardner, drivers, security

staff, EHS, account and admin staff.

Mitigation Measure-

First preference will be given to local population of surrounding villages for employment

ii. Manufacturing process

Flue gas and process emission will have negative effect on health of surrounding village population.

Generation of high noise from industrial activities may disturb the routine of peoples living in

surrounding area

Mitigation Measure-

APC‟s has been provided for controlling the process emission with adequate stack height.

Padding and enclosing has been provided at noise generating machineries and area, same will be done

for proposed machineries and area

iii. Sewage and Effluent generation and treatment

Contagious and viral disease effect on surrounding village population due to disposal of untreated

sewage.

Chronic effect on the health of the surrounding village population due to the disposal of untreated treated

effluent


Page 189

Mitigation Measure-

Generated sewage will be treated send to septic tank and generated effluent will be treated in effluent treatment

plant followed and MEE. ZLD will be achieved.

Conclusion –

Impacts on land environment, air environment, water environment, noise environment, biological

environment, socioeconomic environment and risk and hazard has been identified and mitigation

measures for the same for both construction and operation phase are incorporated.

Impact identification with and without mitigation measures has also been carried out and briefed in the

chapter.

Air modelling study has been carried out to find maximum and minimum GLC in the surrounding areas.

From the overall study and evaluation of impacts, it can be concluded that the overall negative

Impacts from various activities on different environmental parameters are negligible with proper EMP in

place.


Page 190

5. ANALYSIS OF ALTERNATIVES (TECHNOLOGY & SITE)

5.1. Analysis to alternative-

The analysis of alternative technology and site is an important tool for the selecting the best technology and

project location.

Alternative analysis is the process of analyzing the proposed locating for suitability for basic necessities to operate

the plant safely, this analysis also covers the environmental aspect of pollution prevention and improvement in

quality of life nearby the project vicinity.

The project alternatives (Technology & Site) are the course of action in pace of another, that would meet the same

purpose and need, but which would avoid or minimize negative impacts and enhance project benefits.

Such projects may result in specific impacts which can be avoided or mitigated by adherence to certain

predetermined performance standards, guidelines or design criteria. Alternative approaches may therefore be

more effective in integrating environmental and social concerns into the project planning process.

5.2. Site Alternative

M/s. Shalini Organics Pvt. Ltd., is a green field project proposed to setup API and API Intermediate products

manufacturing unit at Plot No. D-10, MIDC Paithan, Tal. Paithan, Dist. Aurangabad., Maharashtra. Total

production capacity of the plant will be API= 6 Nos., Capacity = 112 MT/Month andAPI Intermediate = 43

Nos., Capacity =1171 MT/Month, Total Number of Products = 49 Nos. Total Capacity= 1283 MT/Month.

The area of the plot (20,000 m2) is sufficient for proposed activities to be carried out. Required facilities like

infrastructure, communication, medical facilities, fuel, water, power, unskilled & skilled manpower, raw

materials, road network etc. are readily available, too. There is no Rehabilitation and Resettlement involved.

Nearest city is Aurangabad which is about 36.97 km, nearest railway station is Aurangabad Railway station which

is about 35.46 Km, Nearest Airport is Aurangabad which is around 36 Km from the proposed project site. site is

having connectivity with other parts of the country by road, rail & air. Therefore, no other site or area was

considered.


Page 191

5.3. Process Alternative

Production Technology M/s. Shalini Organics Pvt. Ltd. will have an experienced team of scientists who are

engaged in, Manufacturing of API and API Intermediate. Proposed technology of production is result of R&D

and no alteration is currently with the proponent. Wastewater Treatment Technology

Effluent is categorized as LCOD and HCOD based on COD value in terms of mg/Lit

Value more than 5000 mg/Lit is considered as LCOD and above as HCOD.

The corresponding streams of effluent are segregated and then sent for treatment to respective unit.

HCOD/ HTDS IS Treated in evaporation system. The unit has 3 no different units combined together.

Stripper column, MEE and ATFD. Condensate is pumped to RO with appropriate Capacity of RO or sent

to ETP biological treatment along with LCOD/LTDS effluent. [ If COD /TDS within limit].

LCOD/LTDS is treated in ETP for biological treatment. Pretreated effluent shall be stored in a holding

tank and then pumped to RO for further treatment

Description of Treatment

The total water requirement 246 KL. Waste water generated from plant premises will be 145 KL Out of this 115

KLD will be high COD. [Manufacturing Process] and 21 KLD Will be from washings, laboratory usage, floor

cleaning, equipment cleaning, product washing and utensils washings. Boiler / cooling tower blow down etc. 9

KLD from domestic over flow from septic tank. [Treated separately in STP as outlined below]

This waste water shall be pumped into above ground level tank for storage and neutralization of HCOD. LCOD

effluent then routed to Zero liquid discharge facility in plant premises. All treatment tanks will be constructed

and installed above ground level with proof lining.

HTDS/ HCOD will be sent to MEE system with stripper column followed by ATFD

Agitated thin film dryer. The condensate from MEE/ATFD and LTDS/ LCOD effluents willbe sentto either

Biological ETP or recycled to MEE/ATFD. After pretreatment the effluent will be sent to RO system Permeate

from RO system 70-75% shallbe recycled and Reject shall be back to MEE system or can be transferred to ETP

biological treatment. Salts collected from ATFD system will be collected and sent to CHWTSDF for safe disposal.

Air Pollution Control Technology

Flue gas emission is due to the combustion of fuel briquette in boiler, Thermic Fluid Heater. Cyclone dust

collector & bag filter will be installed as APCM for each flue gas emission source. Process gas emission will be

from the stack attached to process reactors The gases will be scrubbed in two stage scrubber, water followed by

caustic solution. Thus proven, most feasible and best available technology will be used for Air Pollution Control

and no other alternatives are currently with the proponent.


Page 192

6. ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING REPORT

6.1. Prelude

Environment monitoring is the sampling and analysis tool to know the environment conditions at particular time.

The record of environmental monitoring is most important as the environmental changes are slow in nature and

impact appears after many years. Environmental Monitoring is the technical heart of assessment of environmental

and social impacts arising due to implementation of the proposed project. An equally essential element of this

process is to develop measures to eliminate, offset or reduce impacts to acceptable levels during implementation

and operation of projects. The integration of such measures into project implementation and operation is

supported by clearly defining the environmental requirements within an Environmental Management Plan.

M/s. Shalini Organics Pvt. Ltd. Total production capacity of the plant will be API= 6 Nos., Capacity = 112

MT/Month and API Intermediate = 43 Nos., Capacity =1171MT/Month Total Capacity= 1283 MT/Month. The

environmental monitoring programme is developed as below.

6.2. Environmental Monitoring Programme

The periodical monitoring of Environmental parameters like air, water, noise, soil and performance of pollution

control facilities and safety measures in the plant are vital for proper environmental management of any industrial

project. Therefore, the company shall create environmentalmonitoring facilities by the environmental and safety

department to monitor air and water pollutants as per the guideline of MPCB & CPCB. Moreover, air and water

quality shall be monitored by outside agencies authorized by MPCB at regular frequencies. This department shall

also carry out periodical check-up of fire and safety equipment’s.


Page 193

Table 6-1Environmental Monitoring Program

Sr.

No. Particulars

Monitoring

Frequency Standards

Important

Monitoring

Parameters

Ambient Air Quality

1.

Industry Main gate and

two locations inside

premises

Quarterly/

Consented

Air (Prevention and

Control of pollution)

Rules, CPCB, 1994

PM10, PM2.5, SO2,

NOx, CO, VOC, HC,

O3, Benzene, BaP,

lead, Arsenic,

Ammonia, Nickel

Stack Emission Monitoring

2. Boiler and DG Set stacks Quarterly/

consented

Air (Prevention and


Rules, CPCB, 1994

Particular matter and

SO2

3. Process Stack Quarterly/

consented

Air (Prevention and


Rules, CPCB, 1994

Hydrogen and

VOC’s.

Water Quality Monitoring

4.

Untreated and

Treated Effluents

(ETP water)

Daily

Water Quality

standards by CPCB/

SPCB

pH, TSS, TDS, BOD,

COD, Oil and

Grease, SO4,

chloride, DO using

APHA or BIS

method

Noise Quality Monitoring

5. Noise levels at 3

locations within the site

Quarterly/

Consented

Noise standards by

CPCB

Equivalent to Noise

Level in dB

Work Zone Monitoring

6. At least of 4 locations in

plant Quarterly --

Particulate Matter,

SO2, VOC’s, PM10,

PM2.5

6.3. Action Scheduled

There will be three facets to design and follow the schedule viz; (A) for compliance of responsibilities, (B) for

day-to-day operation and management of ETP and ECE and (C) for routine environmental monitoring, to access

the impact and take timely warnings. First two are already explained above with reference to CPCB publications.

The schedule for third aspects is as follows;

Daily Compliance-

Maintain the electricity consumption record for pollution control

Monitor ambient air periodically as per the consent

Take the meter readings- initial and final, for checking the water consumption

Monthly Compliance

Monitor Ambient/ Work Zone noise levels and ensure conformance to standards

Monitor the emission sources through the competent authority and submit the analysis report to the board.

Quarterly Compliance

Review the water Reuse performance

Monitor the ambient air quality at upwind and downwind locations of the factory

Half yearly Compliance


Page 194

Submit the half yearly EC and Consent compliances report

Yearly Compliance

Carry out environmental Audit Statement of various environmental aspects reviews the environmental

policies with the help of experts and makes the up gradiation/ changes accordingly

Submit the Environmental statement to the State Pollution Control Board in Form-V under Rule 14 of

Environment (Protection) Second amendment Rules 1992 of the Environment (Protection) Act 1986.

Obtained Consent to Operate and Renewal time to time under the water and Air Acts.

File hazardous waste returns

Renew the Hazardous waste Authorization under sub-rule 3 of the hazardous waste (Management and

handling) Rules, 1989

Reporting accidents, if any

6.4. Success Indicator

The success of the honest and sincere efforts the PP is putting in and it will be judged by various indicators which

are as follows;

There will be no complaints from the villagers

There will be no compliant of the costumers regarding quality of product and delivery schedule

No complaints from Government, semi- Government or Non-Governmental organizations

Statistics of Health, Safety and Environment will be maintained without blemish

Other industries will come to seek our advice

6.5. Environmental Monitoring Hierarchy

M/s. Shalini Organics Pvt. Ltd., is aware that environmental monitoring is not a job, which can be handled without

careful planning. A structure of this plan and hierarchy of process flow for environment management is prepared

and enclosed as logics, which is self – explanatory.

The ultimate aim is that, the proponent and public make a combine effort in the same directions of sustainable

development.

6.6. Conclusion

It is proposed to frame an environmental Monitoring programme both in construction and operational phases to

monitor the effectiveness of the mitigation measures by judging the impact of environment.

A separate budget is proposed for the same as also a dedicated cell. A transport approach will be kept with

documentation and reporting will be statistical treatment to the data. Checklist of the statutory compliance will

be maintained and complied it time to time.


Page 195

7. ADDITIONAL STUDIES

In this project public consultation is not applicable, as project is in MIDC. Additional studies like review of social

impact and public consultation were undertaken. Apart from the public consultation, major portion is dedicated

to the study of hazard identification and risk assessment. It also covers the requirement for onsite and offsite

disaster (natural and manmade) preparedness plan including emergency management plan.

Social Impact Assessment Studies (SIA)

Rehabilitation and Resettlement (R & R) and Social Impact Assessment (SIA) studies have not found any

relevance for the proposed project site as there would not be any temporary or permanent displacement of the

personnel or goods as the proposed project will be located in MIDC, Paithan. Hence, no R & R and SIA studies

or plan were undertaken for the particular site. The nearest residential settlement is at Yashwant Nagar- 0.84 km

(NE), Mudhalwadi- 1.40 km (S), Paithan- 7.72 km (SE), Dhangaon-3.95 km (NW) from the site. Proposed project

activity will not cause any negative impacts on the environment and on the society as it will increase the direct

and indirect job opportunities along with indirect work to the local people residing in the area. There will be some

development of secondary service market near the site which will be beneficial to the local economy.

7.1. Introduction -

M/s Shalini Organics Pvt. Ltd is Green Field project. The project will be executed at Paithan MIDC Plot No. D-

10, Taluka Paithan Dist. Aurangabad, Maharashtra. As the proposed project comes under the schedule (f) -

Synthetic Organic Chemicals industry (EIA Notification dated 14th September 2006) Company is classified as

small-Scale Industry under Red Category by Maharashtra Pollution Control Board.

Due to change in economic scenario, it is time to change as per market requirements and bring out the products

which gives optimum results for company as well as society. Now a day’s, rate of human health diseases is

increasing rapidly. Medical treatment with the help of drugs/medicines is a common practice in which

medicines/drugs play an important role in recovering the health & control the diseases. Pharmaceutical industries

require raw materials in the form of synthetic chemicals, bulk drugs and intermediates to prepare final products

as medicine. Bulk drug intermediates are the active raw materials used in drug that are useful as therapeutic

agents. Therefore, proposed manufacturing of various API and Intermediates has a vital importance. The raw

materials required for proposed activity will be procured from local market.

7.2. Objectives and Scope of work

The purpose of carrying out the Risk Analysis is to analyze the hazards & Risks, nature & impact of hazards due

to handling & storage of hazardous products. The analysis aims at quantitative evaluation of the risk involved due

to location & operation of the Plant and also to ascertain that the risk is within its acceptable limits or not. The

finding results into recommendations for minimization of the existing levels of risk.

All the important aspects of the Manufacture, Storage & Import of Hazardous Chemicals Rules, 2000 and relevant

Guidelines would be used as directives in conducting the Risk analysis.


Page 196

Scope of work

(A) Hazard Identification:

1. Study of Proposed Plant Operations and Engineering information, Piping and Instrumentation diagrams

(P&ID), plot and layout plans.

2. Identification of fire, explosion & other health hazards

3. Analysis of inventories in process & storage units with recourse to Manufacture, Storage & Import of

Hazardous Chemical Rules, 2000 and Fire-Explosion & Toxicity Index (FE& TI)

4. Identification of accident sequences and consequences with recourse to Event Tree Analysis (ETA) and to

evaluate propensity of occurrence of the top event through Fault Tree Analysis (FTA)

5. Past accident data/information analysis in similar installations to develop the credibility of worst come worst

accident scenarios.

6. Application of Safety Review Check List

7. Visualization of Maximum Credible Accident (MCA) scenarios.

(B) Analysis of MCA Scenarios:

1. Analysis of identified MCA scenarios and quantification of primary effects and to evaluate the domino effects

with recourse to computerized mathematical models pertaining to cases of:

Solvent outflow and its release

Spilled Product fire, Jet fire & Pool fire

Explosion (Unconfined Vapor Cloud Explosion) in case of Solvents

2. Application of damage criteria for heat radiation & pressure wave levels with recourse to health criteria, dose-

response relations and vulnerability models.

(C) Consequence Analysis:

1. Study of on-site and off-site population and nearby land usage characteristics.

2. Characterization of risk/Hazard levels through study of nature of exposure, pathway & consequences of MCA

scenarios and presentation of results.

(D) Recommendations based on:

1. Observations on the operational practices & Installation hardware

2. Findings of the Risk Analysis & safety review Check-list

3. Firefighting & other emergency facilities available

4. Manufacture, Storage & Import of Hazardous Chemicals Rules, 2000

Raw materials will be received in drums, carboys as well as through tankers and stored in covered shed. Raw

materials are indigenously available and will be transported by road; and in case of unavailability, will be

exported. The raw materials will be stored/register will be maintained as per market requirement of the products

and production schedule. The list of raw material of each product is given below.

To analyze Maximum Credible Accident (MCA) Scenarios, maximum inventory of raw material is in Plant. Tank

wise storage capacity of all raw materials is shown in Table 1.


Page 197

7.2.1. Details of source of water, fire water tanks and fire Fighting equipments (f/e’s, fier hydrants,

nozzles & monitors)

Firefighting equipment suitable for emergency will be maintained well in each section in the plant. This would

be developed according to the statutory requirements. However, fire hydrant line covering major areas will be

laid. Fire alarms will be located in the bulk storage areas. 1 Nos. of fire hydrant pump 42.40 M3/hr capacity is

installed for fire fighting purpose.

7.2.2. Availability of fire extinguishers at strategic locations and accessories and medical facilities

Fire extinguishers available at various strategic locations as per requirement, the total number of employees in

M/s Shalini Organics would be around 30 Nos. The workers will be examined by certified surgeon within 14 days

of their first employment and thereafter shall be examined by certify surgeon at intervals of not more than three

months. Also one qualified person on First Aid measures will be on duty. First aid box will be provided in every

department of the company. First aid boxes will be located as per requirement. Minimum one first aid trained

person available in all shift. Necessary specific medicines for emergency treatment of burns patients and for those

affected by toxicity would be maintained. Breathing apparatus and other emergency medical equipment would

be provided and maintained in the OHC.

Private medical practitioners & government hospital would be approached in case of emergency & short supply

in the plant. Names of medical personnel and medical facilities in the surrounding area would be prepared and

updated which can be identified in the security office and emergency control centre. The help of nearby industrial

managements would be taken under mutual aid response group agreement if required.

7.3. Hazard identification and visualization of mca scenarios

"Hazard" is a characteristic of a system, Installation or processes that present potential for an accident. Therefore,

all the relevant aspects of Solvents Products storage and handling process have been thoroughly examined to

assess their potential for initiating or propagating an unintentional event or sequence of events, which can lead to

an accident or disaster. Type, quantity, location & conditions of release of the solvents products under various

scenarios have been examined in order to estimate its damage potential, area affected, and the precautionary

measures to be taken.

7.4. Hazard potential: Deciding factor

Factors considered to identify and analyze the hazard potential are:

1. Flash point & Boiling point of the Products

2. Inventory of the Solvents

3. Potential for loss of containment

4. Pool size & dyke capacity

5. Potential for availability of ignition sources in the vicinity of leakage or spillage

Apart from the Solvents characteristics and process of its handling, size & layout of the Installation and its

equipment are also analyzed in order to assess the hazard potential.

7.5. Identification of hazards

Solvents are highly inflammable in their basic character. They are dangerous because of their intrinsic properties,

i.e. flash point, ignition energy required, heat of combustion, flammability limits, etc. In addition to such intrinsic

properties, extrinsic factors like storage & operating conditions and large storage quantity is also considered for

hazard identification


Page 198

The extent of the consequences arising from the Solvents in plant would depend on type & quantity of products

present, mode of containment, and external factors like location, density of population etc. In many cases,

realization of hazard and its potential also depend on prevailing meteorological conditions and availability of

ignition source. Thus, most serious consequences would arise from a large inventory of Solvent surrounded by a

densely populated area.

Flammability Classification Criteria:

Table 7-1 Details of Flamibility

S.N. Flammability Class Flash point (°C)

1 Class A Flammable Liquid FP < 23

2 Class B Flammable Liquid 23 > FP <65

Solvents require interaction with air or oxygen for its hazard to be realized. Under certain circumstances, vapors

of the products when mixed with air may be explosive especially in confined spaces. Following methods of hazard

identification have been employed in this study:

1. Characterization of major hazardous units based on Manufacture, Storage and Import of Hazardous

Chemicals Rules, Government of India, 2000; referred here as MSIHC Rules.

2. Identification of hazardous installations based on relative ranking technique, viz. Dow's Fire Explosion Index

and Mond's Toxicity Index (FEI & TI)

7.5.1. M/s Shalini organics as per MSIHC rules, 2000

Major hazard installations in the country have been identified & characterized by MSIHC Rules, 2000. The rules

employ certain criteria based on flammable, explosive & toxic properties and quantity of the chemicals. Indicative

criteria adopted in the MSIHC Rules, 2000 and description of applicable provisions of the rules is given in

Appendix I.

As per provisions of the MSIHC Rules, 2000 quantity of Solvent Storage at the Installations has been analyzed

and the applicable rules are identified based on the type of solvents, quantity of storage and the threshold quantity

given in the rules. Applicable regulations of MSIHC Rules, 2000 to the Installations are identified in the following

Table7.2

All solvents in plant fall under the category of isolated storage, which comes under schedule 3 Part II of MSIHC

Rules. Threshold quantities and applicability of various rules are as follows:


Page 199

Table 7-2 Applicability of MSIHC Rule

Sr.

No.

Product Storage

Capacity

Threshold Quantity (MT) as per

MSIHC Rules* Applicable Rules

Class In Ton For Rules 5,7 to 9

& 13 to 15

For Rules 10

to 12

1 Toluene 5 1,000 5000 2(e) (i)(iii), 2(h)(i), 3, 4,5,7

to 9, 10 to 15

2 Methanol 20 1,000 5000 2(e) (i)(iii), 2(h)(i), 3, 4,5,7

to 9, 10 to 15

3 Isopropyl

Alcohol - 1,000 5000

2(e) (i)(iii), 2(h)(i), 3, 4,5,7

to 9, 10 to 15

4 Acetone 5 1,000 5000 2I (i)(iii), 2(h)(i), 3, 4,5,7 to

9, 10 to 15

5 Iso-propanol 10 1,000 5000 2I (i)(iii), 2(h)(i), 3, 4,5,7 to

9, 10 to 15

6 N-Propanol 10 1000 5000

7 Ethyl Acetate 5 1,000 5000 2I (i)(iii), 2(h)(i), 3, 4,5,7 to

9, 10 to 15

8 Hexane - 1,000 5000 2I (i)(iii), 2(h)(i), 3, 4,5,7 to

9, 10 to 15

9 Acetonitrile - 350 5000 2I (i)(iii), 2(h)(i), 3, 4,5,7 to

9, 10 to 15

10 HSD 200 lit 5000 10000 2I (i)(iii), 2(h)(i), 3, 4,5,7 to

9, 10 to 15

Rule 2: Identification for Existence of “Hazardous Chemicals”:

"Hazardous chemicals" are existing in the Proposed Plant as per rule 2(e)(i) & 2(e)(ii), Solvent existing at the

Installation are covered under Schedule I(b)(ii)

"Industrial Activity" carried out in the Installation involves operation / processes having hazardous chemicals

and includes their on-site storage & transportation as per Rule 2(h) (i). “Isolated storage” of Solvent is covered

in schedule 2.

Rule 3: Duties of the Government Authorities:

Duties of the Government Authorities as per schedule V.

Rule 4: General Responsibility of Occupier:

As "hazardous chemicals" exist in the Installation, the occupier has to provide evidence to show that he has:

Identified the major accident hazards & Taken adequate steps to:

Prevent such major accidents and to limit their consequences to persons & environment.

Provide information, training and safety equipments, including antidotes to the persons working on site to

ensure their safety

Rule 5: Notification of Major Accidents:

Notification of "Major Accidents" in the format given in Schedule 6 to Chief Inspector of factories and to other

authorities as listed in Schedule V.

Rule 7: Notification of Site:

Notification of site and updated information of the modifications to the competent authority as per Schedule VII.


Page 200

Rule 8: Updating of the Site Notification Following Changes in the Threshold Quantity:

Any change in the “threshold quantity” (storage quantity) is to be notified to the competent authority.

Rule 9: Transitional Provision:

Transitional Provision for the existing activity

Rule 10: Safety Reports:

Preparation of Safety report by the occupier & to carry out an independent safety audit once in a year.

Rule 11: Updating of report under rule 10:

Updating of safety reports based on modification.

Rule 12: Requirement for further information to be sent to the authority:

Further information on safety reports to the authority.

Rule 13: Preparation to On-site emergency plan by the occupier:

Preparation of onsite emergency plan by the occupier & to conduct mock drill will take once in every 6 months.

Rule 14: Preparation of Off-site emergency plan by the occupier:

Preparation of offsite emergency plan by the occupier & to conduct mock drill will take once in every Year.

Rule 15: Information to be given to persons liable to be affected by a major accident

Rule 16: Collection, Development and Dissemination of Information on "Hazardous Chemicals" Employed

by the Occupier

Material Safety Data Sheet is to be prepared as per Schedule IX

Every container of hazardous chemical should be labeled or marked to identify

Contents of the container

The name and the address of the manufacturer

Physical, Chemical and Toxicological data as per the criteria given in Schedule I : Part I

Rule 18: Import of Hazardous Chemicals

(1) The rule is applicable as “hazardous chemicals” as per Schedule 1 Part I (b) (ii) exist in the Installation.

(2) To provide timely information to various Govt. Authorities listed in Schedule V:

Name & address of the company receiving the consignment in India

The port of entry in India

Mode of transport from exporting country to India

The quantity of chemicals being imported

Complete product safety information

7.5.2. Fire Explosion & Toxicity Index (FEI & TI) Analysis for Shalini organics

Introduction & Objectives:


Page 201

The most widely used relative ranking hazard indices are Dow chemical Company's Fire Explosion Index (FEI)

and Mond's Toxicity Index (TI). They are commonly together referred to as Fire Explosion and Toxicity Index

(FEI & TI).


Page 202

FEI & TI involves objective evaluation of the realistic fire, explosion, toxicity and reactivity potential of process or storage units. The quantitative methodology

relies on the analysis based on historic loss data, the energy content of the chemical under study and the extent to which loss prevention measures are already

incorporated. FEI & TI are primarily designed for operations involving storage, handling and processing of flammable, combustible and reactive chemicals.

Table 7-3List of hazardous chemicals and its respective DOW F& E Index

Chemical Methanol Toluene

Iso-

Propyl

Alcohol

Acetone HSD Ethyl

Acetate Iso Propanol N-Propanol

Triethyl

Amine

Denatured

Sprit

Storage Considered Tank Tank Tank Tank Drum Tank Tank Tank Drum Tank

N h 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 3 1

N f 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 3

N r 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Material Factor, MF 16 16 16 16 10 16 16 16 16 16

F1 (General Process Hazard) 2.55 2.55 2.55 2.55 2.35 2.55 2.55 2.55 2.55 2.55

F2 (Special Process Hazard) 1.60 1.89 1.80 1.68 1.26 1.46 1.86 1.46 1.80 1.68

F3 (Hazard Factor) 4.08 4.81 4.59 4.28 2.961 3.72 4.74 3.72 4.59 4.28

Fire & Explosion Index 65.28 76.96 73.44 68.5 29.61 59.56 75.88 59.56 73.44 68.5

Degree of Hazard Moderate Moderate Moderate Moderate Light Light Moderate Light Moderate Moderate


Page 203

The DOW Index calculations, performed for storage of chemicals.

Interpretation: The Dow index has been performed for above listed chemicals storage and from the calculations

it is seen that the storage will have a maximum Dow Index of 76.96 indicating Moderate hazard potential.

Table 7-4Degree of Hazards

Degree of Hazard for F & EI

F & EI Index Range Degree of Hazard

1-60 Light

61-96 Moderate

97-127 Intermediate

128-158 Heavy

159-up Severe

Toxicity Index:

Introduction

The principle and general approach used in the DOW method of hazard evaluation have been further developed

by ICI Mond Division, the revised Mond Fire, Explosive and Toxicity index is a series of papers by Lewis (1979).

The main developments made to the DOW Index in the Mond Index are:

1. It covers a wider range of process and storage installation

2. It covers the processing of chemicals with explosive properties

3. A calculation procedure is included to allow for the off-setting effects of good design and control and

safety instrumentation

4. The procedure has been extended to cover plant layout

5. Separate indices are calculated to access the hazards of fire, internal explosion and aerial explosion.

To estimate the Monds Index for raw materials in storage area following, All the raw materials stored in the

industry premises are tabulated and data for their N (H) levels and TLV levels are obtained. Based on their highest

toxicity factor and lowest TLV level Mond’s Index was calculated for chemicals with Nh=3 or more.

To estimate the Monds Index for raw materials in storage area following,

Table 7.6 explains the toxicity index and degree of hazard associated with respective raw material.

Table 7-5Toxicity Index and degree of Hazard for Hazardous chemicals

Sr.

No.

Raw

Materials

Th

(Toxicity

factor)

Ts

(Correction

factor)

Toxicity

Index

Degree

of

hazard

1. Methanol 50 50 5.15 Light

2. Toluene 125 75 10.88 Severe

3.

Iso-

Propyl

Alcohol

50 50 4.35 Light

4. Acetone 50 50 5.23 Light

5. HSD 0 50 2.30 Light

6. Ethyl

Acetate 50 50 5.01 Light

7. Iso

Propanol 125 50 8.11 Moderate

8. Triethyl

Amine 250 125 20.06 Severe


Page 204

Sr.

No.

Raw

Materials

Th

(Toxicity

factor)

Ts

(Correction

factor)

Toxicity

Index

Degree

of

hazard

9. N-

Propanol 50 50 5.01 Light

10. Denatured

Sprit 50 50 5.23 Light

7.6. Visualization of MCA Scenarios

7.6.1. Introduction

A Maximum Credible Accident (MCA) can be characterized as an accident with a maximum damage potential,

which is believed to be credible. For selection of a MCA scenario following factors have been taken into account.

* Flammability of the Products

* Quantity of Products present in the tank

*Process or storage conditions such as temperature, pressure, flow, mixing and presence of incompatible materials

In addition to the above factors, location of the unit with respect to adjacent establishment has been taken into

consideration to account for the potential of escalation of an accident. This phenomenon is known as the domino

or secondary effect. In order to visualize MCA scenarios Chemical Inventory Analysis, Event Tree Analysis and

Past Accident Review have been employed.

7.6.2. Chemical InventoryAnalysis

Maximum inventory of Solvents in storage tanks has been considered.

7.6.3. Identification of Chemical Release & Accident Scenarios

Credible accident scenarios for the Installation have been divided into following categories according to the mode

of release of Solvent, physical effects and the resulting damages:

Pool fire (release of chemicals from a tank, forming a pool within the dyke/fire wall and catching fire)

Jet fire (leakage of chemicals from a tank/pipe/pump/joints and the products stream catching fire)

Spilled Product Fire

Unconfined Vapor Cloud Explosion (UVCE) as a secondary effect of above mentioned scenarios

7.6.4. Even tree analysis to define outcome of release

ETA diagram for various modes of failures of storage tank/ pump/ pipe/ joints for storage of chemicals have been

developed for conditions such as overfilling, over-pressure and remote incidents like missile, lightening or bomb

attack and earthquake. The resultant ruptures of vessels or leak incidents have been identified with possible

outcomes of such incidents. These are depicted in Figure 7.3.

Scenarios pertaining to leakage & spillage are most credible in such plant.

7.6.5. Short listing of mca scenarios

Based on the hazard identification and comparing the nature of installation with that from past accidents in similar

units, a final short list of MCA scenarios for the Installation has been made, which are given in following Table.

These are the maximum credible accidents, which may occur, in the respective unit.


Page 205

Table 7-6Short Listing of MCA Scenarios for Plant

S. N. Chemicals MCA Scenario

1 Toluene Pool Fire, Spilled product Fire, Jet Fire, Tank on

Fire

2 Acetone Pool Fire, Spilled product Fire, Jet Fire, Tank on

Fire

3 Methanol Pool Fire, Spilled product Fire, Jet Fire, Tank on

Fire

4 Ethyl Acetate Pool Fire, Spilled product Fire, Jet Fire, Tank on

Fire

5 Triethyl Amine Pool Fire, BELVE

6 Denatural Sprit Pool Fire, Spilled product Fire, Jet Fire, Tank on

Fire

7 Iso Propanol Pool Fire, Spilled product Fire, Jet Fire, Tank on

Fire

8 HSD Pool Fire, Spilled product Fire .

The above foreseen accident scenarios will have certain adverse effects on the nearby units/structures in the

Installation which may lead to escalation of the accident further. Consequences of the entire above maximum

credible accident scenarios have been analyzed in detail in the subsequent Heading 4: Consequence Analysis.


Page 206

Figure 7-1 Event Tree Analysis of failure of Atmospheric Storage tank of Flammable Liquids

HAZARDS & DAMAGE CRITERIA OF MATERIALS

DEFINITIONS:

The release of flammable liquid can lead to different types of fire or explosion scenarios. These depend on the

material released, mechanism of release, temperature and pressure of the material and the point of ignition. Types

of flammable effects are as follows.

Hazards associated with Flammable materials

a. Pool fire:

The released flammable material which is a liquid stored below its normal boiling point, will collect in a pool.

The geometry of the pool will be dictated by the surroundings. If the liquid is stored under pressure above its

normal boiling point, then a fraction of the liquid will flash into vapor and the remaining portion will form a pool

in the vicinity of the release point. Once sustained combustion is achieved, liquid fires quickly reach steady state

burning. The heat release rate is a function of the liquid surface area exposed to air. An unconfined spill will tend

to have thin fuel depth (typically less than 5 mm) which will result in slower burning rates. A confined spill is

limited by the boundaries (e.g. a dyke area) and the depth of the resulting pool is greater than that for an

unconfined spill.


Page 207

b. Flash fire:

It occurs when a vapor cloud of flammable material burns. The cloud is typically ignited on the edge and burns

towards the release point. The duration of flash fire is very short (seconds), but it may continue as jet fire if the

release continues. The overpressures generated by the combustion are not considered significant in terms of

damage potential to persons, equipment or structures. The major hazard from flash fire is direct flame

impingement. Typically, the burn zone is defined as the area the vapor cloud covers out to half of the LFL. This

definition provides a conservative estimate, allowing for fluctuations in modeling. Even where the concentration

may be above the UFL, turbulent induced combustion mixes the material with air and results in flash fire.

c. Jet Fire:

Jet flames are characterized as high-pressure release of gas from limited openings (e.g., due to small leak in a

vessel or broken drain valve). Boiling liquid expanding vapor explosion (BLEVE) or fireball: A fireball is an

intense spherical fire resulting from a sudden release of pressurized liquid or gas that is immediately ignited. The

best-known cause of a fireball is a boiling liquid expanding vapor explosion (BLEVE). Fireball duration is

typically 5 – 20 seconds

d. Unconfined Vapor Cloud Explosion (UVCE)

Vapor Cloud can ignite and burn as deflagration or fire balls causing lot of damage by radiation starting secondary

fires at some distance. Vapour Cloud ignites and explodes causing high over pressures and very heavy damage.

The latter is termed as “Percussive unconfined Vapour Cloud Explosion” i.e. PUVCE in short.

Various meteorological conditions (as mentioned above) have been considered for analyzing drifting & dilution

of a vapor cloud, so that all probable consequences of a vapor cloud explosion can be foreseen. Worst come worst,

there may be instantaneous release of the entire Solvent vapor present in the unit. If it comes in to contact of an

ignition source during or immediately after the release or as in a case of backfire resulting in jet fire, it may lead

to a BLEVE.

Otherwise, the second MCA scenario is drifting & dilution of a vapor cloud along the wind and then coming into

contact of an ignition source (i.e., case of delayed ignition), leading to a VCE. This scenario is particularly

important to identify unforeseen OFF-SITE emergencies. Two kinds of vapor release scenarios have been

considered, i.e., instantaneous and continuous.

Continuous release:

Continuous release of a product occurs where the outflow of product is in small quantity form the inventory. This

release will get dispersed in atmosphere after a period of time. For ignition of product, a particular mixture of

product with air is required (mixture between lower & upper explosive limit of Solvent). For this precaution

should be taken by Installation personnel’s, by installing Hydrocarbon Detector for a leak of Class A Slovent (We

have recommended this point separately in recommendation heading).

Instantaneous Release:

As the vapor cloud drifts in the wind direction, it may explode depending on the quantity of Solvent present

within flammability limits and availability of ignition source. Applying the pertinent models, quantity of Solvent

within flammability limits for various downwind distances have been calculated for below mentioned wind

conditions. These quantities of explosive vapor cloud are applied to further analyze the damage potential due to

a vapor cloud explosion (VCE) for heat radiation.


Page 208

The catastrophic failure of vessel/Storage Tank is one of the major accidental scenarios whose effect is felt beyond

plant boundary. The over pressure distance are shown in table. Over pressure remain largely unaffected by wind

direction. The distances shown are for rupture of vessel filled up to its maximum capacity. The hazard distances

indicated will be much lower if the Tank of solvent contain fewer inventory at the time of accidents.

7.7. Consequence analysis

This chapter deals with the quantification of various effects of release of solvent on the surrounding area by means

of mathematical models and internationally recognized Safety software.

It is intended to give an insight into how the physical effects resulting from the release of hazardous substances

can be calculated by means of computerized models and how the vulnerability models can be used to translate

the physical effects in terms of injuries and damage to exposed population & environment.

Table 7-7Mathematical and Analytical Model for Hazard Analysis

Sr.No. Phenomenon Applicable Models

1 Outflows:

Liquid, Two phase

Mixtures, Gas/vapor

Bernoulli flow equation; phase equilibria; multiphase

flow models; orifice/nozzle flow equations; gas laws;

critical flow criteria

2 Discharges:

Spreading liquid

Vapor jets

Flashing liquids

Evaporation of liquids on land &

water

Spreading rate equation for non-penetrable surfaces

based on cylindrical liquid pools

Turbulent free jet model

Two zone flash vaporization model

Spreading, boiling & moving boundary heat transfer

models; Film & meta-stable boiling phenomenon;

cooling of semi infinite medium

3 Dispersion:

Heavy Gas

Natural Gas

Atmospheric stability

Boundary dominated, stable stratified & positive

dispersion models (similarity)

3D Models based on momentum, mass & energy

conservation

Gaussian Dispersion models for naturally buoyant

plumes

Boundary layer theory (turbulence), Gauss Ian

distribution models

4 Heat Radiation:

Liquid pool fires

Jet fires

Fire balls

Burning rate, heat radiation & incident heat correlation

(semi imperial); Flame propagation behavior models

Fire jet dispersion model

API fire ball models relating surface heat flux of flame,

geometric view factor & transmission coefficients

5 Vulnerability:

Likely damage

Probit functions; Non-Stochastic vulnerability models


Page 209

First, attention is paid to the factors, which are decisive for the selection of the models to be used in a particular

situation, after which the various effect models are discussed.

7.7.1. Factors which influence the use of physicAL EFFECT MODEL

In order to calculate the physical effects of the incidental release of hazardous substances the following steps have

been carried out in succession:

Understanding of the form in which the hazardous substance is in existence (i.e. liquid of highly volatile nature)

Determination of the various ways in which the release can take place

Determination of the outflow volume or quantity (as a function of time) i.e. estimating rate of evaporation from

the pool of liquid;

Quantity of leaked or spilled Product along with pool size has been calculated. Finally, the analysis results in

computation of heat radiation intensity (KW/m2) with respect to distance for various MCA scenarios. In this

analysis, final effect calculations have been made for pool fire for heat radiation intensity effects with respect to

distance from dyke wall.

7.8. Models for Determining the Source Strength for The Release of Hazardous Substances

Source strength of a release means the quantity of the substance released with respect to time. The release may

be instantaneous or continuous. In case of instantaneous release, the strength of the source is given in kg whereas

in continuous release source strength depends on the outflow time and expressed in kg/s. In order to find the

source strength, it is first necessary to determine the state of a substance in a vessel or pipe along with physical

properties, viz. vapor pressure & minimum ignition energy required. Phase of Solvent at the time of accidental

release is also to be determined. This may be gas, gas condensed to liquid or liquid in equilibrium with its vapor.

7.8.1. Instantaneous Release

In the event of the instantaneous release of a liquid a pool of liquid will form. The evaporation can be calculated

on the basis of pool size, volatile nature of the product (i.e. vapor pressure) and meteorological conditions.

7.8.2. Semi-Continuous Outflow

In the case of a semi continuous outflow, it is again first of all necessary to determine whether it is gas, a gas

condensed to liquid or liquid that is flowing out. The following situations can occur here.

Gas Outflow:

The model with which the source strength is determined in the event of a gas outflow is based on the assumption

that there is no liquid in the system.

Vapor Outflow:

If the outflow point is located above the liquid level, vapor outflow will occur. In the case of a gas compressed to

liquid the liquid will start boiling as a result of the drop in pressure. The source strength of the out flowing vapor

is a function of the pressure in the storage system and after the liquid has reached the boiling point at atmospheric

pressure the temperature will remain constant.

Pressurized Liquefied Gas Outflow:

If the outflow point is located below the liquid level, liquid outflow will occur resulting in flash off. The outflow

will generally be so violent that the liquid will be turned into drops as a result of the intensity of the evaporation.

The remaining liquid, which is cooled down to boiling point, will start spreading on the ground and forms a pool.

Evaporation will also take place from this pool, resulting in a second semi continuous vapor source.


Page 210

Liquid Outflow:

In case of liquid outflow, discharge due to overall head difference takes place.

Effects of Release

When hazardous material is released to atmosphere due to any reason, a vapor cloud is formed. Direct cloud

formation occurs when a gaseous or flashing liquid escapes to the atmosphere. Release of toxic compounds to

atmosphere may usually lead to the following:

1. Spillage of liquid hydrocarbons will result in a pool of liquid, which will evaporate taking heat from the

surface, forming a flammable atmosphere above it. Ignition of this pool will result in pool fire causing

thermal radiation hazards.

2. A fireball or BLEVE (Boiling Liquid expanding Vapor Explosion) occurs when a vessel containing a

highly volatile liquid fails and the released large mass of vapor cloud gets ignited immediately. It has

damage potential due to high intensity of radiation and generation of the overpressure waves, causing

large scale damage to nearby equipment and structures.

3. Catastrophic failure of tanks/ pressurized vessels, rotary equipment and valves etc. can result in

equipment fragments flying and hitting other equipment of the plant.

4. Release of toxic compounds results in the toxic vapour cloud traveling over long distances, affecting a

large area, before it gets sufficiently diluted to harmless concentration in the atmosphere.

5. The material is in two phases inside the containment - liquid & vapor. Depending on the location of the

leak liquid or vapor will be released from the containment. If vapor is released a vapor cloud will form

by the mixing of the vapor and air. The size of the vapor cloud will depend on the rate of release, wind

speed; wind direction & atmospheric stability will determine the dispersion and movement of the vapor

cloud.

6. If liquid is released there will be some flashing as the boiling point of liquid is below the Ambient

temperature. The vapor formed by immediate flashing will behave as vapors release. The liquid will fall

on the ground forming a pool. There will be vaporization from the pool due to the heat gained from the

atmosphere & ground.

7. There will be dispersion and movement of vapor cloud formed by evaporation of liquid The behavior of

material released by loss of containment depends on the following factors:

1. Physical properties of the material

2. Conditions of material in containment (pressure and temperature)

3. Phase of material released (liquid or gas)

4. Inventory of material released

5. Weather parameters (temperature, humidity, wind speed, atmospheric stability)

6. Material with boiling point below ambient condition.

7.9. Model for Evaporation

In application of evaporation models, Solvents is a case of volatile liquid. From the pool, which has formed,

evaporation will take place as a result of the heat flow from the ground and solar radiation. The evaporation model

only takes account of the heat flow from the ground since the heat resulting from solar radiation is negligibly

small compared with the former. The evaporation rate depends on the kind of liquid and the kind of subsoil.


Page 211

7.10. Model for Dispersion

The gas or vapor released either instantaneously or continuously will be spread in the surrounding area under the

influence of the atmospheric turbulence. In the case of gas dispersion, a distinction is required to be made between

neutral gas dispersion and heavy gas dispersion.

The concentrations of the gas released in the surrounding area can be calculated by means of these dispersion

models. These concentrations are important for determining the nature of accidents for example an explosive gas

cloud formation injury will occur in the case of toxic gases.

Heavy Gas Dispersion Model

If the gas density is higher than that of air due to higher molecular weight or marked cooling, it will tend to spread

in a radial direction because of gravity. This results in a "gas pool" of a particular height and diameter. As a result

of this, in contrast to a neutral gas, the gas released may spread against the direction of the wind.

7.11. Modelfor HeatLoad sndShock Waves

7.11.1. Model for Flare

If an out-flowing gas forms a cloud with concentrations between the lower and upper explosion limit and ignition

takes place, a torch occurs. A model with which the length of a torch and the thermal load for the surrounding

area can be calculated, assumes an elliptic shaped torch. The volume of the flare in this model is proportional to

the outflow.

In order to calculate the thermal load, flare is regarded as a point source located at the center of the flare. This

center is taken as being half a flare length from the point of outflow.

7.11.2. Model for Pool Fire

The heat load on objects outside a burning pool of liquid can be calculated with the heat radiation model. This

model uses average radiation intensity, which is dependent on the liquid. Account is also taken of the diameter-

to-height ratio of the fire, which depends on the burning liquid. In addition, the heat load is also influenced by the

following factors:

* Distance from the fire

* Relative humidity (water vapor has relatively high heat absorbing capacity)

* The orientation i.e. horizontal/vertical of the object irradiated with respect to the fire

7.12. Vulnerability Model

Vulnerability models or dose response relations, which are used in order to determine how people are injured by

exposure to heat load or a toxic dose. Such models are designed on the basis of animal experiments or on the

basis of the analysis of injuries resulting from accidents, which have occurred. Vulnerability models often make

use of a probit function. In a probit function a link is made between the load and the percentage of people exposed

who suffer a particular type of injury. The probit function is represented as follows:

Pr = k1 + k2ln V

Pr= Probit, a measure for the percentage of people exposed who incur a particular injury

k1 = A constant depending on the type of injury and type of load


Page 212

k2 = A constant depending on the type of load

V = Load or dose

7.12.1. Injuries resulting from flammable liquids and gases

In the case of flammable liquids and gases and immediate ignition a pool fire or a flare will occur depending on

the conditions. The injuries in this case are mainly caused by heat radiation.

7.12.2. Damage models for heat radiation

It is assumed that everyone inside the area covered by the fire ball, a torch, a burning pool or gas cloud will be

burned to death or will asphyxiate. The following Probit functions are an example of a method, which can be

used to calculate the percentage of lethality, and first-degree burns that will occur at a particular thermal load and

period of exposure of an unprotected body.

Lethality: Pr = -36.83 + 2.56 ln (t.q4/3)

First degree burn symptoms: Pr = -39.83 + 3.0186 in (t.q4/3)

In which, t = exposure time in seconds and;

q = thermal load W/m2

Two values have been chosen for the exposure time to heat radiation:

* 10 seconds: for exposed persons in populated area it is assumed that they will have found protection from the

heat radiation e.g. from a wall, within 10 seconds

* 30 seconds: this pessimistic assumption applies if people do not run away immediately or when no protection

is available

7.12.3. Summary of damage criteria

Damage Criteria:

Damage estimates due to thermal radiations and overpressure have been arrived at by taking in to consideration

the published literature on the subject. The consequences can then be visualized by the superimposing the damage

effects zones on the proposed plan site and identifying the elements within the project site as well as in the

neighboring environment, which might be adversely affected, should one or more hazards materialize in real life.

Thermal Damage:

The effect of thermal radiation on people is mainly a function of intensity of radiation and exposure time. The

effect is expressed in terms of the probability of death and different degrees of burn. The following tables give

the effect of various levels of heat flux.


Page 213

Table 7-8Fatal Radiation Exposure Levels

Table 7-9 Detils of damage due to radiation


Page 214

Table 7-10Overpressure Damage

7.13. Result of maximum credible accident analysis (Mca)

The maximum credible accident scenarios for the M/s Shalini Organics have been identified and listed in Table

11. Following is the accident potential and the likely damage for the identified accident scenarios.


Page 215

Table 7-11 Damage Distances Due to Spilled/Pool Product Fire Scenario, Jet Fire, BLEAVE Fireball of

tank Rupture/failure, Leak from hole in tank

Methanol Storage Tank

Heat Radiation Intensity

(Kw/m2) Jet Fire Pool Fire Tank on fire

37.5 Kw/m2 for first Isopleth 7.95 M 33.06 M 2.02

25 Kw/m2 for Second Isopleth 9.89 M 40.56 M 2.02

12.5 Kw/m2 for Third Isopleth 13.74 M 57.67 M 2.52

4 Kw/m2 for fourth Isopleth 24.98 M 102.86 M 5.02

Toluene Storage Tank



37.5 Kw/m2 for first Isopleth 7.00 42.42 2.01

25 Kw/m2 for Second Isopleth 9.01 52.45 2.5

12.5 Kw/m2 for Third Isopleth 12.50 73.56 3.52

4 Kw/m2 for fourth Isopleth 22.65 130.73 6.71

Acetone Storage Tank







Ethyl Acetate Storage Tank







Denatured Sprit Storage Tank




25 Kw/m2 for Second Isopleth 16.78 24.29 --

12.5 Kw/m2 for Third Isopleth 23.69 34,29 --


Triethyl Amine HSD Drum


(Kw/m2) Pool Fire BLEVE Pool Fire


25 Kw/m2 for Second Isopleth -- 64.18 5.56



Conclusion:

Based on the unsafe distances identified by the software output file, the MCLS (maximum credible loss scenario)

for the factory works out to about 130.74 meter considering pool fire scenario for Toluene with 4.0 kW/ (Sq.

m) impact in the environment.

The scenario considered for assessing the impact by quantitative risk assessment was taken from standard

guideline.


Page 216

The probability of occurrence of the scenario is very less. The Disaster management plan highlights the suggestive

measures to be taken during the occurrence of such an accident.

7.14. Catagorization risk based on above identifies mca’s

Based on ranking of likelihood and frequencies, each identified hazard has been evaluated based on the likelihood

of occurrence and the magnitude of consequences. The significance of the risk is expressed as the product of

likelihood and the consequence of the risk event, expressed as follows:

Significance = Likelihood X Consequence.

The Table 12 below illustrates all possible product results for the five likelihood and consequence categories

while the Table 13 assigns risk significance criteria. Depending on the position of the intersection of a column

with a row in the risk matrix, hazard prone activities have been classified as low, medium and high thereby

qualifying for a set of risk reduction / mitigation strategies.

Table 7-12Risk Matrix

Likelihood →

Frequent Probable Remote Not Likely Improbable

5 4 3 2 1

Conse

quen

ce

→

Catastrophic 5 25 20 15 10 5

Major 4 20 16 12 8 4

Moderate 3 15 12 9 6 3

Minor 2 10 8 6 4 2

Insignificant 1 5 4 3 2 1

Table 7-13Risk Criteria and Action Requirements

Risk Significance Criteria Definition & Action Requirements

High (16 - 25) “Risk requires attention” – HSE Management need to ensure that necessary

mitigation are adopted to ensure that possible risk remains within acceptable limits

Medium (10 – 15)

“Risk is tolerable” – HSE Management needs to adopt necessary measures to

prevent any change/modification of existing risk controls and ensure implementation

of all practicable controls.

Low (5 – 9)

“Risk is acceptable” – Identified risks are managed by well-established controls and

routine processes/procedures. Implementation of additional controls can be

considered.

Very Low (1 – 4) “Risk is acceptable” – All risks are managed by well-established controls and routine

processes/procedures. Additional risk controls need not to be considered

Risk category as per incidents mentioned as per below:

Table 7-14Categorization of Risk as per Identified MCA Scenarios

Sr.No. Risk Source Risk

Category

1 Spilled product Fire Low

2 Pool Fire Intermediate

3 Unconfined Vapour Cloud Explosion Intermediate

4 Spillage of product when road tanker meets with an accident enroute resulting in

fire Low

5 Storage tank hit by a flying object/under fire due to some explosion in close

vicinity areas Intermediate


Page 217

7.15. Analysis for propensity towards predicted consequences

Risk of operation of any activity involving hazardous chemicals consists of the following two elements:

Consequences of certain unwanted event &

Propensity that these consequences will occur.

Propensity or likelihood of the predicted consequence for the Installation will depend upon the following items:

Propensity of the Installation towards occurrence of initiating event.

Propensity that the designed counter measures provided in the Installation would fail.

Propensity of certain consequence of an accident.

7.15.1. Possibility of fire & it’S propagation

Primarily there could be fire (ignition of spilled or leaked Product), flare (jet fire) or pool fire in the Installation.

Pool fire is possible at the tank farm only whereas fire and flare are possible at any pipeline containing Chemicals,

Storage yard, Pump and Road Tank Truck.

7.15.2. Spilled Product fire

The Product may get spilled and come in contact with a potential ignition source. In this case, it will catch fire.

Extent of fire will depend on quantity of Chemicals (Toluene, Acetone, Methanol, Ethyl Acetate, Denatural Spirit,

Triethyl Amine) released and profile of the surface on which it has been spilled. Such fire may also cause fire in

the nearby flammable/combustible material, if any. This type of fire must be extinguished immediately and

propagation of fire should be stopped.

7.15.3. Jet fire in Pipeline/product pump house/tank farm/tt decanting area/tank truck

If there is a leakage in the pipeline and there is availability of any ignition source, jet fire may occur. In such cases

the leaked product may travel up to the ignition source and the fire may travel back to the place of leakage or the

leaked Product may catch fire at the place of leakage itself. Considering the worst possible case, such a jet fire

may cause direct damage up to 10 to 35 m for a leak size of 2 to 5 cm diameter and Product being released with

the head of 5 to 10 m. The flame impingement and may cause further damage.

In this case also there would be sufficient time available for the persons to come out from the affected area, if

any. In such cases isolating the affected pipeline should be given first priority than extinguishing the fire. The

affected equipment (being heated by the heat) should be kept cool with flow of water from monitor/hydrant.

7.15.4. Propensity of the Installation towards occurance of such initiating event

The event could be a single component failure, for example, leakage of product from pipeline or any equipment

or any tank. To evaluate this aspect for the Plant, Hazard and Operability Studies (HAZOP) has to be carried out.

7.15.5. Propensity of failure of the designed counter measures

Upon occurrence of the initiating event, certain designed counter measures in the Installation would start

functioning for example isolation of the affected area from other areas by the personnel by closing the valves to

restrict the quantity of escaping chemicals; on hearing the emergency alarm the emergency team would

immediately start functioning and take the necessary action to restrict or limit the damage. On the contrary these

counter measures may fail also. Therefore, a lot would depend on response of the emergency team. Hazards &

Operability Studies, (HAZOP) needs to be carried out to evaluate this aspect in detail.

7.15.6. Propoensity of a certain consequence of an accident

Any initiating event would take place first, there after the designed counter measures would attempt to limit the

effects of the initiating event. Such deviations from the intended operation may lead to an accident. In reality,


Page 218

accident scenario and severity of the consequences will depend on type of product leaked, quantity of the product

leaked, location of the incident (tank farm/pumps/T/T plate form), availability of ignition source, response of

emergency systems and emergency team, weather conditions (wind velocity & direction), etc. Further propensity

of being killed or injured would also depend on the aspects like time of accident and number of people in damage

area at that time.

7.15.7. Probability estimation for occurance of mca scenario

Applying equipment failure rate data and ignition probability data probability values have been estimated for

consequences of various MCA scenarios, which are as follows:

For the following accident scenarios the categorization is as follows, which is inferred on the basis of past accident

analysis, information & approach provided in Green Book & Purple Book of EFFECTS, TNO:

Table 7-15Probability of Occurrences of Identified MCA Scenarios

Sr.No. Categorization Probability Range

1 Low < 10-3 To< or = 10-4 per year

2 Very Low < 10-4 To< or = 10-6 per year

3 Extremely Low < 10-6 per year on wards

Table 7-16The probabilities for various accident scenarios have been estimated

Sr.No. Accident Scenario Probability

1 Spilled Product catching fire Very Low (about 10-5 per year)

2 Jet Fire in Pipeline/Product Pumps/Tank Farm /TT

Decanting Area/Tank Truck

Very Low (about 10-5 per year)

3 Pool Fire in solvents in Main Tank farm Very Low (about 10-6 per year)

4 Vapor Cloud Explosion due to major release of Class A

product from storage unit

Extremely Low (about 10-8 per year)

7.16. Uncertainty surrounding consequence analysis

Analytical and mathematical models employed in quantification of damage distances are based on many

considerations, which have been discussed earlier.

In many cases, very general data is available on component and equipment failures, for which statistical accuracy

is often poor. Probability data has been found quite subjective, so that, when combined in a fault tree or event

tree the incident frequencies thus computed may not have a higher confidence range. Furthermore, it is difficult

to infer the comparison between frequencies of two catastrophic events, for example propensity of 10-4 and 10-5

per annum.

7.17. Alarp principle

ALARP stands for "as low as reasonably practicable". The ALARP principle is that the residual risk shall be

as low as reasonably practicable. It has particular connotation as a route to reduce risks SFAIRP (so far as is

reasonably practicable) in UK Health and Safety law.

For a risk to be ALARP it must be possible to demonstrate that the cost involved in reducing the risk further

would be grossly disproportionate to the benefit gained. The ALARP principle arises from the fact that infinite

time, effort and money could be spent on the attempt of reducing a risk to zero. It should not be understood as

simply a quantitative measure of benefit against detriment. It is more a best common practice of judgment of the

balance of risk and societal benefit. Following figure shows ALARP diagram.


Page 219

NOTE- A risk of 10 per million per year or 10-5/Year; effectively means that any person standing at a point of

this level of risk would have a 1 in 100 000 chance of being fatally injured per year.

From table No. 15, it can be seen that, the probability / frequency of occurrence of Pool Fire due to catastrophic

failure of Storage tank structure is 1 x 10-6, and VCE is 1 x 10-8 per Year. Hence, as per ALARP Principle, the

risk is coming under “Broadly Acceptable region” which require maintaining normal precautions within the

Installation area.

Risk Assessment Criteria:

In order to determine acceptability, the risk results are assessed against a set of risk criteria as per UK HSE criteria.

UK HSE criteria:

Following points detail the UK HSE guidelines:

An individual risk below 1 x 10-6 fatalities per year is considered as acceptable for both plant workers and public.

An individual risk above 1 x 10-4 fatalities per year for public is considered as unacceptable and an individual

risk above 1 x 10-3 fatalities per year for workers is considered unacceptable. Between these limits the risk is

considered as ALARP (As Low as Reasonably Practicable). An indication of this is shown in the below figure

Societal risk can be represented by FN curves, which are plots of the cumulative frequency (F) of various accident

scenarios against the number (N) of casualties associated with the modelled incidents. The plot is cumulative in

the sense that, for each frequency, N is the number of casualties that could be equaled or exceeded.

Often ‘casualties’ are defined in a risk assessment as fatal injuries, in which case N is the number of people that

could be killed by the incidents.

IRPA

10-3/yr

10-4/yr

10-5/yr

10-6/yr

Intolerable

The ALARP or Tolerable

region (Risk is tolerated only)

Broadly Acceptable region

(no need for detailed working todemonstrate ALARP)

Fundamental improvements needed.Only to be considered if there are no

alternatives and people are well informed

Too high, significant effort required toimprove

High, investigate alternatives

Low, consider cost-effective alternatives

Negligible, maintain normal precautions


Page 220

Individual Risk Criteria

The UK HSE Individual Risk Criteria was considered to assess the risk for Plant. Individual risk above 10-3 per

annum for any person shall be considered intolerable and fundamental risk reduction improvements are required.

Risk criteria for Individual Risk for on-site are as follows:

Individual risk levels above 1 x 10-3 per year will be considered unacceptable and will be reduced, irrespective

of cost

Individual risk levels below 1 x 10-6 per year will be broadly acceptable

Risk levels between 1 x 10-3 and 1 x 10-6 per year will be reduced to levels as low as reasonably practicable

(ALARP). That is the risk within this region is tolerable only of further risk reduction is considered impracticable

because the cost required to reduce the risk is grossly disproportionate to the improved gained

Societal Risk Criteria

When considering the risk associated with a major hazard facility, the risk to an individual is not always an

adequate measure of total risks; the number of the individuals at risk is also important. Catastrophic incidents

with the potential multiple fatalities have a little influence on the level of risk but have a disproportionate effect

on the response of society and impact of company reputation.

The concept of societal risk is much more than that for individual risk. A number of factors are involved which

make it difficult to determine single value criteria for application to a number of different situations. These factors

include;

- The hazard, the consequential risks and the consequential benefits

- The nature of assessment

- Factors of importance to the company, government, regulators and authorities, public attitudes and perception

and aversion to major accident


Page 221

Societal risk is the relationship between frequency of an event and the number of people affected. Societal risk

from a major hazard facility can thus be expressed as the relationship between the number of potential fatalities

N following a major accident and frequency F at which N fatalities are predicated to occur. The relationship

between F and N, and the corresponding relationship involving F, the cumulative frequency of events causing N

or more fatalities, are usually presented graphically on log-log axis.

Societal risk should not be confused as being the risk to society or the risk as being perceived by society. The

word “societal” is merely used to indicate a group of people and societal risk refers to the frequency of multiple

fatality incidents, which includes workers and the public. Societal risk is usually represented by an FN (Frequency

– Number of Fatality) curve.

Figure 7-2 FN Curve

The highest frequency is found to be 1E-05/ year associated to Three (3) fatalities and the maximum number of

fatalities is Thirteen (13) with frequency of 4E-06/ year. F-N results, concludes that the Societal Risk falls in the

ALARP region.

Conclusion for IR/SR

1 Individual Risk (IR)

The IR value throughout the plant estimated is 4.5E-05 per year, which is in ALARP region.

2 Expected Number of Fatalities (PLL)

The estimated overall Potential Loss of Life (PLL) for the plant population is estimated 7E-05 per

year.

3 Societal Risk (F-N Curve)

The F-N curves show that societal risk for the overall population considered mostly

falls in the ALARP region (10-4 to 10-5).

NOTE - A risk of 10 per million per year, or 10-5/Year, effectively means that any person standing at a point of

this level of risk would have a 1 in 100 000 chance of being fatally injured per year.

7.17.1. Mitigation/preventive measures for mca scenarios

In order to mitigate/prevent any minor incident from becoming a major accident following measures along with

Onsite and if required Offsite Emergency (Disaster) Management Plan should be followed:


Page 222

Spillage in tank area: small leakage through tank valves/joints will take a form of spillage if not identified

immediately. If this spillage gets on contact with ignition source will take a form of fire and lead to an accident.

In order to prevent it from becoming a major accident, stop the operation immediately. Remove the spillage with

proper corrective method from that area. REMOVE SPILLED PRODUCT using Sand or Fire Extinguishers (By

Spreading Foam Solution). Do not touch or walk through spilled material, stop leak if possible. Use water spray

to reduce vapor, do not put water directly on leak or spill area. And if ignition of spilled product takes place

necessary emergency procedure must be followed as soon as possible to avoid damage to other property due to

secondary effect accidents. For small spillage, flush area with flooding amounts of water.

Pool Fire in tank farm Area: Failure of outlet valve of tanks or any one of valve will lead to leakage of product.

This will form a pool inside tank farm area if not identified immediately. This pool if comes in contact with an

ignition source will lead to a major accident. In order to mitigate it, stop the operation immediately. Be ready will

all firefighting equipments at the site. Start sprinkler system to cool the surrounding tanks. Immediately follow

both onsite and offsite emergency plan.

Tank on Fire: For preventing tank on fire, cool the surrounding tanks by means of sprinkler system and foam

system. Bring all firefighting equipments at the site and start fighting with fire following proper onsite emergency

plan.

Unconfined Vapor Cloud Explosion: UVCE is a secondary domino effect. Vapors releasing into atmosphere

are not in so much quantity that it lead to an explosion. For an ignition, a proper mixture of fuel to air is required,

if this mixture between UEL & LEL comes in contact with an ignition source, it will lead to an explosion. In

order to prevent it, immediately stop the leakage from the source by identifying it. For this, it is recommended to

install hydrocarbon Detector in Pump House area, Tank Farm area and TT Gantry area (we have separately

recommended this point in recommendation heading 4.


Page 223

Figure 7-3 Pool Fire Scenario for Methanol Tanks Enclosed in Tank farm area showing Damage Distances

for considered Heat Intensities


Page 224

Figure 7-4 Jet Fire Scenario for Methanol Tanks Enclosed in Tank farm area showing Damage Distances



Page 225

Figure 7-5 Tank on fire Scenario for Methanol Tanks Enclosed in Tank Farm Area showing Damage

Distances for considered Heat Intensities


Page 226

Figure 7-6 Pool Fire Scenario for Toluene Tanks Enclosed in Tank farm area showing Damage Distances



Page 227

Figure 7-7 Jet Fire Scenario for Toluene Tanks Enclosed in Tank farm area showing Damage Distances



Page 228

Figure 7-8 Tank on fire Scenario for Toluene Tanks Enclosed in Tank Farm Area showing Damage



Page 229

Figure 7-9 Pool Fire Scenario for Acetone Tanks Enclosed in Tank farm Area showing Damage Distances



Page 230

Figure 7-10 Jet Fire Scenario for Acetone Tanks Enclosed in Tank farm area showing Damage Distances



Page 231

Figure 7-11 Tank on fire Scenario for Acetone Tanks Enclosed in Tank Farm Area showing Damage



Page 232

Figure 7-12: Pool Fire Scenario for Ethyl Acetate Tanks Enclosed in Tank farm Area showing Damage



Page 233

Figure 7-13 Jet Fire Scenario for Ethyl Acetate Tanks Enclosed in Tank farm area showing Damage



Page 234

Figure 7-14 Tank on fire Scenario for Ethyl Acetate Tanks Enclosed in Tank Farm Area showing

Damage Distances for considered Heat Intensities


Page 235

Figure 7-15 Pool Fire Scenario for Denatured Sprit Tanks Enclosed in Tank farm Area showing Damage



Page 236

Figure 7-16 Jet Fire Scenario for Denatured Sprit Tanks Enclosed in Tank farm Area showing Damage



Page 237

Figure 7-17 Tank on fire Scenario for Denatured Sprit Tanks Enclosed in Tank Farm Area showing

Damage Distances for considered Heat Intensities


Page 238

Figure 7-18 Pool Fire Scenario for Triethyl amine drum Enclosed in Tank farm Area showing Damage



Page 239

Figure 7-19 Damage Distances Due to BLEVE Fire ball in Triethyl Amine


Page 240

Figure 7-20 Pool Fire Scenario for HSD drum Enclosed in Tank farm Area showing Damage Distances



Page 241

7.17.2. Recommendations

The periodic inspection and maintenance program on the tank would be ensured.

The periodic maintenance of the pumps and piping would be ensured.

Least number of flanged joints will be provided in the pipelines.

The pipelines will be supported adequately so as to avoid sagging of the same during operation.

Visual inspection of the pipelines will be done periodically to ascertain external pitting and

corrosion.

Protective painting on the tank and pipeline shall be provided.

Protective equipment such as gloves, lab coat, vapor respirator, splash goggles shall be ensured

while handling the substance.

Prominent signage of hazards (such as “Danger”, No smoking”) of the substances shall be provided

on the tank and surroundings

The tank installation will be protected against lightening.

All Electric Equipment & Fittings (e.g. Pump-motors, lamps, junction boxes, switches etc.) shall

be of Flame-proof Type, conforming to IS/IEC 60079 i.e. old IS 2148:1981, suitable for GR. II

A/II B and shall be of type approved by the CCoE.

Earthing is to be provided to the storage area for dealing with the static charges that might generate

during the loading and unloading of the solvents.

Provision of sand buckets, foam monitor, fire extinguishers & hydrant line near PESO area were

made available.

Appropriate drainage with the slope of 2 % is provided to remove small and large spillage of the

chemicals.

Provision of spill kit is provided to deal with the minor spillage scenario.

Permission of Joint Chief Controller (explosives), West circle is obtained

Solvent storage is constructed of non combustible materials.

The secondary containment is provided and is kept clean and free from any accumulation of

inflammable liquids.

The storage shed is ventilated near the ground level and also near the roof. The ventilators are

covered with two layers of fine copper or non corrodible metal wire gauge of mesh not less than

11 meshes per linear cm.

No alteration is carried out without written permission of licensed authority.

The safety distance of 7.5mtr is kept from the shed.

All the empty receptacles are kept securely closed unless they have been thoroughly cleaned.

The suitable extinguishers (DCP) are kept immediately outside the storage shed.

Daily inventory of Solvent is to be maintained.

The chemicals are isolated from another chemical in well ventilated area and hazard warning

information is shown.

SOP is prepared for handling such chemicals and it should be strictly followed.

Spill kit is provided for storage to limit the spill of materials. Suitable Absorbent like sodium bi

carbonate is used to absorb the spill.

Proper training is provided to workers prior to handling and transporting chemicals.

PPE’s like face shield, goggles, apron, gloves, gumboots are used while handling the chemicals to

avoid exposure to chemicals.


Page 242

The raw materials are stored according to their compatibility.

Toxic materials are stored in cool place and kept away from heat.

Toxic material can cause breathing difficulty therefore storage area is well ventilated.

Good housekeeping practice is implemented in storage area.

Appropriate drainage with the slope of 2 % is provided to remove small and large spillage of the

chemicals.

The provision of fire water supply is provided through the hydrant line passing from the raw

material storage area

PPE’s are used wherever necessary.

MSDS recommendations are strictly followed while chemical storage and handling


Page 243

8. PROJECT BENEFITS

8.1. Introduction

This chapter illustrates beneficial points to the surrounding community or country as a whole in terms of

infrastructural development, social development, boosting employment and other tangible benefits due to

proposed API’s products manufacturing plant by M/s. Shalini Organics Pvt Ltd.

8.2. Improvement in Physical Infrastructure

M/s. Shalini Organics Chemical Pvt. Ltd. has proposed to manufacturing of API and API Intermediate.

Total production capacity of the plant will be API= 6 Nos., Capacity = 112 MT/Month and API Intermediate

= 43 Nos., Capacity =1171MT/Month Total Capacity= 1283 MT/Month. The project will have requirement

of an infrastructure; so direct benefits of infrastructure development is anticipated.

The project proposes employment generation to local people which will help to increase the income of local

people & improve their living standard. Total 60 persons are expected to be employed including skilled,

semi-skilled and unskilled category in the proposed unit for the various job categories. The preference will

be given to local population for employment in the semi-skilled and unskilled category; this will increase

the employment opportunity in the surrounding area hence, with the growth in the economic conditions,

the project may lead to growth in the social status & improvement of the quality of life in the surrounding

area. It will also help in improvement in local amenities. Thus, the project will have considerable indirect

benefits to the public physical infrastructures.

8.3. Direct Revenue Earning to the National & State Exchequer

The proposed project will contribute revenue to the Central & State exchequer in the form of Goods &

Services Tax {GST}, income tax, corporate taxes etc. Indirect contribution to the Central & State exchequer

will be there due to Income by way of registration of trucks, payment of road tax, income tax from

individuals as well as taxes from associated units. Thus, the proposed project will help the Government by

paying different taxes from time to time, which is a part of revenue and thus, will help in developing the

area.

8.4. Employment Potential

In the construction phase, direct and indirect manpower will be involved. Thus temporary and permanent

employment will be generated during construction phase. The proposed manpower requirement during

construction will be 10-20 nos. During the operation phase, 60 nos. of skilled and unskilled manpower will

be required. Moreover, unit will provide first priority to local workers for the employment. Further, the

indirect employment via increased transportation, ancillary units & local economic activities will also add

in the employment potential of the project. Thus, the unit will result in considerable benefits in terms of

employment.

8.5. Other Tangible Benefits

The proposed project is likely to have other tangible benefits as given below.

Indirect employment opportunities to local people in contractual works like housing construction,

transportations, sanitation, for supply of goods and services to the project and other community services.


Page 244

Market and business establishment facilities

Improvement in Cultural, recreation and aesthetic facilities

Improvement in communication, transport, education, community development and medical facilities.

The project will contribute additional revenue to the State and Central exchequer in the form different

kind of taxes.


Page 245

9. ENVIRONMENTAL COST BENEFIT ANALYSIS

As per EIA Notification 2006, this Chapter of the ‘Environmental Cost Benefit Analysis’ is applicable only

if it is recommended at the Scoping stage. As per the standard ToR issued by MoEF&CC, New Delhi vide

File No IA-J-11011/281/2020-IA-II(I) on dated 27.11.2020, the Environmental Cost Benefit Analysis is

not applicable and hence has not been prepared.


Page 246

10. ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN

10.1. Introduction

The environmental management plan consists of the set of mitigation, management, monitoring and

institutional measures to be taken during implementation and operation to eliminate adverse environmental

impacts or reduce them to acceptable levels. The present environmental management plan addresses the

components of environmental affected during construction of the plant and by the different activities

forming part of the manufacturing processes.

Environmental Policy

i. Overall conservation of environment.

ii. Minimization of waste generation and pollution.

iii. Judicious use of natural resources and water.

iv. Safety, welfare and good health of the work force and populace.

v. Ensure effective operation of all control measures.

vi. Vigilance against probable disasters and accidents.

vii. Monitoring of cumulative and long-time impacts.

viii. Ensure effective operation of all control measures.

Annual review of the entire system and various environment management as well as process control and

monitoring systems shall be done. Environment monitoring shall be done to collect the data on air, water,

soil, noise etc. and duly recorded. Environmental Management Plan which shall be implemented is detailed

under the following heads:

i. Pollution Control Systems

ii. Waste Minimization and Resource Conservation

iii. Occupational Health and Safety

iv. Socio-Economic Development

v. Greenbelt Development Plan

Standard operating procedure, formats will be developed and records will be maintained. Provision of

internal audit will be made. Any NCs/Observation will be directly conveyed to Management and

accordingly corrective and preventive action will be taken.

10.2. Environmental management plan during Construction Phase

Construction phase results in temporary environmental pollution except for the permanent change in local

land use pattern & aesthetics in certain cases. Such pollution is mainly due to site preparation, civil works,

transportation, storage & handling of construction materials, construction worker’s sanitation etc. These

are usually short-term impacts. The project proponent will take appropriate steps to control pollution during

construction phase.

10.2.1. 10.2.1 Air and Noise Environment

During construction work, air pollution is expected in the form of increased suspended particulate matter

concentration. Installation work will generate noise and dust, but it will be within working areas. Vehicular

movement in the premises will also generate dust.


Page 247

To mitigate the impact, following measures will be taken:

Regular sprinkling of the water will be done.

Regular preventing maintenance of machinery and transportation vehicles will be carried out.

Provision of silencer to noise generating machines, if required, and

Noise protection devices such as earmuffs/earplugs will be provided to workers working in noisy area.

10.2.2. Water supply & sanitation

During construction phase, water will be provided to workers for their requirement & for construction

activity. Water supply will be met from surface water source. Portable sanitation facilities will be provided

to maintain proper standards of hygiene. These facilities would preferably be connected to a septic tank and

shall be maintained properly to have least environmental impact.

10.2.3. Socio-Economic Environment

The proposed manpower requirement during construction will be 20-30nos. Unit will give preference to

local people through both direct andindirect employment.


Page 248

10.2.4. Health and Safety

Adequate rest area will be provided to the construction workers, truck drivers. The safety department will

supervise the safe working of the contractor and their employees. Work spots will be maintained clean,

provided with optimum lighting and enough ventilation to eliminate dust.

10.3. Environmental Management during the Operational Phase

EMP proposed for implementation is detailed under the following heads:

Air Pollution Management

Wastewater Management

Solid/Hazardous Waste Management

Noise Management

Greenbelt Development

Occupational Safety and Health

Implementation of EMP and monitoring programme

10.3.1. Air Pollution Management

10.3.1.1. Source of Air Pollution and Control Measures

Flue gas emission will be from stacks attached with 1no. of boiler (2 TPH), one stack attached to Thermic

Fluid Heater (2.0 lakhs kcal/hr.) and two stack attached to stand by D.G. Set (2x 250 kVA). Briquette will

be used as a fuel in Boiler and TFH and HSD in stand by D.G. Set. Most probable pollutants will be SPM,

SO2 and NOx. Cyclone, Bag Filter and water scrubber will be installed for control of PM (Particulate

Matter).

Process emission will be from stack attached with process vessel. Probable pollutants will be PM, SO2,

NOx. To control pollutants, Alkali Scrubbers will be installed for process emission; whereas in-built Bag

Filter and Cyclone & water scrubber will be installed as APCM for vent of drying equipment.

Furthermore, adequate stack height and facility for sampling such as ladder, platform & sampling point will

be provided as per the MPCB guidelines.

Action plan for control of fugitive emission

Unit will adopt following measures to control fugitive emission-

Entire process will be carried out in closed reactors,

Pneumatically transfer of liquid raw material in rector,

Provision of mechanical seals in pumps

Proper preventive maintenance of seals for tanks,

Raw material will be stored in the covered structure,

Provision of dust suppression system (water sprinklers) to control air borne dust,

Fly ash will be stored in covered sheds only,

Internal road will be concreted or paved to reduce the fugitive emission during vehicular movement,

Greenbelt will be developed around the plant,


Page 249

Frequent work area monitoring will be done ensure fugitive emissions level.

10.3.1.2. Measures for Solvent recovery

The solvent distillation activity is carried out for the minimizing the raw material cost & to reduce use of

fresh solvent in the process. The solvent recovery flow diagram as per follows:

Distillation column will be installed for the recovery of solvent. The unit shall be equipped with stainless

steel reactor, Stainless Steel packed column, Stainless Steel condensers, Stainless Steel receivers and

Stainless Steel collection tanks. The spent solvents from various processes shall be collected as mother

liquor from Production & will be sent for solvent recovery system. The distilled solvent shall be reused for

the reaction. The remaining spent residue will be send to disposal through Common Hazardous Waste

Treatment storage and Disposal facility (CHWTSDF). Adequate Firefighting system is provided to cover

the entire solvent recovery plant. The details of solvent used, solvent recovered and fresh makeup etc. are

given in Annexure 2 (ii) Detailed Manufacturing process of all products.

10.3.1.3. Odour Control Plan

Odour control outlines the methods by which odour emission will be systematically be assessed,reduced

and prevented potentially from the plant. Odour management will be done by followingmethods;

Removal of odour from collection air stream; effective air cleaning technologies like scrubbers,

bioreactors

Green belt development; can help to mitigate or obfuscate the odour problem

Reduction of odour at generation source: this is most effective way of controlling odour. This is

done by storing volatile material in closed container to prevent volatile emissionand carrying out

chemical reaction in a closed chamber.


Unit will satisfy its fresh water requirement from Surface water of MIDC water supply. Total water

requirement (Industrial + Domestic + Greenbelt) will be 246.0 KLD; out of which 73.0 KLD will be fresh

water requirement & 135.0 KLD will be recycle/treated water (ETP-RO permeate, Condensate water from

MEE). Total industrial wastewater generation will be 136.1 KLD. The main source of the industrial

wastewater generation will be from process (115.0 KLD), Washing (0.5 KLD), scrubber (1.6 KLD) Boiler

(3.8 KLD) & Cooling (5.5 KLD), others (9.7), Domestic wastewater generation will be 9.0 KLD.


Page 250

Effluent Management

1. Effluent is categorized as LCOD and HCOD based on COD value in terms of mg/Lit

2. Value more than 5000 mg/Lit is considered as LCOD and above as HCOD.

3. The corresponding streams of effluent are segregated and then sent for treatment to respective unit.

4. HCOD/ HTDS IS Treated in evaporation system. The unit has 3 no different units combined

together. Stripper column, MEE and ATFD. Condensate is pumped to RO with appropriate

Capacity of RO or sent to ETP biological treatment along with LCOD/LTDS effluent. [ If COD

/TDS within limit ].

5. LCOD/LTDS is treated in ETP for biological treatment. Pretreated effluent shall be stored in a

holding tank and then pumped to RO for further treatment.

Descriptionof Treatment:

The total water requirement is 246 KL. Waste water generated from plant premises will be 145 KL Out of

this 115 KLD will be high COD. [Manufacturing Process] and

21 KLD Will be from washings, laboratory usage, floor cleaning, equipment cleaning, product washing

and utensils washings. Boiler / cooling tower blow down etc. 9 KLD from domestic over flow from

septic tank. [Treated separately in STP as outlined below]

This waste water shall be pumped into above ground level tank for storage and neutralization of HCOD.

LCOD effluent then routed to Zero liquid discharge facility in plant premises. All treatment tanks will be

constructed and installed above ground level with proof lining.

HTDS/ HCOD will be sent to MEE system with stripper column followed by ATFD [Agitated thin film

dryer] The condensate from MEE/ATFD and LTDS/ LCOD effluents willbe sentto either Biological ETP

or recycled to MEE/ATFD. After pretreatment the effluent will be sent to RO system

Permeate from RO system 70-75% shallbe recycled and Reject shall be back to MEE system or can be

transferred to ETP biological treatment. Salts collected from ATFD system will be collected and sent to

CHWTSDF for safe disposal.

Effluent Management and ZLD system:

The effluent management system shall be developed to ensure ZLD. Effluent streams shall be segrated as

HCOD/ LCOD characterization. COD value upto 5000 mg/Lit is categorized as LCOD [ Low Chemical

Oxygen Demand] and COD value more than 5000 mg/Lit as HCOD [ High Chemical Oxygen

Demand].

HCOD / HTDS EFFLUENT

The treatment system facility consist of :

1. Screen Chamber

2. Collection tank/ Neutralization tank.

3. Stripper column

4. MEE double effect forced evaporation.

5. ATFD

Effluent is pumped to stripper column with marinating the flow and other conditions of temperature to

stripped low boiling and organic matter. The stripped condensate is collected and stored. It can be sending

to incinerator or sold to recycler.

Bottom aqueous part shall be be inlet to MEE calendriya for forced evaporation under steam pressure of 4-

bar with TVR [Thermo vapour Recompressor]. Condensate is collected in a holding tank. The concentrate

from MEE having about 10-15 % aqueous part is discharged to ATFD with appropriately regulating the


Page 251

flow for proper evaporation and discharge of solid as waste. Condensate from ATFD / MEE is sent to RO.

Permeate of RO is recycled and Reject is send to MEE/ATFD or ETP for Bio treatment along with

The solid discharged from ATFD Bottom is collected and packed in appropriate packaging material. It

contains about 5-10 % of moisture, sent to CHWTSDF for disposal.

LTDS/ LCOD effluent will be generated from process washing, floor washings, utensils cleaning ,

Laboratory operations, cooling tower blow down and other general operations is sent to Biological

treatment.

Primary Treatment

The effluent enters into 2 no oil and grease chamber and then to equalization tank for dilution process for

better functioning and effective treatment. The effluent is thoroughly mixed with the help of air to get a

constant composition of the effluent. Effluent PH is adjusted to 7-8 with either acid or alkali. Neutralized

effluent is pumped to primary setting tank where the settled solid is separated. The clarified effluent is sent

to secondary treatment. Settled sludge is centrifuged and filtrate is recycled. The solid sludge is unloaded

and stored at quarantine area then disposed of to CHWTSDF or land filling if quality is compatible.

Secondary Treatment

The secondary is a biological activated sludge process. A two stage activated sludge process is adopted.

Stage I

Primary treated effluent is made inlet to aeration tank where aerobic bacterial culture is maintained in

suspension referred as mixed liquor suspended solids [ MLSS].

The aerobic environment in the aerator is achieved by use of mechanical surface aerator or pure oxygen

which helps to maintain contents in a well mixed form with proper DO level. The effluent from aeration

tank is passed in to primary clarifier where the activated sludge is separated from treated waste water. A

portion of settled activated MLSS is retained. Over flow of primary goes to second stage of activated sludge

process called oxidation ditches.

Stage II

The surface aerator in series and connected in aeration tank. The treatment procedure is same as in stage I.

The overflow from the ditches is connected to secondary clarifier and collected in treated effluent sump.

Tertiary Treatment

The treated effluent collected from activated sludge process is sent to carbon and sand bed pressure filter

and collected in a separate holding tank and then pumped through RO, plant of appropriate capacity 150

kl/day [6.85 KL/Hr]. The pump flow is based on 20 hrs functioning.

75-80 % permeate Output is collected and recycled to Cooling Tower, Boiler feed, cleaning etc. RO Reject

is sent to Evaporation system [MEE/ ATFD] or ETP for biological treatment depending upon COD/TDS

values.


Page 252

10.3.3. Hazardous/Solid Waste Management

Main source of hazardous waste generation will be ETP waste (250 Kg/day) and Solvent Distillation

Residue (3958.14 Kg/month) will be disposed of at approved TSDF site. Evaporation Salts (8540 Kg/Day)

and Spent Carbon/ Hyflow (107.88 Kg/day) will be disposed of at approved TSDF site. Off Specification

Products (100 Kg/day) and Spent Oil/ Process Residue/ Waste (200 Kg/ Months) will be disposed through

CHWSTDF. Spent Mother Liquor (8275.05 Kg/day) and Spent Solvent (6747.828 Kg/day) will be Sale to

authorized user. Discarded containers and Drums Barrels (100 nos./ Month) will be send to authorised

dealers. Spent Oil/ Process Residue/ Waste and Chemical sludge, Oil and grease skimming residues will be

sending to CHWSTDF. Entire quantity of hazardous waste will be handled & disposed as per Hazardous

& Other Waste (Management & Transboundary Movement) Rules, 2016.

Storage and Transportation of Solid/Hazardous Waste:

Proper Hazardous waste storage area with impervious flooring and covered shed is provided for

storage of solid/hazardous waste.

Entire quantity of the hazardous waste is stored in the isolated hazardous waste storage area within

premises having leachate collection system and roof cover. The storage yard shall be properly

labelled for identification of wastes.

Hazardous waste shall not be stored for a period more than 90 days.

Records of the same shall be maintained and make them available for inspection.

Properly packed & labelled waste shall be transported through dedicated vehicle to authorized

TSDF facility.

10.3.4. Green belt development

The factory has its own land of 20000 Sq.m; out of which 6600.42 sq. m. area is available for greenbelt

development. At present, the Industry has planted 65 trees. As per the CPCB guidelines, 2500 tress required

to be planted. The remaining 1600 trees shall be planted within a year.

Development of greenbelt in and around the industry is an effective way to check pollutants and their

dispersion into surrounding areas. The degree of pollution attenuation by a green belt depends on its height

and width, foliage surface area and density. The main objective of the green belt around the factory is:

Mitigation of impacts due to fugitive emissions.

Attenuation of noise levels.

Ecological restoration.

Creation of the aesthetic environment.

Wastewater reuse.

Reduction in greenhouse gases and release of oxygen due to photosynthesis.Criteria for Selection

of species for Green Belt

Tolerance to water stress and extreme climatic conditions

The difference in height and growth habits

Aesthetic and pleasing appearance

Provide shade

Large biomass to provide fodder and nitrogen


Page 253

Improving wasteland

To suit specific climate and soil characteristics (local species).

Sustainability with minimum maintenance

Recommended plant species shall be utilized for the development of green belt and greenery in and

around the factory premises.

Native species

10.3.4.1. Suggested Plant Species for Green Belt

The plantation within the green belt should be heterogeneous in composition following native plants in a

mixed composition are suggested for green belt.

Table 10-1List of Plants Suggested For Green Belt

Sr.

No. Botanical name Family

Common

name

No. of tree

existing

No. of

trees

proposed

on site

Total no.

of trees

1 Cassia fistula Ceasalpiniaceae Bahava 10 200 210

2 Bombax ceiba Bombacaceae Sawar 12 200 212

3 Asltonia shcolaris Apocynaceae Saptaparni - 250 250

4 Macaranga peltata Euphorbiaceae Chandwar - 150 150

5 Schleichera oleosa Sapindaceae Kususm - 175 175

6 Microcos

paniculata Tiliaceae Shirali 15 180 195

7 Terminalia elliptica Combretaceae Ain 25 200 225

8 Terminalia

paniculata Combretaceae Kindal 03 150 153

9 Terminalia

bellirica Combretaceae Baheda - 80 80

Total 65 1585 1650

10.3.5. Occupational Health & Safety Plan

To maintain high standard in Health, Safety and Environment, necessary key mitigation measures &

action plan as EMP has been suggested as described below.

Post-employment health check-up programs will be carried out annually and all records &

documents related with employee health check-up program will be maintained.

As per RA report, all risk control & prevention measures in the unit will be implemented.

Necessary PPEs, safety equipment’s/materials to ensure healthy & safe work conditions will be

provided to employees.

All employees will be provided with required set of PPEs like ear plug, ear muff etc. where noise

levels in excess of 80 dB (A) are regularly generated.


Page 254

It is recommending that Pre-employment health check-up programs shall be carried out for every

new employee and all records & documents related with employee health check-up program shall

be maintained by the proponent.

Safety documents, procedures, guidelines along with MSDS shall be provided to the

associated/concerned personnel engaged in respective operational activities

Training programs & safety audit shall be done on regular basis to prevent impacts of the

operational activities on occupational health as well as to improve workplace condition & safe

work system.

The proponent shall ensure implementation of emergency management plan with provision of

fire-fighting equipment/facilities, first aid & medical facilities, evacuation procedures etc.

Proponent shall also ensure proper implementation & functioning as well as assess effectiveness

of this safety & emergency system on regular basis throughout the project operation phase.

10.3.6. Rain Water HarvestingScheme

The scheme of reuse of rainwater is implemented successfully in the unit and shall be maintained after

expansion. The total annual Rainwater Harvesting Potential of the industry is 2375.32 m3 per year. This

shall be stored in the tank and utilized for ground water recharge.

.The detailed rainwater harvesting plan is given in Annexure-V.

10.3.7. Storm water management

In developed area like Industrial estate or company premises, impervious surface such as pavements in

factory premises prevents precipitation from naturally soaking to the ground, instead of that water runs into

storm drains. Managing the quantity and quality of storm water is termed, "Storm water Management."

Storm water quantity can be estimated by three methods.

SCS Technique: Curve number method ofUSDA

Commercial Software: Storm water management model (SWMM) orSTORM

Rational Method

The details are included in Annexure-VI.

10.4. Post-Project Environmental Monitoring

The highlights of the integrated environmental monitoring plan are:

Regular monitoring of all gaseous emissions from stacks & fugitive emissions in the process areas.

The stack monitoring facilities like ladder, platform and port-hole of all the stacks maintained in

good condition.

The performance of air pollution control equipments will be evaluated based on these monitoring

results.

Water consumption in the unit recorded daily.

Analysis of effluent will be carried out regularly.

Performance of effluent treatment plant units, RO and Spray Dryer will be evaluated based on

above analysis results.


Page 255

Regular noise level monitoring carried out.

Greenbelt properly maintained and new plantation programmes undertaken frequently.

Post-project monitoring plan is tabulated below.

Table 10-2Environment Monitoring Plan

Sr. No Particulars Monitoring

Frequency

Sampling

Duration

Important

Monitoring

Parameter

1 Industry main Gate &

2 Monitoring Location Quarterly 24 hr.

PM10, PM2.5, SO2,

NOx, VOC, CO,

HC, O3, Benzene,

BaP, Lead,

Ammonia, Arsenic,

Nickel

2 Boiler & DG Set

Stacks Quarterly

As per CPCB

Guidelines

Particulate matter

& SO2

3 Process Stack Quarterly As per CPCB

Guidelines

Aid Mist,

Ammonia, CO2,

HL, HNO2

4 Untreated & Treated

Effluents [ETP Water] Daily Grab

pH, TDS, SS,

BOD, COD, Oil &

Grease SO4,

chlorides, DO,

Bioassay using

APHA or BIS

Methods

5

Noise Levels at 3

Location within plant

site

Quarterly 8 hr. Equivalent to Noise

Level in dB

6 Work Zone at 3-4

locations Quarterly 8 hr.

VOCs, RSPM, acid

fumes, HCL

10.5. Environment Management Budget Allocation

Total capital cost and recurring cost/annum earmarked for environment pollution control measures will be

as under.

Table 10-3Budget Allocation for Environment Management

Sr. No Description Capital Cost

Rs.in Lakh

Recurring Cost Per

Annum

Rs. In Lakh

1 Air Pollution Control System, Dust

collection and cyclone separator 10 2

2 Water Pollution Control. [ETP, RO

and STP] 50 5


Page 256

3 Environment Monitoring 6 1.5

4 Rain water harvesting [ RWH Piping

and Tank] 15 1.0

5 Occupational Health centre 2.0 2.0

6 Green Belt Development. [ Saplings/

Manure and land development] 5 1.0

7 Solid waste Management 5.0 15

8 Energy Saving Devises and Solar

Power 6 1

9 Safety and firefighting, Fire hydrant

system. 17 3

= Total 116.0 31.50

10.6. Environmental Management Cell

Unit will set up separate Environment Management Cell (EMC) to implementation of all the mitigation

measures. The project proponent shall provide a fully equipped laboratory to carry out the analysis. The

major duties & responsibilities of EMC will be as follows:

To implement the Environmental Management Plan,

To ensure regular operation & maintenance of APCM,

To assure regulatory compliance with all relevant rules & regulations,

To minimize environmental impacts by strict adherence to the EMP,

To initiate environmental monitoring as per approved schedule,

Review & interpretation of monitored results and corrective measures in case monitored results are

above the specified limit,

Maintain documentation of good environmental practices and applicable environmental laws as

ready reference,

Maintain environmental related records,

Coordination with regulatory agencies, external consultants and monitoring laboratories, and

Maintaining log of public complaints and the action taken


Page 257

10.6.1. Hierarchical Structure of Environmental Management Cell

The hierarchical structure of the unit is given below:

Figure 10-1 Environment Management Cell

10.6.2. Environment Policy

There will be an Environment Policy approved by the management. Theycommit themselves to:

Ensure continuous improvement in environmental performance of our works through protective

environmental management system.

Comply with applicable legal and other requirements related to environmental aspects.

Conserve the resources particularly water, power by fixing and improving consumption norms.

Concept of cleaner production will be adopted.

Ensure involvement of all employees and contractors in effective implementation of EMS through

training and awareness.

Promote awareness among local surrounding community for preservation and maintaining clean

environment.

10.7. Corporate Environment Responsibility (CER) Activities

Need for CER plan is for the health, education, sustainable lifestyles, social mobilization, infrastructure,

water harvesting, agriculture and environmental protection, for the socio-economic development of the

project, to enhance the quality of social health.

DBDPL will carry out its duties under Corporate Environment Responsibility (CER). This CER plan has

been made from this perspective, to ensure the quality of life and quality of study area people will be

improved.

Corporate Environment responsibility is the commitment of businesses to contribute to sustainable

economic development by working with the employees, their families, local community and society at large

to improve their lives in ways that are good for business as well as overall development. It is a voluntary

activity of a company that supports social interests and environmental issues. It is a principle through which

the business houses contribute to the welfare of the society and not only maximize their profits. CER, in

fact, is about business giving back to the society. VOL proposes to allocate 1% of their total expansion cost


Page 258

for CER activities as suggested in MoEFCC O.M. regarding Corporate Environment Responsibility vide.

F.No. 22-65/2017-IA III.

For proposed expansion project, manpower of 60 Nos is required; company propose to give employment

for local people which will help to improve their economic status

The proposed project of Shalini Organics Pvt. Ltd. is a green field project. As per criteria given in

the OM, the fund to be kept aside by us is Rs. 17.24 Lakhs (2% of Proposed cost i.e. Rs. 8.62 Cr.)

CER budget will be spent on creation of infrastructural facilities, health, education, environment,

water, Sanitation & hygiene, road & skill development etc. activities to be carried out in discussion

with District Authority as suitable in nearby vicinity.


Page 259

11. SUMMARY & CONCLUSION

11.1. Overall Justification for Implementation of Project

The proposed project of M/s. Shalini Organics Pvt. Ltd. will pose benefits to both social environment and

economy of the country. To ensure sustainability of environmental components, Company will take upmost

precautions by adopting finest mitigation measures /technology

Company proposed to provide employment to 60 numbers of regional/local populates. Apart from this

annual CER activity of company will also improve the socio economic status of regional environment.

11.2. Explanation of How, Adverse Effects Have Been Mitigated

Through implementation of mitigation measures, suggested in this EIA report; company will be able to

maintain the sustainability of environment. The summaries for how adverse effects will be mitigated, during

operational phase are mentioned below in Table 11.1.

Table 11-1Summary on Impacts and Mitigation Measures

Environmental

Component

Summary on Impacts and Mitigation Measures

Air Environment Company proposed stack of 30 meters’ height for 2 TPH Boiler for their

proposed activity. However, Bag filter of suitable capacity will be utilized

to collect dust from briquette burning activity in boiler operation.

To cater with additional load of process emission, company will install

additional 3 nos. of alkali scrubber.

Water Environment It will be Zero Liquid Discharge plant. Therefore, there will not be any

adverse impact on aquatic environment.

Noise Environment Dispersion of Noise will be controlled by providing acoustic enclosures to

all noise generating equipment’s.

Greenbelt will be developed to control noise propagation outside the

factory premises.

The health impact of noise will be mitigated by providing PPEs and

adopting method of job rotation.

Soil Environment The adverse effects on soil will be mitigated by providing ZLD system,

paved HW/Slag storage area. The disposal of waste will be done as per HW

management rule.

Biotic Environment The project is located in MIDC area. However upmost precaution will be

taken to avoid release of any toxic pollutant into the environment.

Social Environment The adverse impacts of company operation on social environment will be

mitigated by adopting all above stated measures. Apart from this, company

will be committed towards development of Social environment by

conducting CER activities and providing jobs to the locals.

11.3. Conclusion

It can be seen from the study that air emission due to proposed capacity project will less than 50 mg/nm3.

Adequate stack height and control measures will be provided for proposed boiler. Zero effluent discharge

treatment system is proposed for the unit. Ground water table will be not expected to be disturbed as no

ground water withdrawal is proposed. Moreover, rain water harvesting system shall be provided. There will

not be significant impacts of the unit on other environmental aspects such as meteorology, topography and


Page 260

geology, mineral resources, archaeology, cultural, religious and land use. On the contrary, the project will

have positive impacts through contribution to improvement in socio economic environment.

Other component of environment such as soil, flora, fauna etc. would also not experience significant

adverse impact as unit is already located in the designated industrial area. The conclusion emerging out of

the EIA study suggests that the unit shall adequately take the control measures and high standard of

mitigation efforts. It is therefore requested that necessary environmental clearance may be considered for

the proposed capacity of M/s. Shalini Organics Pvt. Ltd. with appropriate stipulations.


Page 261

12. DISCLOSURE OF THE CONSULTANT

DR. SUBBARAO’S ENVIRONMENT CENTER:

“Dr. Subbarao’s Environment Center (SEC)”, formerly known as “Water and Waste Water Research

Centre”, is established by an entrepreneur Dr. B. Subbarao in the year 1982 with an objective to mitigate

Environmental Impacts and Protect Environment. It is QCI-NABET accredited consulting organization, for

conducting EIA studies. SEC is also NABL accredited laboratory. SEC is one of the most prominent

Environmental Consulting Organizations in the country. The EIA/EMP projects undertaken by SEC so far

Environmental Clearence from MOEF GOVERNMENT of India, New Delhi

1. Dr. Baburao Bapuji Tanpure S.S.K.Ltd; Rahuri, (Dist) Ahmednagar, Maharashtra State

“Expansion of the Distillery capacity from 30 KLD to 45 KLD.

2. Mula S.S.K.Ltd; (Post) :-Sonai (Dist):- Ahmednagar, Maharashtra State “Establishing a Distillery

of 30 KLD”

3. Shri Chhatrapati S.S.S.K. Ltd; Kagal. (Dist) Kolhapur, Maharashtra State. “Establishing a 45 KLD

Distillery”

4. Shri Datta Shethkari S.S.K.Ltd; Shirol. (Dist) Kolhapur, Maharashtra State, “Expansion of the

Distillery Capacity from 30 KLD to 60 KLD”

5. Somaiya Organic Chemicals Ltd; Sameerwadi, (Dist) Bagalkot, Karnataka State. “Expansion of

the Distillery capacity from 30KLD to 60 KLD”

6. Vishwanath Sugars Ltd; Bellad- Bagewadi, (Dist) Belgaum, Karnataka State. “Establishment of

Distillery of 35KLD”

7. Expansion of the Distillery Capacity from 75 KLPD to 95 KLPD at Krishna S.S.K.Ltd., Rethare

Bk., Shivanagar, Karad (Tq), Satara (Dist), Maharashtra State.

8. Expansion of the Distillery Capacity from 45 KLPD to 75 KLPD at Shri Dnyeshwar S.S.K.Ltd.,

Dnyeshwarnagar, Newasa (Tq), Ahmednagar (Dist), Maharashtra State.

9. Gangamai Sugar & Allced Industries, Aurangabad, “Establishment of 30 KLPD Distillery Unit”.

10. Expansion of the Distillery Capacity from 60 KLPD to 200 KLPD TOR for Somaiya Organo

Chemicals (A Unit of The Godavari Sugar Mills Ltd., Bagalkot (Dist), Karnataka State.

11. Establishment of 10,000 TCD Sugar 30 MW Co-generation Based on Bagasse and 240 KLPD

TOR for Shree Renuka Sugars Ltd., Belgaum, at the Village Nandur, Mangalweda (Tq), Solapur

(Dist).

12. Expansion of the Sugar Capacity from 6000 to 7500 TCD and setting up 33 MW Co-generation

Unit based on Bagasse at S.M. Shankarrao Mohite Patil S.S.K.Ltd.

13. Environmental Clearence for the Establishment of 30 KLPD Distillery at Hutatma Kisan Ahir

S.S.K.Ltd.

14. Setting up 41 MW Co-generation Unit (Interstate Distance below 25 KM) based on Bagasse at

Shri Hiranyakeshi S.S.K.Niyamit, Sankeshwar, Belgaum (Dist), Karnataka State.

15. Expansion of Sugar Plant capacity from 2500 to 5000 TCD, Expansion of Distillery capacity from

30 KLPD to 60 KLPD & establishing Co-generation Plant of 16.2 MW at Bhaurao Chavan SSK

Ltd., Laxminagar, Deagaon-Yelegaon, Nanded (Dsit).

16. Expansion of Distillery capacity from 30 KLPD to 45 KLPD at The Kopargaon SSK Ltd.,

Gautamnagar, Kolpewadi, Kopargaon (Tq), Ahmednagar (Dist).


Page 262

17. Expansion of Sugar Plant capacity from 5000 to 11,000 TCD, Co-generation from 41 MW to 52

MW and Distillery capacity from 54 to 84 KLPD at Shree Hiranyakeshi SSK Niyamit,

Sankeshwar, Belgaum (Dist).

18. Expansion of Distillery capacity from 200 KLPD to 320 KLPD based on Sugarcane Molasses and

Grains and ENA capacity from 40 KLPD to 260 KLPD at Godavari Bio Refineries Ltd.,

Sameerwadi. Bagalkot (Dist) State Karnataka.

19. Expansion of Distillery capacity from 80 KLPD to 150 KLPD and establishing 7.5 MW Co-

generation Unit at Somaiya Organo Chemicals, (A Unit of The Godavari Sugars Ltd.,) Sakarwadi,

Kopargaon (Tq), Ahmednagar (Dist). Maharashtra State.

20. Expansion of Acetaldehyde production from 1500 MT/Month to 2100 M/Month and Ethyl Acetate

from 5400 MT/Month to 8700 MT/Month by Godavari Bio-refineries Ltd at Samerwadi, Bagalkot

(Dist), Karnataka State

21. Establishment of distillery to produce 30 KLPD Rectified Spirit/30 KLPD ENA/ 30 KLPD

Ethanol and 1 MW co-generation power by Utopian Sugars Limited, Kachrewadi, Tal.

Mangalwedha, Dist. Solapur, Maharashtra

22. Expansion of molasses based Distillery from 35 to 65 KLPD by M/s. Brima Sagar Maharashtra

Distilleries Ltd., at Shreepur, Tal. Malshiras, Dist. Solapur, Maharashtra.

ENVIRONMENTAL CLEARANCES FROM STATE LEVEL APPRAISAL COMMITTEES:

1. “Expansion of Sugar factory, capacity from 4500 TCD to 6000 TCD and expansion of the

Distillery capacity from 30 KLD to 60 KLD, Acetic Acid plant of 25 TCD and 26 MW Co-

generation Unit based on Bagasse” at Shri Sahakarao Maharshi Shankarao Mohite Patil SSK Ltd.,

Akluj. Solapur (Dist), Maharashtra State.

2. “Setting up 25 TCD pulp & Paper Unit and Distillery of 30 KLD” at Kopergaon SSK Ltd.,

Gautamnagar, Kolpewadi (Tq), Ahmednagar (Dist), Maharashtra State.

3. “Setting up 20 TCD Pulp & Paper Unit and expansion of the Sugar factory capacity from 2500

TCD to 4250 TCD at Rahuri SSK Ltd., Ahmednagar (Dist), Maharashtra State.

4. “Expansion of the Sugar factory capacity from 2500 TCD to 3500 TCD and setting up 21 MW

Co-generation Unit based on Bagasse” at Mula SSK Ltd., Sonai, Ahmednagar (Dist), Maharashtra

State.

5. “Setting up 26 MW Co-generation Unit at Dnyaneshwar SSK Ltd., Dnyaneshwarnagar,

Ahmednagar (Dist), Maharashtra State.

6. “Setting up 24 MW Co-generation unit based on Bagasse” at Jawahar SSSK Ltd., Hupari,

Kolhapur (Dist), Maharashtra State.

7. “Expansion of the Sugar factory capacity from 2500 TCD to 3500 TCD” at Shree Chhatrapati

Shahu SSK Ltd., Kagal, Kolhapur (Dist), Maharashtra State.

8. “Expansion of the Sugar factory capacity from 5000 TCD to 7000 TCD” at Shree Datta SSSK

Ltd., Shirol (Tq), Kolhapur (Dist), Maharashtra State.

9. “Expansion of the Sugar factory capacity from 5000 TCD to 7500 TCD” at Sahayadri SSK Ltd.,

Karad (Tq), Satara (Dist), Maharashtra State

10. “2500 TCD Sugar factory and 21 MW Co-generation based on Bagasse” at Gurudatta Sugars Ltd.,

Takaliwadi, Shirol (Tq), Kolhapur (Dist), Maharashtra State.

11. “Expansion of the Sugar factory capacity from 5000 TCD to 7500 TCD at Krishna SSK Ltd.,

Rethare Bk, Shivnagar (Po), Karad (Tq), Satara (Dist), Maharashtra State.


Page 263

12. “Expansion of the Sugar factory capacity from 2500 TCD to 4000 TCD and Co-generation unit of

14 MW” at Shri Pandurang SSK Ltd., Shreepur, Solapur (Dist), Maharashtra State.

13. Expansion of the Sugar factory capacity from 2500 TCD to 3500 TCD and setting up 15 MW Co-

generation Unit at Hutatma Kisan Ahir S.S.K.Ltd., Walwe (Tq), Sangli (Dist), Maharashtra State.

14. Environmental Clearance for establishing 44 MW Co-generation Unit by Urjankur Shree

Tatyasaheb Kore Warna Power Company Ltd., at Warnanagar, Kolhapur (Dist).

15. Environmental Clearance for establishing 36 MW Co-generation Unit by Urjankur Shree Datta

Power Company Ltd., at Shirol, Kolhapur (Dsit), Maharashtra State.

16. Establishing 13 MW Co-generation Unit by Dwarkadish Sugars Lyd., Satana, Maharashtra State.

17. Expansion of Sugar Plant capacity from 2500 to 5500 TCD, Co-generation Plant capacity from 14

MW to 39 MW at Vishwanath Sugars Ltd., Bellad-Bagewadi, Karnataka State.

18. Expansion of the Sugar factory capacity from 500 TCD to 10,000 TCD and establishing Co-

generation Plant of 40 MW at Nirani Sugars Ltd., Mudhol, Bagalkot (Dist), Karnataka State.

19. Expansion of the Sugar factory capacity from 7,500 TCD to 15,000 TCD and Co-generation

capacity from 24 MW to 64 MW at Godavari Biorefineries Ltd., Samerwadi, Bagalkot (Dsit),

Karnataka State

20. Expansion of Sugar factory capacity from 7500 TCD to 9000 TCD at Dattanagar, Tal. Shirol, Dist.

Kolhapur by Shri. Datta Shetakari Sakhar karkhana Limited

21. Expansion of Sugar factory capacity from 4000 TCD to 5500 TCD and 12 MW to 27 MW by

Krishna SSK Niyamit, Athani

22. Expansion of Sugar factory capacity from 7500 TCD to 10000 TCD by Sahakar Maharshi

Shankarrao Mohite Patil SSK Limited

23. Proposed expansion in capacity through modernization in technologyat Plot No. E-89, MIDC

Ranjangaon, Tal. Shirur, Dist. Pune, Maharashtra by M/s. SI Group India Pvt. Ltd.

24. Expansion of Distillery capacity from 30 KLPD to 60 KLPD to produce Rectified

Spirit/ENA/Ethanol at Laxminagar, Degaon-Yelegaon, Tal Ardhapur, Dist. Nanded, Maharashtra

by Bhaurao Chavan Sahakari Sakhar Karkhana Limited

25. Expansion of sugarcane crushing capacity from 9,000 TCD to 15,000 TCD, Distillery capacity

from 60 KLPD to 90 KLPD and establishing Co-generation Power Plant of 21 MW and 5MW

from Incineration Boiler. at Dattanagar, Tal. Shirol, Dist. Kolhapur, Maharashtra by Shree Datta

Shetkari Sahakari Sakhar Karkhana Limited

26. Expansion of distillery from 30 KLPD to 45 KLPD RS/ENA/Ethanol based on molasses/ 45

KLPD Ethanol based on SDS (Special Denatured Spirit) at Village Kacharewadi, Tal.

Mangalwedha, Dist. Solapur, Maharashtra-413 305 by M/s. Utopian Sugars Ltd.

ONGOING PROJECTS AT STATE LEVEL APPRAISAL COMMITTEES

1. Proposed expansion in manufacturing capacity of the synthetic organic Chemicals from 2839.625

MT/M to 3308.625 MT/M at plot no. 108, 109, 110 roth (bk.), MIDC Roha, Tal. Roha, Dist.

Raigad by M/s. Anshul Speciality Molecules Pvt. Ltd.

2. Manufacture of API products (330 MT/M) at Plot No- B-20, MIDC LoteParshuram, Tal-Khed,

Dist-Ratnagiri, Maharashtra by Taaj Healthcare Chemicals Private Limited

3. Expansion in manufacturing capacity of API products from 474 MT/Annum to 930 MT/Annum

at Plot No. K-4/4, MIDC Mahad, Tal.- Mahad, District - Raigad, Maharashtra, by M/s. Kopran

Research Laboratories Ltd


Page 264

4. Expansion in Manufacturing Capacity of Synthetic Organic Chemicals at K-4/4, Additional IDC,

At Post Bhirwadi, Tal. Mahad, Dist. Raigad by Kopran Research Laboratories Limited

5. Manufacturing of API products (210 MT/M) at PlotNo. D-12/12, 12/13, 12/14, MIDC Lote-

Parshuram, Tal. Khed, Dist. Ratnagiri, Maharashtra by Litmus Organics Private Limited

6. Manufacturing of API products (190 MT/M) at Plot No- G-13, MIDC Lote-Parshuram, Tal-Khed,

Dist-Ratnagiri, Maharashtra by Suyash Industries

Address for Correspondance:

Address: “Arundhati”, M.S.E.B Road, Opp. Sahayog Nagar, Vishrambag, Sangli.

Contact No. (0233) 2301857, Mobile No. 9372109522, 9890992118

Email: [email protected]

mailto:[email protected]


Page 265

NABET CRTIFICATE


Page 266

NABL CERTIFICATE


Page 267

JV ANALYTICAL SERVICES CERTIFICATE

proposed active pharmaceutical - Environmental Clearance

Documents

Transcript of proposed active pharmaceutical - Environmental Clearance